Matrox MXO2 Installation and User Guide (Windows version)

Matrox MXO2 Installation and User Guide (Windows version)
Matrox MXO2
Installation and User Guide
(Windows version)
January 14, 2013
Y11125-201-0721
Trademarks
Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd. ...........................................................................Matrox®, A/V Tools™, Axio™, CompressHD™,
Convert DVI™, DigiSuite™, Matrox MAX™,
MtxConvert.utils™, Mtx.utils™, MXO™,
RT.X2™
Adobe Systems Inc..............................................................................................Adobe®, After Effects®, Encore®, Flash®,
Photoshop®, Prelude®, Premiere®
Apple Computer, Inc. ...........................................................................................Apple®, iPhone®, iPod®, QuickTime®
Autodesk, Inc. .....................................................................................................Autodesk ®, 3ds Max®, Combustion®
Avid Technology, Inc............................................................................................Avid®, Media Composer®, NewsCutter®,
Symphony ®
eyeon Software Inc. ............................................................................................Fusion®
HDMI Licensing LLC. ..........................................................................................HDMI™
Intel Corporation .................................................................................................Intel®
Livestream LLC ...................................................................................................Livestream™, Procaster™
Microsoft Corporation..........................................................................................Microsoft®, Expression®, Windows®
NewTek, Inc. .......................................................................................................LightWave 3D®
NVIDIA Corporation..............................................................................................NVIDIA®, GeForce®
Panasonic (Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.)......................................................Panasonic®, DVCPRO™, DVCPRO50™,
DVCPRO HD™
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) ..................PCMCIA™, ExpressCard®
PCI-SIG ...............................................................................................................PCI-SIG®, PCIe ®
Silicon Graphics International ..............................................................................OpenGL®
Sony Corporation ................................................................................................Sony®, XDCAM®, Blu-ray Disc™, DVCAM™,
HDV™, XDCAM EX ™
Telestream, Inc. ..................................................................................................Telestream®, Wirecast®
Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) ..............................................................JVC™, D-9™, HDV™
ASIO is a trademark and software of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other nationally and internationally recognized
trademarks and tradenames are hereby acknowledged.
Copyright © 2013 Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd. reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time and without notice.
The information provided by this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Matrox
Electronic Systems Ltd. for its use; nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties resulting from its use. No
license is granted under any patents or patent rights of Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd.
Unauthorized recording or use of broadcast television programming, video tape, or other copyrighted material may violate copyright
laws. Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd. assumes no responsibility for the illegal duplication, use, or other acts that infringe on the
rights of copyright owners.
Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd.
1055 St. Regis Blvd., Dorval, Quebec, Canada H9P 2T4
Tel: (514) 685-2630 Fax: (514) 685-2853 World Wide Web: www.matrox.com
i
Matrox License Agreement, Warranty, and Service
A. Matrox software license agreement for single-user products
By installing the software, you, the original purchaser, indicate your acceptance of these terms. If you do not
agree to the terms of this agreement, please return your Matrox product to your Matrox representative.
This Matrox software, any included sample images and other files (the “Software”), is copyrighted by Matrox
Electronic Systems Ltd. All rights are reserved. You are granted a license to use the Software only, subject to the
following restrictions and limitations:
1 The license is to you the original purchaser only, and is not transferable without written permission of Matrox.
2 You may install the Software on an unlimited number of computers owned or leased by you in any location.
However, you must use the Software on a single computer owned or leased by you at a time in conjunction for
the purpose of operating the Matrox hardware.
3 For the purposes of clarity, notwithstanding the fact that you may install the Software on more than one
computer owned or leased by you, you may not use the Software on more than a single machine at a time,
even if you own or lease more than one machine, without the express written consent of Matrox.
4 You may make back-up copies of the Software for your own use only, subject to the use limitations of this
license.
5 You may not engage in, nor permit third parties to engage in, any of the following:
a Providing or disclosing the Software to third parties.
b Providing use of the Software in a computer service business, network, time-sharing, multiple CPU, or
c
d
e
f
g
multi user arrangement to users who are not individually licensed by Matrox.
Making alterations or copies of any kind in the Software (except as specifically permitted above).
Attempting to disassemble, decompile, or reverse-engineer the Software in any way.
Granting sublicenses, leases, or other rights in the Software to others.
Making copies, or verbal or media translations of the user's guide.
Making telecommunication data transmissions of the Software.
Matrox reserves the right to terminate this license without prejudice to any additional recourses Matrox may have
against you if you violate any of its terms and conditions.
B. Software limited warranty
MATROX WARRANTS TO YOU, THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER, WHO PROVIDES AN ADEQUATE
PROOF OF PURCHASE, THAT THE MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS RECORDED IS FREE
FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE, AND THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL PERFORM SUBSTANTIALLY AS DESCRIBED IN THE RELATED
DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED BY MATROX FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE
OF PURCHASE.
MATROX PROVIDES YOU THE SOFTWARE AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION ON AN “AS IS” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS WELL AS THE WARRANTY AGAINST HIDDEN OR
LATENT DEFECTS, ALL OF WHICH MATROX SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS (AND YOU, THE
ORIGINAL PURCHASER, BY ACCEPTING THE PRODUCT, SPECIFICALLY ACCEPTS SUCH
DISCLAIMER AND WAIVER) TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. THE ENTIRE RISK
AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. SHOULD
THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT MATROX, ITS DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS)
ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
MATROX DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR
Matrox License Agreement, Warranty, and Service
ii
THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR PERFORM WITH ANY
HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY THIRD PARTIES.
C. End-user registration
Before using your Matrox product, please take a moment to register your product in the Matrox Support
section of our website at www.matrox.com/video/support. The information you provide will assist Matrox
to quickly diagnose and correct any problem that might arise when using the product. Only registered end
users are entitled to customer support.
D. Hardware limited warranty
MATROX WARRANTS TO YOU, THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER, WHO PROVIDES AN ADEQUATE
PROOF OF PURCHASE, THAT THE MATROX HARDWARE PRODUCTS WILL BE FREE FROM
FACTORY DEFECTS FOR A PERIOD OF THREE (3) YEARS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE.
MATROX WILL REPAIR OR REPLACE, AT THE CHOICE OF MATROX, THE MATROX
HARDWARE PRODUCTS WHICH PROVE TO BE DEFECTIVE DURING THE WARRANTY
PERIOD, PROVIDED THAT THEY ARE RETURNED TO MATROX, SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING LIMITATIONS:
Matrox's limited warranty covers only those defects which arise as a result of normal use of the hardware
and does not apply to any:
$
improper or inadequate maintenance;
$
incompatibilities due to the user's hardware or software applications with or in which the Matrox
product interfaces;
$
product of a special or custom-made nature;
$
unauthorized modification or misuse;
$
improper installation, misapplication or negligence;
$
operation outside the product's environmental specifications;
$
improper site preparation or maintenance;
$
software;
$
other causes that do not relate to a product defect;
$
defects or damage suffered as a result of force majeure (including theft);
$
defects or damage suffered as a result of normal wear and tear, and/or
$
stolen goods.
If Matrox receives from you, during the applicable warranty period notice of a defect in a warranted
hardware product and the defective Matrox product in question, Matrox shall at its sole option, either repair
or replace the product, and shall return the repaired product or a replacement product within a reasonable
delay. The replacement product may not be new, provided that it has functionality at least equal to that of
the product being replaced. This warranty is valid in any country where Matrox hardware products are
distributed by Matrox or its authorized dealers.
This limited warranty statement gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary
from state to state in the United States, from province to province in Canada, and from country to country
elsewhere in the world.
E. Limitations of warranty
EXCEPT FOR THE SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND HARDWARE LIMITED WARRANTY
STATEMENTS, NEITHER MATROX NOR ANY OF ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS MAKES ANY
OTHER WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO
MATROX PRODUCTS. MATROX SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS (AND YOU, BY ACCEPTING THE
MATROX PRODUCT, SPECIFICALLY ACCEPTS SUCH DISCLAIMER AND WAIVES) ALL OTHER
Matrox License Agreement, Warranty, and Service
iii
WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR OR INTENDED
PURPOSE OR USE AND THE WARRANTY AGAINST LATENT DEFECTS, WITH RESPECT TO THE
HARDWARE AND/OR SOFTWARE. MATROX FURTHER DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY THAT
MATROX PRODUCTS, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, WILL BE FREE FROM INFRINGEMENT OF ANY
THIRD PARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY OR PROPRIETARY RIGHTS.
TO THE EXTENT THAT THESE LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENTS ARE INCONSISTENT WITH
THE LAW OF THE LOCALITY WHERE YOU PURCHASED THE MATROX PRODUCT, THESE LIMITED
WARRANTY STATEMENTS SHALL BE DEEMED MODIFIED TO BE CONSISTENT WITH SUCH
LOCAL LAW. UNDER SUCH LOCAL LAW, CERTAIN LIMITATIONS OF THESE LIMITED WARRANTY
STATEMENTS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES PROVIDED IN THESE LIMITED
WARRANTY STATEMENTS ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
F. Limitations of liability
EXCEPT FOR THE OBLIGATIONS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH IN THE SOFTWARE LIMITED
WARRANTY AND HARDWARE LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENTS, IN NO EVENT SHALL
MATROX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
FORESEEABLE OR UNFORESEEABLE, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, DELICT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND/OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA,
PRODUCTION REVENUE AND/OR PROFIT OF IN CONNECTION WITH THE MATROX PRODUCT OR
ANY BUSINESS INTERRUPTION. WITHOUT PREJUDICE TO THE FOREGOING, ANY LIABILITY OF
MATROX FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU
FOR THE DEFECTIVE HARDWARE IN QUESTION.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, MATROX'S ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD. MATROX DOES NOT OFFER ANY OTHER WARRANTY WITH
RESPECT TO MATROX HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE OR ANY OTHER HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE.
YOU SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL APPLICABLE TAXES, DUTIES AND CUSTOMS FEES ON
ANY REPLACEMENT UNIT, AS WELL AS ALL TRANSPORT, INSURANCE, STORAGE AND OTHER
CHARGES INCURRED ON ALL RETURNED PRODUCTS.
G. Indemnification disclaimer
Matrox disclaims and shall have no obligation to indemnify or defend you or any third party in respect of any
actual or alleged infringement of any actual or pending patents, copyright or other intellectual property rights.
Matrox shall have no liability arising out of any such actual or alleged intellectual property infringement.
MATROX SPECIFICALLY MAKES NO REPRESENTATION AND DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT.
H. Unauthorized use
THE MATROX LICENSED SOFTWARE AND ANY DOCUMENTATION RELATED THERETO ARE NOT
DESIGNED, INTENDED, OR AUTHORIZED FOR USE IN ANY TYPE OF SYSTEM OR APPLICATION IN
WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR (E.G., MEDICAL SYSTEMS, LIFE SUSTAINING OR LIFE
SAVING SYSTEMS). Should the LICENSEE license or use the Matrox Licensed Software for any such
unintended or unauthorized use, the Licensee shall indemnify and hold Matrox and its officers, subsidiaries and
affiliates harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of,
directly or indirectly, any claim of product liability, personal injury or death associated with such unintended or
Matrox License Agreement, Warranty, and Service
iv
unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Matrox was negligent regarding the design or manufacture
of the Licensed Software.
I. Choice of law
This Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Province of
Quebec, excluding any conflict of laws provisions. All disputes arising out of this Agreement shall be
subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the Province of Quebec, district of Montreal, and the
parties agree and submit to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction and venue of these Courts.
J. Procedure for returning goods
No returned goods, for service or otherwise, will be accepted without prior authorization from Matrox. To
obtain return authorization, contact Matrox Customer Support (see the contact information at
www.matrox.com/video/support). Once approved, Matrox will contact you with your Returned
Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number. Matrox cannot be responsible for units returned without an
RMA number. Matrox will advise you of the shipping address. The packaging must indicate the RMA
number on the outside. It is strongly recommended that a copy of the original packing slip which states the
serial number of the items you're returning be included with the returned merchandise. This will speed up
processing.
Each individual, returned unit or group of units MUST have an RMA number issued by Matrox. Matrox
must authorize the number of units grouped under one RMA number. Any units received without prior
approval by Matrox will be returned to you freight collect.
You shall be responsible for the cost of consolidated freight (one way only) for warranty units from your
location to the location designated by Matrox. Once repaired, Matrox will incur the cost of consolidated
freight for warranty units to your location.
Matrox License Agreement, Warranty, and Service
v
Matrox End-user VFW Software Codec License Agreement (“Agreement”)
IMPORTANT - PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING,
COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE. THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU THE END USER
(“END USER”) AND MATROX ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS LTD. (“MATROX”) CONCERNING THE MATROX
VIDEO FOR WINDOWS SOFTWARE CODEC PACKAGE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SOFTWARE”) WHICH END
USER WISHES TO USE FOR PERSONAL USE. END USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT IT WILL
BE LEGALLY BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Supported formats: DV/DVCAM, DVCPRO, DVCPRO50, DVCPRO HD, MPEG-2 I-frame SD, MPEG-2 I-frame
HD (includes 720p, full-size 1080i/p, and 1440x1080i/p), MPEG-2 I-frame SD + Alpha, MPEG-2 I-frame HD +
Alpha, Offline HD, HDV and EZ-HDV (playback only), Uncompressed 8-bit and 10-bit SD, Uncompressed 8-bit and
10-bit HD, Uncompressed 8-bit and 10-bit SD + Alpha, Uncompressed 8-bit and 10-bit HD + Alpha, EZ-MXF
(playback only), and Motion-JPEG (playback only).
1. License
Matrox hereby grants the End User a non-exclusive, non-transferable, royalty-free, right to use and copy in
object code form the Software for internal purposes in conjunction with a Matrox product only (the “Purpose”),
subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. End user shall only use the Software on a single computer
at a time. End User must maintain all copyright notices on all copies of the Software. Matrox may make changes
to the Software at any time without prior notice. In addition, Matrox is under no obligation whatsoever to update,
maintain, or provide new versions of the Software or to provide any support in connection with the Software.
2. Restrictions
End User agrees that it will not: (a) sell, rent, assign or transfer or grant a sublicense of the Software or the
license contained herein to any other party; (b) adapt, alter, modify, prepare derivative works from, merge or
transfer the Software; (c) break or attempt to break the protection algorithm, reverse engineer, reverse assemble,
reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software or any portion thereof, even if permitted under any provision
of any applicable laws; (d) use Matrox's name, logo or trademark to market its own products; (e) use, reproduce
alter and redistribute the Software in whole or in part other than for the Purpose.
End User may not use the Software for any unlawful purpose, including infringement of the copyrights or other
propriety rights of others, or in any illegal manner or for creation or distribution of unlawful content. End User
agrees to indemnify Matrox for any and all claims arising from any violation by it of the terms of this License
Agreement.
End User acknowledges that the Software is subject to export laws and agrees to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to these products.
3. Copyright and ownership
End User acknowledges and agrees that the Software and all associated documentation, including logos, names
and other support materials furnished in this package are exclusively owned by Matrox and/or its suppliers. The
Software codes, structure and organization are the valuable trade secrets of Matrox. The Software and all
associated documentation are also protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as
other intellectual property laws and treaties. No title to the intellectual property in the Software, the
documentation, magnetic/optical/solid-state media or any other material provided therewith is transferred to End
User by this Agreement. This Agreement does not convey to End User an interest in or to the Software, but only
a limited right to use the Software in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. The Software is licensed to
End User and not sold.
Matrox End-user VFW Software Codec License Agreement (“Agreement”)
vi
4. Exclusion of warranty
MATROX PROVIDES TO END USER THE SOFTWARE AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION ON AN
“AS IS” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
NON-INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS WELL AS THE
WARRANTY AGAINST HIDDEN OR LATENT DEFECTS, ALL OF WHICH MATROX
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS (AND THE CUSTOMER BY ACCEPTING THE PRODUCT
SPECIFICALLY ACCEPTS SUCH DISCLAIMER AND WAIVER) TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY END USER. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, END
USER (AND NOT MATROX, ITS DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS) ASSUMES THE ENTIRE COST
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
MATROX DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET END USER'S
REQUIREMENTS OR THAT IT'S OPERATION WILL BE ERROR-FREE.
MATROX HAS NO OBLIGATION TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND OR HOLD END USER HARMLESS
FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIM THAT ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE INFRINGES ANY
THIRD PARTY PATENT, COPYRIGHT, TRADEMARK OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
RIGHT. END USER WILL PROMPTLY NOTIFY MATROX IN WRITING OF ANY SUCH CLAIM.
MATROX HAS NO OBLIGATION TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND OR HOLD END USER HARMLESS
FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS OF INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY THAT
READS UPON OR IS INFRINGED BY A GENERALLY RECOGNIZED AUDIO, VIDEO,
TECHNOLOGY OR PATENT STANDARD OR RECOMMENDATIONS, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION AVC/H.264, IEEE 1394, JPEG, JPEG2000, MPEG-1, MPEG-2 AND MPEG-4.
5. Limitation of Liability
A) Each party as well as any of its officers, employees, suppliers, agents or subcontractors shall under no
circumstance whatsoever and whether a claim is based on breach of contract or warranty, infringement or
any other intellectual property claims, negligence, strict liability in tort or otherwise or arises under any
other doctrine in law or equity, be liable to or have to indemnify the other party for:
(i) Indirect, special, incidental, punitive and consequential damages, whether foreseeable or
unforeseeable, and even if advised of the possibility of such damages or losses;
(ii) Damages arising from loss of use, data, profits, production revenue, bargain, business, revenues,
anticipated savings, opportunities, investment or loss or production, wasted expenditures, costs of
substitute goods or services and generally any kind of economic, commercial and financial loss
arising directly or indirectly out of or in connection with this Agreement, including without
limitation all such damages and losses resulting from the use of the Software, any mistakes, errors,
delays, defects, failures, defaults, interruptions or generally any acts or omissions, whether or not the
party has been advised of the possibility of such damages or losses. The total and cumulative liability
from one party to the other party arising from or in connection with this Agreement (whether
liabilities arise from breach of contract or warranty, negligence, strict liability in tort or otherwise or
under any other doctrine in law or equity) shall under no circumstance exceed the aggregate of all
fees and payments actually received by Matrox from End User under this Agreement.
B) Matrox will have no obligations under this section or otherwise with respect to any infringement claim
in whole or in part based upon any direct, contributory or other infringement related to the licensed
Software, or the use thereof, with respect to (including conformance to) any standards promulgated, revised
or maintained by a standards organization, standards bodies or similar private or public organization,
including, without limitation, the various standards promulgated by the MPEG Licensing Authority, LLC
(or MPEG LA). Matrox has no obligation to indemnify, defend or hold End User harmless from and against
any claims of infringement of intellectual property that reads upon or is infringed by a generally recognized
Matrox End-user VFW Software Codec License Agreement (“Agreement”)
vii
audio, video, technology or patent standard or recommendations, including without limitation AVC/H.264, IEEE
1394, JPEG, JPEG2000, MPEG-1, MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.
6. Confidentiality
Except as licensed hereunder, End User shall treat the Software and all related information as confidential
information and refrain from making any such information or the Software itself available to any other person.
End User will take commercially reasonable precautions to safeguard the confidentiality of the Software,
including those taken by End User to protect its own trade secrets. The obligation of confidentiality shall not
apply or shall cease to apply to any information that (a) was known to End User independently of its receipt
hereunder; (b) is or becomes publicly available without breach of this Agreement; or (c) is disclosed by End User
pursuant to court order or other requirement imposed by law, provided that Matrox is given a reasonable
opportunity to object to or restrict such disclosure requirement to the extent practicable, and then such disclosure
shall be permitted only subject to the terms and conditions of such order or other legal requirement.
7. Termination
This Agreement is effective until terminated. End User may terminate this Agreement at any time by destroying
all copies of the Software and related materials. This Agreement is conditioned upon End User's continued
compliance with the Agreement and will terminate automatically and irrevocably if End User fails to comply
with any material term or condition of this Agreement. Matrox will provide written notice to End User of such
termination in advance where practical, or otherwise promptly following such termination. Such termination is
without prejudice to Matrox's other rights hereunder at law or in equity. In event of termination, End User must
destroy all copies of the Software and related materials and certify in writing and under oath that all such copies
have been destroyed, and End User's license and rights under this Agreement shall terminate. In the event of
termination of this Agreement, the provisions of Sections 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 10 shall survive and will remain in
full force and effect.
8. General
8.1 Matrox shall not be liable for delay or failure in performance resulting from acts beyond its reasonable
control, including but not limited to acts of God, acts of war, terrorism, riot, fire, flood, or other disaster, acts of
government, strike, lockout, communication line or power failure.
8.2 End User shall not have the right to assign the benefit of this Agreement without the prior written permission
from Matrox and then only under such conditions as Matrox may reasonably determine.
8.3 If any provision of this Agreement is declared by a body of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, such
provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the other provisions shall remain in full force and effect.
8.4 A term or condition of this Agreement can be waived or modified only with the written consent of both
parties. Forbearance or indulgence by either party in any regard shall not constitute a waiver of the term or
condition to be performed, and either party may invoke any remedy available under this Agreement or by law
despite such forbearance or indulgence.
8.5 The relationship between Matrox and you is that of an independent contractor and its customer and under no
circumstances shall either party, its agents or employees be deemed agents or representatives of the other party.
Neither party shall have the right to enter into any contracts or commitments in the name of or on behalf of the
other party in any respect whatsoever. In addition, neither party shall hold itself out to anyone, or otherwise
represent, that it has any such authority vis-a-vis the other party.
Both parties agree to comply with all applicable laws, rules, regulations, orders and ordinances of the state,
province and/or country where it resides and in any other state, province and/or country with jurisdiction over it
or its activities in performance of its obligations hereunder, including without limitation all applicable duty,
taxes, import and/or export regulations and all licensing or permit requirements.
8.6 This Agreement and any schedule attached hereto contains the complete and exclusive statement of the
agreement between the parties and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements, including, but not
Matrox End-user VFW Software Codec License Agreement (“Agreement”)
viii
limited to, understandings, proposals, negotiations, representations or warranties of any kind whether oral
or written with respect to the subject matter hereof. No oral or written representation which is not expressly
contained in this Agreement is binding on Matrox or End User.
8.7 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Province of
Quebec. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to
this Agreement.
9. Unauthorized use
THE MATROX LICENSED SOFTWARE AND ANY DOCUMENTATION RELATED THERETO ARE
NOT DESIGNED, INTENDED, OR AUTHORIZED FOR USE IN ANY TYPE OF SYSTEM OR
APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE COULD CREATE A
SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR (E.G., MEDICAL SYSTEMS,
LIFE SUSTAINING OR LIFE SAVING SYSTEMS). Should the LICENSEE license or use the Matrox
Licensed Software for any such unintended or unauthorized use, the Licensee shall indemnify and hold
Matrox and its officers, subsidiaries and affiliates harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and
expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of product liability,
personal injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges
that Matrox was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the Licensed Software.
10. Choice of law
This Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Province of
Quebec, excluding any conflict of laws provisions. All disputes arising out of this Agreement shall be
subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the Province of Quebec, district of Montreal, and the
parties agree and submit to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction and venue of these Courts.
Matrox End-user VFW Software Codec License Agreement (“Agreement”)
Contents
Chapter 1
Introducing Matrox MXO2
Welcome to Matrox MXO2 ................................................................... 2
Matrox MXO2 system requirements .................................................... 2
Supported programs .................................................................................. 2
Check our website for equipment information............................................ 3
Battery requirements and guidelines for MXO2 ................................... 3
About this manual ................................................................................. 3
Style conventions ....................................................................................... 3
How video formats are expressed ............................................................. 4
Last-minute information.............................................................................. 4
Chapter 2
Installing Your Matrox MXO2 Hardware and Software
Before you install your Matrox MXO2 hardware .................................. 6
Start with a functioning system................................................................... 6
Avoid costly damage .................................................................................. 6
Installing your Matrox PCIe adapter ..................................................... 6
Installing your PCIe host adapter (for desktops)..........................................7
Installing your PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter (for laptops) ..................7
Removing your PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter ................................... 8
Installing Matrox Mtx.utils..................................................................... 8
Updating your MXO2 firmware ................................................................... 9
Installing the Matrox effect patterns .................................................... 9
Installing additional Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins or
removing unneeded plug-ins............................................................... 9
Installing the Matrox VFW software codecs on a system without
the MXO2 hardware ............................................................................ 9
Updating your display card’s drivers ................................................... 10
Setting Matrox MXO2 as your default audio playback device............. 10
Note about using sleep and hibernation modes with MXO2 ................11
Removing your Matrox MXO2 software ...............................................11
x
Chapter 3
Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2
Available MXO2 connections .............................................................. 14
MXO2 video connections .......................................................................... 14
MXO2 audio connections .......................................................................... 14
Powering MXO2 .................................................................................. 14
MXO2 power functionality ......................................................................... 14
Connecting MXO2 to your computer .................................................. 16
Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection .................................................... 16
Using the Matrox PCIe host adapters ........................................................17
MXO2 RS-422 serial connection ......................................................... 18
Typical Matrox MXO2 connections ..................................................... 19
Analog component video connections ...................................................... 19
Digital video connections...........................................................................20
Chapter 4
Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Rack
Available MXO2 Rack connections .....................................................22
MXO2 Rack video connections .................................................................22
MXO2 Rack audio connections .................................................................22
Rack mounting your MXO2 Rack ........................................................22
Powering MXO2 Rack .........................................................................24
Connecting MXO2 Rack to your computer .........................................25
Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection ....................................................25
Using the Matrox PCIe host adapters .......................................................26
MXO2 Rack RS-422 serial connection ................................................ 27
Typical Matrox MXO2 Rack connections ............................................28
Analog component video connections ......................................................28
Digital video connections...........................................................................29
Chapter 5
Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 LE
Available MXO2 LE connections .........................................................32
MXO2 LE video connections .....................................................................32
MXO2 LE audio connections .....................................................................32
Powering MXO2 LE .............................................................................32
MXO2 LE power functionality ....................................................................32
Contents
xi
Connecting MXO2 LE to your computer............................................. 34
Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection ................................................... 34
Using the Matrox PCIe host adapters....................................................... 35
MXO2 LE RS-422 serial connection ................................................... 36
Typical Matrox MXO2 LE connections................................................ 37
Analog component video connections ......................................................37
Digital video connections.......................................................................... 38
Chapter 6
Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Mini
Available MXO2 Mini connections ...................................................... 40
MXO2 video and audio connections ......................................................... 40
Powering MXO2 Mini .......................................................................... 40
MXO2 Mini power supply and adapter plugs ............................................ 40
Connecting MXO2 Mini to your computer .......................................... 42
Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection ................................................... 42
Using the Matrox PCIe host adapters....................................................... 43
Connecting S-Video devices to MXO2 Mini ........................................ 44
Typical Matrox MXO2 Mini connections ............................................. 45
Analog component video connections ..................................................... 45
HDMI video connections .......................................................................... 46
Chapter 7
Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video
Overview............................................................................................. 48
Calibrating your HDMI monitor ........................................................... 48
Loading Matrox HDMI calibration settings ......................................... 50
Enabling and disabling the Matrox HDMI calibration settings ............ 50
Chapter 8
Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
Running antivirus software with Adobe Premiere Pro........................ 54
Displaying warnings in Adobe Premiere Pro’s Events panel.............. 54
Creating a new Adobe Premiere Pro project ..................................... 54
About the Matrox 10-bit editing workflow .......................................... 55
Defining your playback settings ......................................................... 55
Contents
xii
Specifying
Specifying
Specifying
Specifying
Specifying
your
your
your
your
your
video output settings ........................................................56
video output settings (MXO2 Mini) ................................... 61
genlock settings for playback ...........................................64
audio output settings........................................................65
closed captioning settings ................................................ 67
Defining your video preview settings ..................................................69
Defining your capture settings ............................................................ 70
Specifying your video capture settings ...................................................... 70
Specifying your audio capture settings...................................................... 73
Specifying your video output settings for previewing captured clips ......... 77
Specifying your genlock settings for capture ............................................. 77
Notes about capturing to Matrox .m2v files .............................................. 79
Selecting your MPEG-2 I-frame settings ............................................80
Selecting your MPEG-2 IBP settings ...................................................82
Exporting to a Matrox .avi file .............................................................84
Exporting an NTSC or 486p sequence to Adobe Premiere Pro
720x480 formats ............................................................................... 87
Adding a voice-over to your sequence ............................................... 87
Connection and setup ............................................................................... 87
Recording your voice-over ........................................................................88
Setting up Matrox device control........................................................90
Requirements for using Matrox device control ..........................................93
Exporting your sequence to tape........................................................94
Avoiding issues when using Matrox device control ...................................94
Exporting to tape using Matrox device control ..........................................94
Obtaining a frame-accurate export to tape using Matrox device control .. 97
Chapter 9
Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
Available effects ................................................................................ 100
How to apply a Matrox video effect in Adobe Premiere Pro ............. 101
How to apply a Matrox video transition in Adobe Premiere Pro........ 101
Applying a mask to your Matrox effects ........................................... 102
Using Select Mask ................................................................................... 103
Creating a Matrox primary color correction ..................................... 104
Using Split View ....................................................................................... 106
Contents
xiii
Working with Split View in the Program Monitor ...................................... 107
Using RGB curves ................................................................................... 108
Adjusting tonal range................................................................................ 110
Using the color balance graph.................................................................. 111
Performing an auto balance ..................................................................... 114
Matching colors between two clips .......................................................... 115
Using the luma mapping graph................................................................. 117
Creating a Matrox secondary color correction ................................. 119
Using the selective key graph.................................................................. 124
Creating a color pass effect .................................................................... 128
Overview of the Matrox chroma key effects ..................................... 129
Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect...................... 130
Using the chroma key graph to modify key colors and
perform an auto key ............................................................................... 133
Overview of the Matrox luma key effect ...........................................136
Creating a luma key effect ................................................................ 137
Using the luma key graph ........................................................................ 138
Creating a wipe transition .................................................................140
Using the Matrox chroma clamper effect .........................................142
Chapter 10
Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
Creating a new project on Matrox MXO2..........................................144
Defining your playback settings ........................................................144
Specifying your video output settings ...................................................... 144
Specifying your video output settings (MXO2 Mini) ................................. 148
Specifying your genlock settings ............................................................. 152
Specifying your audio output settings ...................................................... 154
Defining your capture settings ..........................................................156
Adding a voice-over to your sequence ............................................. 160
Connection and setup ............................................................................. 160
Recording your voice-over ....................................................................... 161
Exporting your sequence to tape ...................................................... 163
Contents
xiv
Chapter 11
Using Matrox A/V Tools
About Matrox A/V Tools .................................................................... 166
Starting Matrox A/V Tools ................................................................. 166
Using the Matrox A/V Tools interface ............................................... 167
Using the A/V Tools pop-up menu .......................................................... 168
Navigating through clips with the transport controls ............................... 168
Defining your A/V Tools options ........................................................ 170
Selecting your capture folder ...................................................................172
Defining your playback settings ................................................................172
Defining your capture settings................................................................. 184
How A/V Tools assigns clip names .................................................... 191
Capturing clips ................................................................................... 191
Capturing live video .................................................................................. 191
Capturing from tape without device control ............................................ 192
Editing clips ....................................................................................... 192
Updating clip information ......................................................................... 192
Changing a clip’s In and Out icons .......................................................... 192
Working with the clip list ................................................................... 193
Adding clips ............................................................................................. 193
Playing back clips .................................................................................... 193
Saving and loading a clip list .................................................................... 193
Copying clips ........................................................................................... 194
Moving clips ............................................................................................ 194
Deleting clips ........................................................................................... 194
Detaching and resizing the clip list .......................................................... 195
Grabbing a single-frame image ........................................................ 195
Keyboard shortcuts .......................................................................... 197
Chapter 12
Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug-ins
Overview ...........................................................................................200
Configuring the Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel .............................200
Required steps to use the WYSIWYG plug-ins ................................. 201
Adobe After Effects ................................................................................. 201
Adobe Photoshop ................................................................................... 201
Contents
xv
Autodesk 3ds Max .................................................................................. 201
Autodesk Combustion ............................................................................ 202
eyeon Fusion .......................................................................................... 202
NewTek LightWave 3D ........................................................................... 202
Chapter 13
Using MXO2 with Adobe and Microsoft Live Media Encoders
Overview........................................................................................... 204
Specifying your settings for media streaming .................................. 204
Chapter 14
Using Matrox MXO2 with Livestream Procaster
Overview........................................................................................... 208
Specifying your settings for media streaming .................................. 208
Chapter 15
Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast
Overview............................................................................................ 212
Specifying your settings for media streaming ...................................212
Specifying your settings for Matrox ISO recording ...........................214
Matrox ISO recording file naming conventions ........................................ 218
Record functionality ................................................................................. 219
Record status ......................................................................................... 220
Input states and video formats................................................................ 221
Record log file ......................................................................................... 221
Specifying your output settings ........................................................ 222
Chapter 16
Using the Matrox Video for Windows Codecs
Overview........................................................................................... 226
Using VFW programs without the MXO2 hardware ......................... 226
Before you start rendering ............................................................... 227
Selecting color space conversion options .............................................. 228
Rendering material to a Matrox VFW .avi file ................................... 229
Configuring the Matrox DVCPRO HD codec ........................................... 230
Configuring the Matrox Uncompressed codecs ..................................... 230
Configuring the Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codecs .................................... 231
Contents
xvi
Chapter 17
Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
Exporting to Matrox MAX H.264 files using Adobe Media Encoder .234
Performing a direct export of an Adobe Premiere Pro sequence ....239
Transcoding for Blu-ray Disc authoring in Adobe Encore ................. 241
Specifying your Matrox MAX H.264 settings ....................................244
Chapter 18
Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
Overview ...........................................................................................250
How to capture clips ......................................................................... 251
Specifying your input settings ...........................................................252
Specifying your output settings.........................................................254
Specifying your capture format settings ...........................................256
Starting your capture ........................................................................260
Chapter 19
Monitoring Your Matrox MXO2 System
Using X.info to display MXO2 information .........................................264
Displaying system information .................................................................264
Displaying hardware information .............................................................266
Monitoring your MXO2’s operating temperatures ................................... 267
Error notification ...................................................................................... 267
Appendix A
Understanding Pulldown
Overview ...........................................................................................270
Standard 2:3 pulldown ......................................................................270
Advanced 2:3:3:2 pulldown .............................................................. 271
Appendix B
Matrox MXO2 Connectors
Inputs ................................................................................................274
MXO2 inputs............................................................................................ 274
MXO2 Rack inputs................................................................................... 275
MXO2 LE inputs....................................................................................... 276
MXO2 Mini inputs .................................................................................... 277
Contents
xvii
Input connector descriptions ...................................................................278
Input connector descriptions (MXO2 Mini) ............................................. 280
Outputs ..............................................................................................281
MXO2 outputs ......................................................................................... 281
MXO2 Rack outputs ............................................................................... 282
MXO2 LE outputs ................................................................................... 283
MXO2 Mini outputs ................................................................................. 284
Output connector descriptions ............................................................... 285
Output connector descriptions (MXO2 Mini) ...........................................287
Appendix C
Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture Formats
Supported input formats................................................................... 290
Supported capture formats for Adobe Premiere Pro........................291
Supported capture formats for Avid editing applications................. 292
Supported capture formats for Matrox A/V Tools ............................ 293
Supported capture formats for Matrox MAX H.264 Capture ........... 294
Appendix D
Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
Supported video output formats for playback.................................. 296
Playback using Adobe Premiere Pro ...................................................... 296
Playback using Avid editing applications.................................................. 301
Playback using Matrox A/V Tools and Matrox WYSIWYG ....................... 303
Supported video output formats for monitoring ............................... 307
Adobe Premiere Pro ................................................................................307
Avid editing applications ......................................................................... 308
Matrox A/V Tools.................................................................................... 309
Matrox MAX H.264 Capture and Telestream Wirecast............................ 310
Appendix E
Matrox MXO2 Specifications
Matrox MXO2 specifications .............................................................312
General.................................................................................................... 312
Connections ............................................................................................ 312
Environmental specifications ................................................................... 316
Matrox MXO2 Rack specifications ....................................................316
General.................................................................................................... 316
Contents
xviii
Connections .............................................................................................317
Environmental specifications ...................................................................320
Matrox MXO2 LE specifications ........................................................ 321
General ................................................................................................... 321
Connections ............................................................................................ 321
Environmental specifications ...................................................................325
Matrox MXO2 Mini specifications .....................................................325
General ...................................................................................................325
Connections ............................................................................................325
Environmental specifications ...................................................................328
Matrox PCIe host adapter specifications..........................................329
Matrox PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter
(for laptops) ...........................................................................................329
Matrox PCIe host adapter (for desktops) ................................................329
Appendix F
Matrox Customer Support
How to get Matrox customer support ..............................................332
Registration .............................................................................................332
Keep up to date with our website ...........................................................332
Contacting us ..........................................................................................332
Index ........................................................................................ 333
Contents
1
Introducing Matrox MXO2
This chapter lists the MXO2
system requirements, explains
the battery requirements and
guidelines, and describes the
MXO2 documentation.
2
Welcome to Matrox MXO2
Matrox MXO2 products connect to your desktop computer or laptop to provide
broadcast-quality video input/output, monitoring, and up/down/cross conversion.
MXO2 streamlines your workflow with supported video editing applications, and
provides WYSIWYG output when working with many popular compositing and
animation programs. You also get HDMI video monitoring with calibration
controls.
Matrox MXO2 products with Matrox MAX technology have a dedicated
hardware processor that accelerates the encoding of H.264 files for resolutions
ranging from iPod to HD. This lets you quickly and easily create H.264 files for
Blu-ray Disc, the web, and mobile devices.
Matrox MXO2 system requirements
Matrox MXO2 products require a computer system with the following
configuration:
• Intel i7 2.67 GHz CPU or greater.
• Microsoft Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate, or Home Premium (64-bit)
with Service Pack 1.
• 4 GB of RAM (8 GB is recommended).
• One free PCIe slot on a desktop computer to install the Matrox PCIe host
adapter, or one free ExpressCard/34 slot on a laptop to install the Matrox
PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter.
• Storage requirements for Matrox ISO recording and Telestream Wirecast
recording to disk:
$
A separate 7200 RPM SATA II drive.
Supported programs
• Telestream Wirecast Studio and Telestream Wirecast Pro 4.2.3.
• Beta support for the following:
$
Adobe Premiere Pro 6.0.3, Media Encoder 6.0.3, Encore 6.0.2,
Prelude 1.0.3, After Effects 11.0.2, Photoshop 13.0.1, and Flash Media
Live Encoder 3.2.
$
Avid Media Composer 6.0.3.2 and 6.5.2, Symphony 6.0.3.2 and 6.5.2, and
NewsCutter 10.0.3.2 and 10.5.2.
$
Autodesk 3ds Max 2013.
$
Autodesk Combustion 2008 (32-bit only).
$
eyeon Fusion 6.4.
$
NewTek LightWave 3D 10.
Chapter 1, Introducing Matrox MXO2
3
$
Microsoft Expression Encoder 4.
$
Livestream Procaster 20.3.7.
Check our website for equipment information
For up-to-date information about system requirements and MXO2-compatible
devices, check the Matrox MXO2 Support section of our website at
www.matrox.com/video/support.
¡ Important To use Matrox MXO2 with Avid editing software, you must use an
Avid-certified system as listed in the System Recommendations section of the
Matrox MXO2 Support section of our website at
www.matrox.com/video/support.
Battery requirements and guidelines for MXO2
¦
Note This section does not apply to Matrox MXO2 Rack and Matrox MXO2
Mini as they cannot be powered by a battery.
As an alternative to using an AC outlet, you can use a battery to power Matrox
MXO2 or MXO2 LE. To avoid damage to your MXO2 system and peripheral
devices when using a battery, please observe the following requirements and
guidelines. For instructions on how to connect a battery, see “Powering MXO2”
on page 14 or “Powering MXO2 LE” on page 32.
• Use a standard self-protected (fused) battery with a nominal voltage of 12V,
13.2V, or 14.4V. A higher-voltage battery will damage your MXO2 system.
• Disconnect MXO2 from the battery when not in use. Do not leave MXO2
connected to the battery when not in use as this may damage your MXO2
system and/or battery.
• Do not power your MXO2 using your vehicle’s battery via the power socket.
²Caution To avoid damage to your MXO2 system and peripheral devices, use a
Matrox-recommended battery. For a list of batteries recommended for use with
your MXO2, visit the Matrox MXO2 Support section of our website at
www.matrox.com/video/support.
About this manual
This manual provides you with information about installing and using your
Matrox MXO2 hardware and software.
Style conventions
The following style conventions are used in this manual:
• The names of files, folders, and manuals appear in italics. For example:
$
The data is stored in the Sample.wav file.
Battery requirements and guidelines for MXO2
4
$
The file is located in your C:\Windows\System folder.
$
Please refer to your Matrox MXO2 Release Notes.
• Menus and commands that you need to choose are displayed in the form
Menu > Command . For example, File > Save means click File in the
menu bar, then click Save in the menu that appears.
• The names of keys are displayed in small capital bold letters, such as the
CTRL key.
• A plus (+) sign is used to indicate combinations of keys and/or mouse
operations. For example:
$
CTRL+C means to hold down the CTRL key while pressing the C key.
$
SHIFT+click means to hold down the SHIFT key while you click an item
with the mouse.
How video formats are expressed
With the exception of NTSC and PAL, all SD and HD video formats are
expressed in the Matrox MXO2 documentation as follows:
VRp or i or PsF @ n fps
Where:
• VR is the vertical resolution. For 1440×1080 video, however, both the
horizontal and vertical resolutions are specified.
• p or i or PsF represents progressive, interlaced, or progressive segmented
frame video.
• n fps is the frame rate in frames per second.
Here are some examples:
• 486p @ 23.98 fps
per second.
Represents 720 ×486 progressive video at 23.98 frames
• 720p @ 59.94 fps Represents 1280×720 progressive video at 59.94
frames per second.
• 1440x1080i @ 29.97 fps Represents 1440 ×1080 interlaced video at 29.97
frames per second. This format is used for HDV 1080i material.
• 1080i @ 29.97 fps Represents full-size 1920 ×1080 interlaced video at
29.97 frames per second.
Last-minute information
Any important information that wasn’t available for inclusion in this manual by
publication time is provided to you in the Matrox MXO2 Release Notes.
Chapter 1, Introducing Matrox MXO2
2
Installing Your Matrox MXO2
Hardware and Software
This chapter explains how to
install the Matrox MXO2
hardware and software.
6
Before you install your Matrox MXO2 hardware
Read the following information carefully before attempting to install Matrox
MXO2 hardware.
Start with a functioning system
Before attempting any Matrox MXO2 installation, you should have a computer
with a supported Windows operating system fully installed and functioning
smoothly. This will avoid potential problems later on.
Avoid costly damage
Static electricity from your body can damage your Matrox PCIe host adapter or
your computer. Although you may not notice it, static electricity is generated
every time you move. It’s often too small to cause a spark, but it can still cause
damage to sensitive electronic components or at least reduce their lifespan.
To avoid damage, please observe the following precautions:
• Do not remove your Matrox PCIe host adapter from its antistatic bag until
you’re ready to install it. Before removing the card, place the package within
easy reach of the area where you intend to perform the installation.
• You should avoid touching the chips and other components on the circuit
board. Try to handle the card by its edges.
• Try to work in an area where the relative humidity is at least 50%.
• Do not wear wool or synthetic clothing. These fabrics tend to generate more
static electricity than cotton, which is best for this kind of work.
• Turn off the power switches on your computer and its connected
components.
Once you’ve opened your computer, drain static electricity from your body by
touching a bare metal surface on your computer chassis before you install or
remove any parts of your system. If you have a grounding wrist strap, use it while
handling and installing any components in your computer.
Installing your Matrox PCIe adapter
The Matrox PCIe adapter is the interface between your MXO2 and computer.
Matrox provides dedicated adapters for use with desktop computers or laptops.
Use the Matrox PCIe host adapter with your desktop computer, and the Matrox
PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter with your laptop.
Chapter 2, Installing Your Matrox MXO2 Hardware and Software
7
Installing your PCIe host adapter (for desktops)
The Matrox PCIe host adapter is designed to operate in your desktop computer’s
PCIe slot. For detailed instructions on how to perform the following steps, refer
to your computer’s documentation.
1 Shut down your system, unplug the power cord and all the cables from the
unit, and open your computer’s chassis.
2 Insert the Matrox PCIe host adapter in an available PCIe slot in your
computer, and secure the adapter into place.
3 Close your computer’s chassis, and reconnect the power cord and all the
cables to the computer.
Installing your PCIe host ExpressCard/34
adapter (for laptops)
The Matrox PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter is designed to operate in your
laptop’s ExpressCard/34 slot. You can install the Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter when your laptop is on or off.
To install the Matrox PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter, connect the Matrox
PCIe cable to the host ExpressCard/34 adapter, and then insert the host adapter in
your laptop’s ExpressCard/34 slot until the adapter clicks into place. For details
on how to safely remove your Matrox PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter from
your laptop, see “Removing your PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter” on page 8.
PCIe
cable
Matrox PCIe
ExpressCard/34
adapter
ExpressCard/34 slot
²Caution To ensure functionality and avoid damaging the PCIe cable or
host connector, the side labeled “B” on the PCIe cable connector must face
the top of the Matrox PCIe ExpressCard/34 adapter.
Installing your Matrox PCIe adapter
8
Removing your PCIe host ExpressCard/34
adapter
You can safely remove the Matrox PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter from your
laptop at any time as follows:
¡ Important Do not disconnect the PCIe cable from the Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter while your laptop is running. Instead, remove the
adapter from your laptop with the Matrox PCIe cable attached.
1 Quit all video/audio applications that use your Matrox MXO2 hardware,
such as Matrox A/V Tools.
2 With the Matrox PCIe cable attached, remove the Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter from your laptop’s ExpressCard/34 slot.
¦
Note The Safely Remove Hardware and Eject commands in Windows are
not supported for removing your Matrox PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter.
If your system is running and MXO2 is connected to your laptop when you
remove the Matrox PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter, the Matrox WYSIWYG
icon (
) on your Windows taskbar will turn red to indicate that your Matrox
MXO2 hardware cannot be detected. When you re-insert the Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter with attached PCIe cable back into your laptop’s
ExpressCard/34 slot, the icon will return to its normal state once your MXO2
hardware is detected.
Installing Matrox Mtx.utils
Matrox Mtx.utils Setup installs the MXO2 device drivers, and all the software
required to use your MXO2 hardware with supported programs. Before installing
Matrox Mtx.utils, make sure that you’ve installed the third-party software that
you’ll be using with MXO2.
You can install Matrox Mtx.utils on a computer with or without the MXO2
hardware connected. To download and install the latest version of Matrox
Mtx.utils, visit the MXO2 Support section of our website at
www.matrox.com/video/support. You can also contact your Matrox
representative for the latest software.
Remarks
• Matrox Mtx.utils Setup installs software for Matrox MXO2 as well as the
Matrox CompressHD card. You can therefore use your Matrox MXO2
hardware with CompressHD. For details on installing CompressHD, see
your Matrox CompressHD Installation and User Guide.
• If you want to use a Matrox Convert DVI product with MXO2 on the same
system, you must install Matrox MtxConvert.utils instead of Matrox
Mtx.utils. Matrox MtxConvert.utils is available in the “Downloads” section
Chapter 2, Installing Your Matrox MXO2 Hardware and Software
9
of the Matrox Support website under “Combo Software” for your Convert
DVI product.
Updating your MXO2 firmware
When you install the MXO2 software while your MXO2 hardware is powered
and connected to your computer, the Mtx.utils Setup program automatically
verifies the firmware on your MXO2 hardware and updates it if required. If you
install Mtx.utils on a computer without the MXO2 hardware, the next time you
start your computer with your MXO2 hardware connected, Mtx.utils Setup will
update your MXO2 firmware if needed.
²Caution Do not disconnect or power off MXO2, or interrupt the firmware update
during the update process. Doing so may damage your MXO2 hardware.
Installing the Matrox effect patterns
The Matrox plug-in for Adobe Premiere Pro includes Matrox wipes that you can
apply to clips in your Matrox projects as explained in Chapter 9, “Setting Up
Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro.” In order to apply the Matrox wipes,
you must install Matrox Mtx.utils as well as the Matrox effect patterns (GFX)
files. The Matrox effect patterns are available for download with Matrox MXO2
software releases that support Adobe Premiere Pro in the MXO2 Support section
of our website at www.matrox.com/video/support.
Installing additional Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
or removing unneeded plug-ins
When you install Matrox Mtx.utils, you are prompted to install the Matrox
WYSIWYG plug-ins for any supported programs that are currently installed on
your system. If after you’ve installed Matrox Mtx.utils you want to install
additional Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins, or re-install or remove a currently
installed plug-in, you can update your system by choosing Start > All
Programs > Matrox Mtx.utils > Update Matrox WYSIWYG Plug-ins.
You’ll be prompted to specify which plug-ins you want to install, re-install, or
remove. For more information about the programs supported and required
settings, see Chapter 12, “Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug-ins.”
¦
Note To install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug-in for a program, you must first
install that program.
Installing the Matrox VFW software codecs on
a system without the MXO2 hardware
The Matrox Video for Windows (VFW) software codecs let you render and play
back Matrox .avi files in your VFW programs without having to install Matrox
Installing the Matrox effect patterns
10
Mtx.utils and the Matrox MXO2 hardware. This flexibility allows you to use a
remote editing workstation to create a rough cut of your project, and then copy
the project and assets to your MXO2 system to finish the job.
¦
Note If you’ve installed Matrox Mtx.utils, you do not need to install the
Matrox VFW software codecs because Matrox Mtx.utils installs all the Matrox
codecs on your system.
The Matrox VFW software codecs are available for download in the
“Downloads” section of the Matrox Support website at
www.matrox.com/video/support.
Updating your display card’s drivers
For the best performance when using your MXO2 system with Adobe Premiere
Pro, you should update the drivers for your display card with the latest drivers
available from your display card’s manufacturer. For example, if you’re using
Adobe Premiere Pro with a supported NVIDIA display card for GPU
acceleration, it’s recommended that you update your system with the latest
drivers for your card from NVIDIA.
¡ Important If you’re using Matrox MXO2 with Avid editing software, you
must use an Avid-certified system with a specific display card and driver as listed
in the System Recommendations section of the Matrox MXO2 Support section of
our website at www.matrox.com/video/support.
Setting Matrox MXO2 as your default audio
playback device
You can use Matrox MXO2 as your output device for playing back audio using
Windows Driver Model (WDM)-based applications on your Windows system,
such as Windows Media Player. To set MXO2 as your default sound playback
device in Windows, do the following:
1 Choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound, and
click the Playback tab.
2 Right-click Matrox WDM audio device LE , and click Set as Default
Device .
¦
Note In order to monitor the audio channels that you’re streaming in
Telestream Wirecast, you must connect your speakers to the output of your sound
card and set your default sound playback device to your sound card (not your
Matrox device). For details on using Telestream Wirecast with your Matrox
hardware, see Chapter 15, “Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast.”
Chapter 2, Installing Your Matrox MXO2 Hardware and Software
11
Note about using sleep and hibernation modes
with MXO2
Before setting your computer to sleep or hibernation mode, make sure that you
first quit any application that is using your Matrox MXO2 hardware.
Removing your Matrox MXO2 software
You can remove the various Matrox MXO2 software components as follows:
• To remove Matrox Mtx.utils from your computer, choose Start > All
Programs > Matrox Mtx.utils > Uninstall Matrox Mtx.utils.
• To remove the Matrox effect patterns from your computer, choose Start >
All Programs > Matrox Effect Patterns > Uninstall Matrox Effect
Patterns.
• To remove the Matrox VFW software codecs from a computer without
Matrox Mtx.utils, choose Start > All Programs > Matrox VFW
Software Codecs > Uninstall Matrox VFW Software Codecs.
Note about using sleep and hibernation modes with MXO2
12
Your notes
Chapter 2, Installing Your Matrox MXO2 Hardware and Software
3
Connecting External Devices to
Matrox MXO2
This chapter shows how to
supply power and connect
external devices to Matrox
MXO2.
14
¦
Note This chapter explains how to connect external devices to Matrox MXO2
only. For another MXO2 product, see Chapter 4, “Connecting External Devices
to Matrox MXO2 Rack,” Chapter 5, “Connecting External Devices to Matrox
MXO2 LE,” or Chapter 6, “Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2
Mini.”
Available MXO2 connections
Matrox MXO2 features a full compliment of professional inputs and outputs, and
allows you to connect multiple devices for up to five user-selectable simultaneous
video outputs.
MXO2 video connections
• One HD HDMI input and one HD/SD HDMI output, both with up to eight
channels of embedded audio. The HDMI input/output supports YUV and
RGB devices.
• One HD/SD SDI input with up to eight channels of embedded audio, and
two HD/SD SDI outputs with up to 16 channels of embedded audio. Both
SDI outputs simultaneously output the same video and embedded audio.
• One HD/SD analog component input/output, one S-Video input/output, and
one composite input/output.
• Analog black burst reference input.
MXO2 audio connections
• Two balanced analog XLR inputs (stereo pair).
• Four balanced analog XLR outputs (two stereo pairs).
• One AES/EBU stereo input/output.
• Two unbalanced analog RCA inputs (stereo pair).
• Six unbalanced analog RCA outputs (for surround sound monitoring).
Powering MXO2
Supply power to MXO2 using an AC outlet via the Matrox external power supply
and a power cord, or using a battery via the Matrox battery power cable. Matrox
MXO2 connects to the battery via a 4-pin XLR connector. For information on
how to connect your battery to portable video equipment, such as Matrox MXO2,
contact the battery manufacturer. Before connecting MXO2 to a battery, please
read the “Battery requirements and guidelines for MXO2” on page 3.
MXO2 power functionality
MXO2 features a power button that you can use to turn the MXO2 on and off.
However, when power is supplied to MXO2 and it is connected to your computer,
the MXO2 will turn on or off automatically when you start up or shut down your
Chapter 3, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2
15
system. That is, when you shut down your system, your MXO2 will turn off.
Starting up your system turns your MXO2 on. To manually turn your MXO2 on,
press the power button. To turn off your MXO2, press and hold the power button
for at least two seconds.
¡ Important When MXO2 is connected to a computer that is running, do not
disconnect MXO2 from its power source, or power off MXO2. Shut down your
computer before removing power from MXO2. If using a battery to power
MXO2, ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged.
MXO2
(side view)
External
power supply
Power
button
OR
²Caution When
disconnecting the
power supply from
MXO2, make sure that
you slide back the
casing on the connector
to release the locking
mechanism.
Matrox battery
power cable
Power cord
Female 4-pin
XLR cable
Battery on a
universal battery
adapter
To AC
outlet
Powering MXO2
16
Connecting MXO2 to your computer
Connect MXO2 to your computer using the Matrox PCIe cable and the
appropriate Matrox host adapter.
Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection
To ensure functionality and avoid damaging the PCIe cable or host connector
when connecting MXO2 to your computer, the PCIe cable must be connected to
your MXO2 and host connector as shown below:
To Matrox MXO2
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the side
labeled “HOST” on MXO2.
To Matrox PCIe ExpressCard/34 adapter
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the
top of the Matrox PCIe
ExpressCard/34 adapter.
To Matrox PCIe host adapter
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the side
labeled “XI LINK” on the Matrox PCIe
host adapter.
Chapter 3, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2
17
Using the Matrox PCIe host adapters
For MXO2 to be detected on your desktop computer, power must be supplied to
MXO2 (see “Powering MXO2” on page 14), and it must be connected to your
computer before starting up your system.
¡ Important Do not disconnect the Matrox PCIe cable from the adapter, or
MXO2, when your computer is running. To safely remove the Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter from your laptop, see “Removing your PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter” on page 8.
MXO2
(side view)
PCIe cable
²Caution To ensure functionality and
avoid damaging the PCIe cable or host
connector, you must connect the PCIe
cable as shown in “Ensuring proper PCIe
cable connection” on page 16.
Matrox PCIe
host adapter
Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34
adapter
OR
To your laptop’s ExpressCard/34
slot (see “Installing your PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter (for
laptops)” on page 7).
Connecting MXO2 to your computer
18
MXO2 RS-422 serial connection
MXO2’s RS-422 serial connector lets you use RS-422 device control with a
supported video editing application when capturing material and exporting your
sequence to tape. This serial connection supports any device that uses the RS-422
SMPTE time code protocol, such as a VTR or digital disk recorder. For
information on how to configure Matrox RS-422 device control settings in Adobe
Premiere Pro, see “Setting up Matrox device control” on page 90.
MXO2
(side view)
RS-422 serial cable
RS-422 device
Chapter 3, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2
19
Typical Matrox MXO2 connections
In the following typical connection examples, we’ve connected a monitor to view
the signal that will be recorded, and separate source and record decks. You may,
however, use the same deck as both your source and record device by making the
input and output connections to a single deck. For details on the Matrox MXO2
connectors, see Appendix B, “Matrox MXO2 Connectors.”
Analog component video connections
In this illustration, we’re using analog component connectors for video, XLR
connectors for audio, and an HDMI connector for video monitoring. The video is
genlocked using a tri-level sync generator.
Source
(Deck 1)
Tri-level
sync
generator
MXO2 Inputs
MXO2 Outputs
HDMI
monitor
Recorder
(Deck 2)
Typical Matrox MXO2 connections
20
Digital video connections
In this illustration, we’re using SDI connectors for video and audio, an SDI
connector for video monitoring, and we’re monitoring the audio on a surround
sound speaker system through RCA connectors. The video is genlocked using a
tri-level sync generator.
Source
(Deck 1)
Tri-level
sync
generator
MXO2 Inputs
MXO2 Outputs
Video monitor
Recorder (Deck 2)
Surround sound
speaker system
Chapter 3, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2
4
Connecting External Devices to
Matrox MXO2 Rack
This chapter shows how to
rack mount, supply power, and
connect external devices to
Matrox MXO2 Rack.
22
¦
Note This chapter explains how to connect external devices to Matrox MXO2
Rack only. For another MXO2 product, see Chapter 3, “Connecting External
Devices to Matrox MXO2,” Chapter 5, “Connecting External Devices to Matrox
MXO2 LE,” or Chapter 6, “Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2
Mini.”
Available MXO2 Rack connections
Matrox MXO2 Rack features a full compliment of professional inputs and
outputs, and allows you to connect multiple devices for up to five user-selectable
simultaneous video outputs.
MXO2 Rack video connections
• One HD HDMI input and one HD/SD HDMI output, both with up to eight
channels of embedded audio. The HDMI input/output supports YUV and
RGB devices.
• One HD/SD SDI input with up to eight channels of embedded audio, and
two HD/SD SDI outputs with up to 16 channels of embedded audio. Both
SDI outputs simultaneously output the same video and embedded audio.
• One HD/SD analog component input/output, one S-Video input/output, and
one composite input/output.
• One analog black burst reference input and loop-through output.
MXO2 Rack audio connections
• Four balanced analog XLR inputs (two stereo pairs).
• Eight balanced analog XLR outputs (four stereo pairs).
• Two AES/EBU stereo inputs/outputs.
Rack mounting your MXO2 Rack
Use the supplied rackmount brackets to mount your Matrox MXO2 Rack to a
standard 19-inch rack. The rackmount brackets can be used to either front or rear
mount your MXO2 Rack. You can also mount MXO2 Rack so that it’s recessed
to allow more space for cables. MXO2 Rack takes up two vertical rack unit
spaces.
1 Unpack the two rackmount brackets and their eight mounting screws.
²Caution Use only the screws supplied with your MXO2 Rack to attach the
rackmount brackets to your MXO2 Rack. If you use screws that are larger or
longer than the ones supplied, you can damage your equipment.
2 Depending if you want to front or rear mount your MXO2 Rack, position the
rackmount brackets so that the bracket face is either towards the front
(connector side) or the back of your MXO2 Rack.
Chapter 4, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Rack
23
3 MXO2 Rack can be recess mounted to allow extra space for connectors and
cables. Depending on your mounting needs, align the screw holes on each
rackmount bracket with the desired screw holes on either side of the MXO2
Rack.
Front rackmounting
Rackmount
bracket
MXO2 Rack
Rear rackmounting
Recessed rackmounting
²Caution For stability and safety, whichever mounting method you choose,
make sure to fasten each rackmount bracket to MXO2 Rack using all four
supplied screws.
4 Using a hand screwdriver only (no power screwdrivers), carefully tighten
each screw until snug. Do not overtighten!
5 Fasten your MXO2 Rack to the standard 19-inch rack as per your rack’s
instructions.
Rack mounting your MXO2 Rack
24
Powering MXO2 Rack
You can power MXO2 Rack using an AC outlet and an IEC-C13 power cord. To
turn off your MXO2 Rack, unplug it from the AC outlet while your computer is
shut down.
¡ Important When MXO2 Rack is connected to a computer that is running, do
not disconnect MXO2 Rack from its power source. Shut down your computer
before removing power from MXO2 Rack.
MXO2 Rack
IEC-C13
power cord
To AC
outlet
Chapter 4, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Rack
25
Connecting MXO2 Rack to your computer
Connect MXO2 Rack to your computer using the Matrox PCIe cable and the
appropriate Matrox PCIe host adapter.
Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection
To ensure functionality and avoid damaging the PCIe cable or host connector
when connecting MXO2 Rack to your computer, the PCIe cable must be
connected to your MXO2 Rack and host connector as shown below:
To Matrox MXO2
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the side
labeled “HOST” on MXO2 Rack.
To Matrox PCIe ExpressCard/34 adapter
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the
top of the Matrox PCIe
ExpressCard/34 adapter.
To Matrox PCIe host adapter
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the side
labeled “XI LINK” on the Matrox PCIe
host adapter.
Connecting MXO2 Rack to your computer
26
Using the Matrox PCIe host adapters
For MXO2 Rack to be detected on a desktop computer, power must be supplied
to MXO2 Rack (see “Powering MXO2 Rack” on page 24), and it must be
connected to your computer before starting up your system.
¡ Important Do not disconnect the Matrox PCIe cable from the adapter, or
MXO2 Rack, when your computer is running. To safely remove the Matrox PCIe
host ExpressCard/34 adapter from your laptop, see “Removing your PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter” on page 8.
MXO2 Rack
PCIe cable
²Caution To ensure functionality and
avoid damaging the PCIe cable or host
connector, you must connect the PCIe
cable as shown in “Ensuring proper PCIe
cable connection” on page 25.
Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34
adapter
Matrox PCIe
host adapter
OR
To your laptop’s ExpressCard/34
slot (see “Installing your PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter (for
laptops)” on page 7).
Chapter 4, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Rack
27
MXO2 Rack RS-422 serial connection
The Matrox MXO2 Rack RS-422 serial connector lets you use RS-422 device
control with a supported video editing application when capturing material and
exporting your sequence to tape. This serial connection supports any device that
uses the RS-422 SMPTE time code protocol, such as a VTR or digital disk
recorder. For information on how to configure Matrox RS-422 device control
settings in Adobe Premiere Pro, see “Setting up Matrox device control” on
page 90.
RS-422 device
RS-422 serial cable
MXO2 Rack
(partial view)
MXO2 Rack RS-422 serial connection
28
Typical Matrox MXO2 Rack connections
In the following typical connection examples, we’ve connected a monitor to view
the signal that will be recorded, and separate source and record decks. You may,
however, use the same deck as both your source and record device by making the
input and output connections to a single deck. For details on the Matrox MXO2
Rack connectors, see Appendix B, “Matrox MXO2 Connectors.”
Analog component video connections
In this illustration, we’re using analog component connectors for video, XLR
connectors for audio, and an HDMI connector for video monitoring. The video is
genlocked using a tri-level sync generator.
Recorder (Deck 2)
HDMI
monitor
MXO2 Rack (partial view)
MXO2 Rack (partial view)
To another device’s
reference input. If
not used, terminate
the signal with a
BNC 75-ohm
terminator.
Tri-level
sync
generator
Source
(Deck 1)
Chapter 4, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Rack
29
Digital video connections
In this illustration, we’re using SDI connectors for video and audio, an SDI
connector for video monitoring, and we’re monitoring the audio on a surround
sound speaker system through XLR connectors. The video is genlocked using a
tri-level sync generator.
Surround sound
speaker system
Recorder
(Deck 2)
MXO2 Rack (partial view)
Video
monitor
To another device’s
reference input. If not used,
terminate the signal with a
BNC 75-ohm terminator.
MXO2 Rack (partial view)
Source
(Deck 1)
Tri-level
sync
generator
Typical Matrox MXO2 Rack connections
30
Your notes
Chapter 4, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Rack
5
Connecting External Devices to
Matrox MXO2 LE
This chapter shows how to
supply power and connect
external devices to Matrox
MXO2 LE.
32
¦
Note This chapter explains how to connect external devices to Matrox
MXO2 LE only. For another MXO2 product, see Chapter 3, “Connecting
External Devices to Matrox MXO2,” Chapter 4, “Connecting External Devices to
Matrox MXO2 Rack,” or Chapter 6, “Connecting External Devices to Matrox
MXO2 Mini.”
Available MXO2 LE connections
Matrox MXO2 LE features a full compliment of professional inputs and output,
and allows you to connect multiple devices for up to five user-selectable
simultaneous video outputs.
MXO2 LE video connections
• One HD HDMI input and one HD/SD HDMI output, both with up to eight
channels of embedded audio. The HDMI input/output supports YUV and
RGB devices.
• One HD/SD SDI input with up to eight channels of embedded audio, and
two HD/SD SDI outputs with up to 16 channels of embedded audio. Both
SDI outputs simultaneously output the same video and embedded audio.
• One HD/SD analog component input/output, one S-Video input/output, and
one composite input/output.
• Analog black burst reference input.
MXO2 LE audio connections
• Two balanced analog XLR inputs/ouputs (stereo pair).
• Two unbalanced analog RCA inputs/ouputs (stereo pair).
Powering MXO2 LE
Supply power to MXO2 LE using an AC outlet via the Matrox external power
supply and a power cord, or using a battery. Matrox MXO2 LE connects to the
battery via a 4-pin XLR connector. For information on how to connect your
battery to portable video equipment, such as Matrox MXO2 LE, contact the
battery manufacturer. Before connecting MXO2 LE to a battery, please read the
“Battery requirements and guidelines for MXO2” on page 3.
MXO2 LE power functionality
MXO2 LE features a power button that you can use to turn the MXO2 LE on and
off. To turn your MXO2 LE on, press the power button. To turn off your
MXO2 LE, press and hold the power button for at least two seconds.
¡ Important When MXO2 LE is connected to a computer that is running, do not
disconnect MXO2 LE from its power source, or power off MXO2 LE. Shut down
Chapter 5, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 LE
33
your computer before removing power from MXO2 LE. If using a battery to
power MXO2 LE, ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged.
MXO2 LE
(side view)
External
power supply
Power button
OR
Female 4-pin
XLR cable
Power cord
Battery on a
universal battery
adapter
To AC
outlet
Powering MXO2 LE
34
Connecting MXO2 LE to your computer
Connect MXO2 LE to your computer using the Matrox PCIe cable and the
appropriate Matrox PCIe host adapter.
Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection
To ensure functionality and avoid damaging the PCIe cable or host connector
when connecting MXO2 LE to your computer, the PCIe cable must be connected
to your MXO2 LE and host connector as shown below:
To Matrox MXO2
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the side
labeled “HOST” on MXO2 LE.
To Matrox PCIe ExpressCard/34 adapter
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the
top of the Matrox PCIe
ExpressCard/34 adapter.
To Matrox PCIe host adapter
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the side
labeled “XI LINK” on the Matrox PCIe
host adapter.
Chapter 5, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 LE
35
Using the Matrox PCIe host adapters
For MXO2 LE to be detected on your desktop computer, power must be supplied
to MXO2 LE (see “Powering MXO2 LE” on page 32), and it must be connected
to your computer before starting up your system.
¡ Important Do not disconnect the Matrox PCIe cable from the adapter, or
MXO2 LE, when your computer is running. To safely remove the Matrox PCIe
host ExpressCard/34 adapter from your laptop, see “Removing your PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter” on page 8.
MXO2 LE
(side view)
PCIe cable
²Caution To ensure functionality and
avoid damaging the PCIe cable or host
connector, you must connect the PCIe
cable as shown in “Ensuring proper PCIe
cable connection” on page 34.
Matrox PCIe
host adapter
Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34
adapter
OR
To your laptop’s ExpressCard/34
slot (see “Installing your PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter (for
laptops)” on page 7).
Connecting MXO2 LE to your computer
36
MXO2 LE RS-422 serial connection
MXO2 LE’s RS-422 serial connector lets you use RS-422 device control with a
supported video editing application when capturing material and exporting your
sequence to tape. This serial connection supports any device that uses the RS-422
SMPTE time code protocol, such as a VTR or digital disk recorder. For
information on how to configure Matrox RS-422 device control settings in Adobe
Premiere Pro, see “Setting up Matrox device control” on page 90..
MXO2 LE
(side view)
RS-422 serial cable
RS-422 device
Chapter 5, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 LE
37
Typical Matrox MXO2 LE connections
In the following typical connection examples, we’ve connected a monitor to view
the signal that will be recorded, and separate source and record decks. You may,
however, use the same deck as both your source and record device by making the
input and output connections to a single deck. For details on the Matrox
MXO2 LE connectors, see Appendix B, “Matrox MXO2 Connectors.”
Analog component video connections
In this illustration, we’re using analog component connectors for video, XLR
connectors for audio, and an HDMI connector for video monitoring. The video is
genlocked using a tri-level sync generator.
Source
(Deck 1)
Tri-level
sync
generator
MXO2 LE Inputs
MXO2 LE Outputs
HDMI
monitor
Recorder
(Deck 2)
Typical Matrox MXO2 LE connections
38
Digital video connections
In this illustration, we’re using SDI connectors for video and audio, an SDI
connector for video monitoring, and we’re monitoring the audio on a surround
sound speaker system through an HDMI connector. The video is genlocked using
a tri-level sync generator.
Tri-level
sync
generator
Source
(Deck 1)
MXO2 LE Inputs
MXO2 LE Outputs
Video monitor
Recorder (Deck 2)
Surround sound
speaker system
Chapter 5, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 LE
6
Connecting External Devices to
Matrox MXO2 Mini
This chapter shows how to
connect external devices to
Matrox MXO2 Mini.
40
¦
Note This chapter explains how to connect external devices to Matrox MXO2
Mini only. For another MXO2 product, see Chapter 3, “Connecting External
Devices to Matrox MXO2,” Chapter 4, “Connecting External Devices to Matrox
MXO2 Rack,” or Chapter 5, “Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2
LE.”
Available MXO2 Mini connections
Matrox MXO2 Mini provides inputs and outputs for connecting external devices,
including HDMI, analog component, S-Video, and composite video devices.
MXO2 video and audio connections
• One HD HDMI input and one HD/SD HDMI output, both with up to eight
channels of embedded audio. The HDMI input/output supports YUV and
RGB devices.
• One HD/SD analog component input/output, or one S-Video input/output
and one composite input/output.
¦
Note S-Video input/output is available by using the provided S-Video
adapters (see “Connecting S-Video devices to MXO2 Mini” on page 44).
• Two unbalanced analog RCA audio inputs/outputs (stereo pair).
Powering MXO2 Mini
You can supply power to MXO2 Mini using an AC outlet via the Matrox external
power supply cable. To turn MXO2 Mini off, unplug the Matrox external power
supply cable from the AC outlet while your computer is shut down.
¡ Important When MXO2 Mini is connected to a computer that is running, do
not disconnect MXO2 Mini from its power source. Shut down your computer
before removing power from MXO2 Mini.
MXO2 Mini power supply and adapter plugs
MXO2 Mini provides an external power supply cable with international adapter
plugs for use in different regions.
• To remove an adapter plug from the Matrox power adapter, hold down the
button labeled PUSH on the power adapter, and then slide the adapter plug
up until it releases from the power adapter.
• To insert an adapter plug into the Matrox power adapter, ensure that the
adapter plug is properly aligned with the corresponding slot on the power
adapter, and then slide the adapter plug down into the power adapter until it
locks into place.
Chapter 6, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Mini
41
1
Adapter
plug
Power
adapter
0
Removing an adapter plug
Inserting an adapter plug
MXO2 Mini
Power supply
cable
To AC
outlet
Powering MXO2 Mini
42
Connecting MXO2 Mini to your computer
Connect MXO2 Mini to your computer using the Matrox PCIe cable and the
appropriate Matrox PCIe host adapter.
Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection
To ensure functionality and avoid damaging the PCIe cable or host connector
when connecting MXO2 Mini to your computer, the PCIe cable must be
connected to your MXO2 Mini and host connector as shown below:
To Matrox MXO2
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the side
labeled “HOST” on MXO2 Mini.
To Matrox PCIe ExpressCard/34 adapter
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the
top of the Matrox PCIe
ExpressCard/34 adapter.
To Matrox PCIe host adapter
“B” side of PCIe cable must face the side
labeled “XI LINK” on the Matrox PCIe
host adapter.
Chapter 6, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Mini
43
Using the Matrox PCIe host adapters
For MXO2 Mini to be detected on your desktop computer, power must be
supplied to MXO2 Mini (see “Powering MXO2 Mini” on page 40), and it must
be connected to your computer before starting up your system.
¡ Important Do not disconnect the Matrox PCIe cable from the adapter, or
MXO2 Mini, when your computer is running. To safely remove the Matrox PCIe
host ExpressCard/34 adapter from your laptop, see “Removing your PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter” on page 8.
MXO2 Mini
²Caution To ensure functionality and avoid
damaging the PCIe cable or host connector, you
must connect the PCIe cable as shown in
“Ensuring proper PCIe cable connection” on
page 42.
Matrox PCIe
host adapter
PCIe cable
Matrox PCIe host
ExpressCard/34
adapter
OR
To your laptop’s ExpressCard/34
slot (see “Installing your PCIe host
ExpressCard/34 adapter (for
laptops)” on page 7).
Connecting MXO2 Mini to your computer
44
Connecting S-Video devices to MXO2 Mini
To support S-Video connections on MXO2 Mini, your MXO2 Mini kit includes
two S-Video adapter cables (one for S-Video input and one for S-Video output).
¦
Note When you connect an S-Video device to MXO2 Mini, you won’t be able
to connect an analog component device at the same time.
To S-Video OUT connector
on source device
S-Video adapter
cable
MXO2 Mini
To S-Video IN connector on
output device
Chapter 6, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Mini
45
Typical Matrox MXO2 Mini connections
In the following typical connection examples, we’ve connected a monitor to view
the signal that will be recorded, and separate source and record decks. You may,
however, use the same deck as both your source and record device by making the
input and output connections to a single deck. For details on the Matrox MXO2
Mini connectors, see Appendix B, “Matrox MXO2 Connectors.”
Analog component video connections
In this illustration, we’re using component connectors for video, RCA connectors
for audio, and an HDMI connector for video monitoring. The video is genlocked
to the input source using MXO2 Mini’s built-in genlock.
Source
(Deck 1)
MXO2 Mini
HDMI
monitor
Recorder
(Deck 2)
Typical Matrox MXO2 Mini connections
46
HDMI video connections
In this illustration, we’re using HDMI for video, RCA connectors for audio, and
S-Video for video monitoring. The video is genlocked to the input source using
MXO2 Mini’s built-in genlock.
When using HDMI connections, the embedded uncompressed HDMI audio is
also available.
Source
(Deck 1)
MXO2 Mini
S-Video
monitor
Recorder
(Deck 2)
Chapter 6, Connecting External Devices to Matrox MXO2 Mini
7
Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor
for Video
This chapter explains how to
use the Matrox HDMI
Calibration Utility to calibrate
your RGB HDMI monitor for
video.
48
Overview
The Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility is a unique tool designed to calibrate your
RGB HDMI monitor or television so that it performs like a traditional broadcast
video monitor. This utility provides a wizard that walks you through the
calibration process using specially designed patterns to effectively identify and
compensate for the processing errors that may be present in your HDMI monitor.
The Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility calibrates your monitor’s black and white
levels, white point, gamma response, and hue and chroma.
This utility is optimized for calibrating HDMI LCD/LED monitors or televisions
that support 1:1 pixel mapping, which allows you to view the output on your
HDMI monitor at its exact resolution without any scaling. Although instructions
are provided for calibrating plasma HDMI monitors, and HDMI monitors that do
not support 1:1 pixel mapping, a blue-only filter will be required for the color
calibration (hue and chroma). Some HDMI monitors feature a built-in blue-only
mode that you can use for color calibration. If your HDMI monitor does not have
a built-in blue-only mode, you can use a proper third-party blue-only filter (for
example, a blue gel filter, or blue-only calibration glasses) that completely blocks
out all colors except for blue. Because some blue-only filters do not block out
colors effectively, the Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility includes a blue-only
filter test that you can use to determine if your blue-only filter is adequate for
color calibration.
¦
Note To ensure that the Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility displays correctly,
your computer screen’s resolution must be 1280 ×800 or higher, and the
Windows DPI scaling option for text must be set to the default size. For details on
how to change your screen resolution and DPI scaling setting for text, see your
Windows documentation.
Calibrating your HDMI monitor
The Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility provides on-screen instructions to
calibrate your HDMI monitor. At the end of the calibration process, you must
save your calibration settings to a file. Once saved, the calibration settings are
automatically loaded as your system’s current calibration settings. If you’re
calibrating more than one HDMI monitor, you can calibrate and save settings for
each monitor and load the corresponding settings at any time (see “Loading
Matrox HDMI calibration settings” on page 50). You can later choose to enable
or disable the loaded calibration settings (see “Enabling and disabling the Matrox
HDMI calibration settings” on page 50).
The Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility uses the Matrox WYSIWYG Control
Panel to display the specially designed patterns that are required to calibrate your
HDMI monitor. Therefore, you’ll need to configure your Matrox WYSIWYG
output settings as explained in this section. For more information about using the
Chapter 7, Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video
49
Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel, see “Configuring the Matrox WYSIWYG
Control Panel” on page 200.
¡ Important When running the Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility, make sure
that you don’t run any other application that uses your Matrox MXO2 hardware,
such as Matrox A/V Tools, or another application that displays Matrox
WYSIWYG output.
° To run the Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility:
1 Ensure that your HDMI monitor is connected to the HDMI output on your
MXO2, turn the HDMI monitor on, and allow it to warm up for about 20 or
30 minutes.
2 Right-click the
icon on your Windows taskbar and configure your
Matrox WYSIWYG output settings as follows:
$
Enable WYSIWYG Output must be selected.
$
Choose Output Configuration and on the Video Output page, set the
HDMI output to RGB - calibrated. This is required in order to run the
Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility and output the adjusted RGB HDMI
video to your HDMI monitor.
$
All other required Matrox WYSIWYG output settings will be
automatically set by the HDMI Calibration Utility.
3 Click OK to save your video output settings.
4 Right-click the
icon on your Windows taskbar, and choose Matrox
HDMI Calibration Utility.
5 Follow the onscreen instructions to calibrate your HDMI monitor.
6 When prompted at the end of the calibration process, save your calibration
settings to a file anywhere on your system. Once saved, your settings are
automatically loaded as your system’s current HDMI calibration settings.
You can later choose to enable or disable the loaded calibration settings (see
“Enabling and disabling the Matrox HDMI calibration settings” on page 50).
¦
Note The calibration settings file is saved as an .mtx file. If you cancel the
HDMI calibration, or close the utility at any time before saving the calibration
settings, the current calibration settings will be lost.
Calibrating your HDMI monitor
50
Loading Matrox HDMI calibration settings
After calibrating your HDMI monitor and saving your calibration settings to a
file (see “Calibrating your HDMI monitor” on page 48), the calibration settings
are automatically loaded as the current HDMI calibration settings for your
system. You can, however, load another HDMI calibration settings file at any
time, but only one calibration settings file can be loaded for your system at any
given time. Once loaded, you can enable or disable the calibration settings (see
“Enabling and disabling the Matrox HDMI calibration settings” on page 50).
¦
Note If your system has multiple users, the loaded calibration settings apply to
the logged on user only.
1 Right-click the
icon on your Windows taskbar, choose Output
Configuration and on the Video Output page, set the HDMI output to
RGB - calibrated .
2 Click OK to save your video output settings.
3 Right-click the
icon on your Windows taskbar, and choose Matrox
HDMI Calibration Utility.
4 From the Welcome page, click Load Settings.
5 When prompted, select your desired .mtx calibration settings file, and then
click Open.
Enabling and disabling the Matrox HDMI
calibration settings
The HDMI calibration settings that are loaded for your system (see “Loading
Matrox HDMI calibration settings” on page 50) can be enabled or disabled.
When using a program that supports Matrox MXO2 video output, you can
configure the Matrox video output settings for that program to enable or disable
the loaded HDMI calibration settings. For example, you can configure the MXO2
video output settings that you want to use with Matrox A/V Tools as explained in
“Specifying your video output settings” on page 174 and “Specifying your video
output settings (MXO2 Mini)” on page 178.
When you set the HDMI video output to RGB - calibrated , the video that is
output from the MXO2 HDMI output will have the color settings that are saved in
the currently loaded calibration file. This is used when you want to monitor video
on your RGB HDMI monitor.
To disable the loaded calibration settings and output HDMI video from MXO2
with its native color settings, set the HDMI video output to YUV or RGB native, depending on the HDMI device you connected to the MXO2 HDMI
output. For example, you can set the HDMI video output to RGB - native when
Chapter 7, Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video
51
you want to output native RGB HDMI video to an HDMI recorder to perform an
export to tape.
¦
Note When you configure your Matrox WYSIWYG output settings, the
settings apply to all programs that display Matrox WYSIWYG output. This
means that when you set the HDMI video output to RGB - calibrated using the
Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel, the currently loaded calibration settings will
be applied when you preview HDMI video using any program that displays
Matrox WYSIWYG output, such as Adobe After Effects. For more information
about using the Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel, see “Configuring the Matrox
WYSIWYG Control Panel” on page 200.
Enabling and disabling the Matrox HDMI calibration settings
52
Your notes
Chapter 7, Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video
8
Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe
Premiere Pro
This chapter explains how to
define various settings for
using Matrox MXO2 with
Adobe Premiere Pro. This
includes creating a new
Premiere Pro project, and
specifying your playback,
capture, and export settings.
54
Running antivirus software with Adobe
Premiere Pro
To avoid having dropped frames or other performance issues when working with
Adobe Premiere Pro, make sure that you disable any antivirus scanning of files
while running Premiere Pro. If possible, schedule your antivirus scanning at a
time when you’re not using Premiere Pro, such as overnight or on the weekend.
Displaying warnings in Adobe Premiere Pro’s
Events panel
Matrox MXO2 uses Adobe Premiere Pro’s Events panel to issue certain error
messages and warnings. To display these, choose Window > Events. For more
information about using the Events panel, see your Adobe Premiere Pro
documentation.
Creating a new Adobe Premiere Pro project
Creating a new Adobe Premiere Pro project involves specifying the location of
your scratch disks and selecting a sequence preset.
° To create a new project:
1 Start Adobe Premiere Pro and click the New Project icon. The New
Project dialog box appears. You can leave all the settings on the General
page at the default settings. For details on changing these settings, see your
Adobe Premiere Pro documentation.
2 Click the Scratch Disks tab, and use the Browse button to select an
appropriate A/V drive for each scratch disk type. When specifying the
location of your scratch disks, make sure you follow the recommendations in
your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation. For example, store your video and
audio files on a separate hard drive dedicated to your media assets.
¥ Tip Specifying the same scratch disk settings for all your projects will help
shorten the amount of time it takes to open new or existing projects.
3 From the Location list, select where you want to save your project.
4 In the Name box, specify a name for your project.
5 Click OK to save your settings. The New Sequence dialog box opens on
the Sequence Presets page.
6 Under Available Presets, select the preset that matches the type of
sequence you want to create. Matrox MXO2 supports all the available
presets, including custom presets that you create.
¦
Note When you select any of the MPEG-2 I-frame, uncompressed 10-bit,
or uncompressed 8-bit presets, the appropriate Matrox codec will be set for
rendering your video previews. If you create a custom sequence preset using
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
55
a Matrox codec editing mode, you can specify the Matrox codec that you want
to render your video previews. For more information, see “Defining your video
preview settings” on page 69.
7 In the Sequence Name box, specify a name for your sequence.
8 Click OK to apply the settings.
About the Matrox 10-bit editing workflow
Matrox MXO2 supports a complete 10-bit editing workflow in Adobe Premiere
Pro to give you the highest quality video. This means that you can capture and
export clips to Matrox 10-bit uncompressed format for use in your sequence,
render your video previews to Matrox 10-bit uncompressed format, and output
your sequence at 10-bit on Matrox MXO2 for preview or export to tape.
° To use a Matrox 10-bit editing workflow:
1 Create your sequence using one of the available presets under
Uncompressed 10-bit. This automatically applies the appropriate settings
for your video previews (the rendering codec is set to Matrox 10-bit
uncompressed and maximum bit depth is enabled).
2 When you configure your video output settings on Matrox MXO2, set the bit
depth for your video output to 10-bit (see “Specifying your video output
settings” on page 56 and “Specifying your video output settings (MXO2
Mini)” on page 61).
3 Capture your clips to Matrox 10-bit uncompressed format for editing in your
sequence (see “Specifying your video capture settings” on page 70).
4 If you add Matrox effects or other software effects to your sequence, you
must render these sections in order to output them at 10-bit. Only 10-bit
uncompressed clips without effects or with GPU-accelerated effects, and
video previews that have been rendered using the Matrox 10-bit
uncompressed codec can be output at 10-bit.
¦
Note You can also export your sequence to a Matrox 10-bit uncompressed .avi
file as explained in “Exporting to a Matrox .avi file” on page 84.
Defining your playback settings
In order to use your Matrox MXO2 hardware to output video and audio played
back in Adobe Premiere Pro, you must set your video and audio devices to use
the Matrox Player as follows:
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Playback.
2 From the Audio Device list, select Matrox Player.
3 Under Video Device, select Matrox Player.
About the Matrox 10-bit editing workflow
56
4 To configure your playback settings on Matrox MXO2, click Setup beside
Matrox Player under Video Device.
The Matrox Playback Settings dialog box provides various settings that you
can use to configure your Matrox MXO2 video and audio outputs as explained in
the following sections.
Remarks
• The video output formats (if locked) and the audio output settings in the
Matrox Playback Settings dialog box apply to your entire project. All
other settings, however, are specific to your sequence. Any video output
settings you specify for a particular video format will be applied the next
time you create a new sequence in that same format. If you change any of the
video output settings, the new settings will be applied to all previously
created sequences that have that video format in your project. For example,
if you create a new DV-NTSC sequence, the settings you apply for that
sequence will also be applied to any previously created DV-NTSC sequences
in your project.
• For the best quality output when previewing a sequence that has an
interlaced video format, make sure that you choose Display Both Fields in
the Program Monitor menu.
• You can also select Matrox Player as your video and audio devices in
Adobe Prelude and Encore to use your Matrox MXO2 hardware to monitor
video and audio played back in those applications. The settings provided for
configuring your Matrox MXO2 video and audio outputs in Adobe Prelude
and Encore are the same as for Premiere Pro (except the option to lock the
video output formats is not available in Adobe Prelude and Encore).
Specifying your video output settings
This section explains how to specify your video output settings for Matrox
MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE. For MXO2 Mini, see “Specifying your
video output settings (MXO2 Mini)” on page 61.
You can specify various settings to configure the main and secondary outputs
from your MXO2 system. Some of the settings are predetermined for you based
on your sequence’s video format. For a list of the supported video output formats,
see “Playback using Adobe Premiere Pro” on page 296.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
57
° To specify your video output settings:
1 In the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, click the Video Output tab.
2 Select Lock output formats if you want to ensure that the currently
selected main and secondary video output formats for playback won’t
change when working in your project. When this option is cleared, your
sequence’s video output may change to a different format when you open a
title or graphic in the Source Monitor or use the Multi-Camera Monitor.
¡ Important When Lock output formats is selected, you won’t be able to
change the main and secondary video output formats, and the currently
selected video output formats will be applied to all sequences in your
project. Therefore, make sure that you’ve selected the output formats that
you want (see step 3 below) before selecting this option. In order to specify
different video output formats for each sequence in your project, the video
output formats must not be locked.
Defining your playback settings
58
3 Under Main Output and Secondary Output, you can specify the settings
you want for your main and secondary outputs from MXO2. Depending on
your sequence’s video format, you may not be able to change some of the
settings.
¦
Use this to select the video format you want for your outputs.
Be aware that the format you select may not be supported on all the
MXO2 outputs. For a list of the supported formats, see “Playback using
Adobe Premiere Pro” on page 296.
$
Format
$
Pulldown Method If this setting is available, select the pulldown
method you want to be applied to your video output (Standard 2:3 or
Advanced 2:3:3:2 ). Depending on your sequence’s frame rate and the
current video output format, a pulldown method may automatically be
selected.
$
Aspect Ratio Conversion
Use this to specify how you want your
video to be output when upscaling or downscaling:
•
16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture in letterbox
mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for
display on a standard 4:3 television screen.
•
4x3 Pillarbox Outputs the standard 4:3 picture in pillarbox mode by
adding black bars to the left and right sides of the picture for display on
a widescreen 16:9 television screen.
•
Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture as horizontally
compressed 4:3 video, which retains the picture’s full vertical
resolution for display on a widescreen television. To display the video
with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor, select the
16:9 display setting on the monitor.
•
Center Cut
•
Center Zoom
Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Outputs the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping
the top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen
16:9 television screen.
Note When aspect ratio conversion is applied to both the main and
secondary outputs, the same setting will be applied to both outputs.
4 Under Analog Output, you can specify your analog output format, NTSC
setup level, and output type:
$
Format Use this to specify whether you want the format for the analog
outputs to be the same as the main or secondary output.
$
Output Type
Specifies the analog video output type. If you’re
outputting SD analog video, the output type will be set to All Available to
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
59
indicate that the output will be available on all the analog outputs. If
you’re outputting HD analog video, the output type will be set to
Component.
$
$
Setup (NTSC) Use this to select the setup level you want for your
NTSC analog video. This affects both the NTSC analog video input and
output.
•
0 IRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE. You should select this option
only when working with a commercial DV device that uses the
Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE. For example, if the video
appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC
monitor, you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at
the correct brightness.
•
7.5 IRE
Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7.5 IRE.
YUV/RGB Select YUV or RGB - native to set the type of video signal
that is sent from the component output. For example, select RGB - native
if you connected the component output to a device that accepts an RGB
signal.
5 Under HDMI Output, you can specify your HDMI output format and type.
$
Format Use this to specify whether you want the format for your
HDMI output to be the same as the main or secondary output.
$
YUV/RGB Select the type of video signal that you want to be sent from
the HDMI output:
$
•
YUV Outputs YUV HDMI video. Select this only if you connected
the HDMI output to a device that accepts a YUV signal.
•
RGB - calibrated
•
RGB - native
Outputs adjusted RGB HDMI video using the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings for your HDMI
monitor or television. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor
and loading calibration settings using the Matrox HDMI Calibration
Utility, see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
Outputs native RGB HDMI video that does not apply
any calibration compensation. This is useful when you want to output
RGB HDMI video to a device other than an HDMI monitor or
television, such as an HDMI recorder to perform an export to tape.
3D Viewing Mode Select the 3D signal type that you want to be sent
from the HDMI output to your 3D monitor:
Select this if you’re not outputting 3D video, or to disable
3D video output. You can still monitor 3D video, but you must select
the correct viewing mode on your 3D monitor manually.
•
Disabled
•
Side-by-side
Outputs horizontally compressed side-by-side 3D
video (also referred to as side-by-side horizontal).
Defining your playback settings
60
•
Over/Under
Outputs over/under 3D video (also referred to as top
bottom).
¦
Note
This feature may not be supported on some 3D monitors.
6 Under SDI Output, specify whether you want the format for your SDI
output to be the same as the main or secondary output.
7 Under Advanced, you can specify advanced video output settings.
¦
Use this slider to advance or delay your analog
video output’s subcarrier phase with respect to the horizontal sync of the
genlock source (for composite video only).
$
Analog SC/H Phase
$
Select Allow Super White
to allow the highest luminance level of your video output to exceed the
standard maximum white level. Select Allow Super Black to allow the
lowest luminance level of your video output to fall below the standard
black level. These options apply to all video outputs.
Allow Super White/Allow Super Black
Note Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing
your final video production for broadcast.
8 Under Video Bit Depth, select either 8-bit or 10-bit to indicate the bit
depth that you want for your video output.
¡ Important Only 10-bit uncompressed clips without effects or with
GPU-accelerated effects, and video previews that have been rendered using
the Matrox 10-bit uncompressed codec can be output at 10-bit. For more
information about using this feature, see “About the Matrox 10-bit editing
workflow” on page 55.
9 Click OK to save your settings.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
61
Specifying your video output settings (MXO2
Mini)
You can specify various settings to configure your main analog output and
secondary HDMI output from the MXO2 Mini. Some of the settings are
predetermined for you based on your sequence’s video format. For a list of the
supported video output formats, see “Playback using Adobe Premiere Pro” on
page 296.
° To specify your video output settings:
1 In the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, click the Video Output tab.
2 Select Lock output formats if you want to ensure that the currently
selected main and secondary video output formats for playback won’t
change when working in your project. When this option is cleared, your
sequence’s video output may change to a different format when you open a
title or graphic in the Source Monitor or use the Multi-Camera Monitor.
¡ Important When Lock output formats is selected, you won’t be able to
change the main and secondary video output formats, and the currently
selected video output formats will be applied to all sequences in your
project. Therefore, make sure that you’ve selected the output formats that
you want (see step 3 below) before selecting this option. In order to specify
different video output formats for each sequence in your project, the video
output formats must not be locked.
Defining your playback settings
62
3 Under Analog Output (Main), you can specify the settings you want for
your analog output from MXO2 Mini. Under HDMI Output (Secondary)
you can specify the settings you want for your secondary HDMI output.
Depending on your sequence’s video format, you may not be able to change
some of the settings.
Use this to select the video format you want for your outputs.
For a list of the supported formats, see “Playback using Adobe Premiere
Pro” on page 296.
$
Format
$
Pulldown Method If this setting is available, select the pulldown
method you want to be applied to your video output (Standard 2:3 or
Advanced 2:3:3:2 ). Depending on your sequence’s frame rate and the
current video output format, a pulldown method may automatically be
selected.
$
Setup (NTSC) Use this to select the setup level you want for your
NTSC analog video. This affects both the NTSC analog video input and
output.
$
•
0 IRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE. You should select this option
only when working with a commercial DV device that uses the
Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE. For example, if the video
appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC
monitor, you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at
the correct brightness.
•
7.5 IRE
Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7.5 IRE.
Use this to specify how you want your
video to be output when upscaling or downscaling:
Aspect Ratio Conversion
•
16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture in letterbox
mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for
display on a standard 4:3 television screen.
•
4x3 Pillarbox Outputs the standard 4:3 picture in pillarbox mode by
adding black bars to the left and right sides of the picture for display on
a widescreen 16:9 television screen.
•
Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture as horizontally
compressed 4:3 video, which retains the picture’s full vertical
resolution for display on a widescreen television. To display the video
with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor, select the
16:9 display setting on the monitor.
•
Center Cut
Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
63
•
$
Outputs the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping
the top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen
16:9 television screen.
Center Zoom
Output Type (for analog output) For your main analog output, you can
select Component, or Composite & S-Video if you’re outputting SD
analog video. If you’re outputting HD analog video, the output type will
be set to Component (and the composite and S-Video outputs will be
invalid).
$
YUV/RGB (for analog output) Select YUV or RGB - native to set the
type of video signal that is sent from the component output. For example,
select RGB - native if you connected the component output to a device
that accepts an RGB signal.
$
YUV/RGB (for HDMI output) Select the type of video signal that you
want to be sent from the HDMI output:
$
•
YUV Outputs YUV HDMI video. Select this only if you connected
the HDMI output to a device that accepts a YUV signal.
•
RGB - calibrated
•
RGB - native
Outputs adjusted RGB HDMI video using the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings for your HDMI
monitor or television. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor
and loading calibration settings using the Matrox HDMI Calibration
Utility, see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
Outputs native RGB HDMI video that does not apply
any calibration compensation. This is useful when you want to output
RGB HDMI video to a device other than an HDMI monitor or
television, such as an HDMI recorder to perform an export to tape.
3D Viewing Mode Select the 3D signal type that you want to be sent
from the HDMI output to your 3D monitor:
Select this if you’re not outputting 3D video, or to disable
3D video output. You can still monitor 3D video, but you must select
the correct viewing mode on your 3D monitor manually.
•
Disabled
•
Side-by-side
•
Over/Under
Outputs horizontally compressed side-by-side 3D
video (also referred to as side-by-side horizontal).
Outputs over/under 3D video (also referred to as top
bottom).
¦
Note
This feature may not be supported on some 3D monitors.
4 Under Advanced, select Allow Super White to allow the highest
luminance level of your video output to exceed the standard maximum white
level. Select Allow Super Black to allow the lowest luminance level of your
video output to fall below the standard black level. These options apply to
both the main analog output and secondary HDMI output.
Defining your playback settings
64
¦
Note Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing
your final video production for broadcast.
5 Under Video Bit Depth, select either 8-bit or 10-bit to indicate the bit
depth that you want for your video output.
¡ Important Only 10-bit uncompressed clips without effects or with
GPU-accelerated effects, and video previews that have been rendered using
the Matrox 10-bit uncompressed codec can be output at 10-bit. For more
information about using this feature, see “About the Matrox 10-bit editing
workflow” on page 55.
6 Click OK to save your settings.
Specifying your genlock settings for playback
¦
Note
This section does not apply to Matrox MXO2 Mini.
You can select the source to which you want to genlock all devices connected to
your MXO2 system during playback, as well as adjust the timing settings for all
video outputs from MXO2.
For examples of how to connect an external sync source to your system, see
“Typical Matrox MXO2 connections” on page 19, “Typical Matrox MXO2 Rack
connections” on page 28, and “Typical Matrox MXO2 LE connections” on
page 37. When using Matrox device control with an analog RS-422 device, you
need to connect an external broadcast-quality analog sync source, such as a
tri-level sync generator, as shown in the illustrations.
° To specify your genlock settings for playback:
1 In the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, click the Genlock tab.
2 Under Genlock Source, select one of the following:
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
65
¦
$
Internal Genlock to MXO2’s internal reference signal. Select this
option only if you don’t have an external sync generator or other reliable
external video sync source.
$
Black Burst Broadcast Quality Genlock to an external analog sync
source connected to the reference (REF) input on MXO2. This must be a
stable sync source, such as an external sync generator (bi-level black burst
for SD or tri-level sync for HD), or a source VTR that has a built-in TBC.
$
SDI , Composite, Component, S-Video, and HDMI Input Genlock to
your SDI, composite, component, S-Video, or HDMI video source
connected to the video input on MXO2.
Note The status of your genlock source will be displayed, such as Locked
or Not Locked, to indicate whether or not MXO2 is presently locked to your
selected genlock source. When you change the genlock source, distorted video
and silent audio will be output until MXO2 locks to the new genlock source.
3 Under Genlock Video Format, select your genlock source’s video format.
If you can’t select a video format, make sure that your genlock source
matches the specified video format. When the genlock source is set to
Internal , the genlock video format is set to your main video output format.
4 Under Advanced Settings, drag the Horizontal Delay and Vertical Delay
sliders to adjust the horizontal and vertical timing of your video outputs with
respect to your genlock source. This lets you compensate for cable delays
within your system.
5 Click OK to save your settings.
Specifying your audio output settings
The audio output page lets you adjust various settings for your audio output from
your MXO2 system. For example, you can adjust the volume of your analog
audio output before or while playing back clips.
Defining your playback settings
66
° To specify your audio output settings:
1 In the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, click the Audio Output tab.
2 Under Analog Audio Volume, drag the sliders to adjust the volume of your
analog audio output. By default, the sliders are locked so that they move
together. To move each slider independently, click the lock button (
) to
disable it.
3 Under SDI Audio Bit Depth, select the bit depth you want for your
embedded SDI audio output (20-bit or 24-bit). This setting is not available
on MXO2 Mini.
4 Under HDMI Audio Output, select Output only two audio channels if
you want to output two audio channels from the MXO2 HDMI output,
instead of eight channels. This option is especially useful for HDMI
monitors that don’t accept more than two audio channels.
5 Click OK to save your settings.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
67
Specifying your closed captioning settings
¦
Note
This section does not apply to Matrox MXO2 Mini.
You can specify various settings for playing back and exporting to tape closed
captions that you’ve attached to your sequence on Matrox MXO2. For example,
you can choose to embed the closed captioning data in the SDI VANC output for
display on an SDI video monitor that supports closed captioning. You can also
choose to overlay the closed captions on all the Matrox MXO2 video outputs for
display on video monitors that don’t have a closed captioning feature.
For details on how to attach a closed caption data file to your sequence, see your
Adobe Premiere Pro documentation. To determine your video monitor’s
capabilities for displaying closed captioning, check your video monitor’s
documentation.
° To specify your closed captioning settings:
1 In the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, click the Closed
Captioning tab.
2 Under Embedding Options, select the options that you want for
embedding the closed captioning data in the Matrox MXO2 video output
during playback:
$
Embed in SDI VANC Select this to embed the closed captioning data in
the SDI video output’s VANC for display on an SDI video monitor.
$
Embed in SDI line 21 (NTSC)
$
Embed in analog line 21 (NTSC)
Select this to embed the closed
captioning data in line 21 of the VBI portion of the SDI video output for
display on an SDI NTSC video monitor.
Select this to embed the closed
captioning data in line 21 of the VBI portion of the analog video output
for display on an analog NTSC video monitor.
¡ Important Embedding closed captioning in the video output is supported
only when the frame rate of the video output matches your sequence’s frame
rate. If the frame rate is converted at the output, such as when you apply a
Defining your playback settings
68
pulldown, you can still display the closed captions by selecting Enable
overlay on output as explained below.
3 Under Video Output Display, select Enable overlay on output to overlay
the closed captions on all the MXO2 video outputs, which lets you display
closed captioning on video monitors that don’t have a closed captioning
feature. This option will be available only if closed captioning display is
enabled in the Adobe Premiere Pro Program Monitor menu.
Remarks
$
When Enable overlay on output is selected, the bit depth of your video
output is forced to 8-bit, and you won’t be able to change the bit depth
setting on the Video Output page. Therefore, if you want to output 10-bit
video, you must clear this option before changing the bit depth setting for
your video output.
$
Selecting Enable overlay on output may cause dropped frames in your
video output. If you select this option and also choose to embed the closed
captioning in the video output, you should turn off the closed captioning
feature for all video monitors connected to the MXO2 video outputs to
avoid simultaneously displaying both the embedded and overlaid closed
captions.
4 Click OK to save your settings.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
69
Defining your video preview settings
When you select an MPEG-2 I-frame, uncompressed 10-bit, or uncompressed
8-bit sequence preset, an appropriate Matrox preview file format and codec are
automatically set for rendering your video previews on MXO2. When you create
a custom preset using a Matrox codec editing mode, you can specify the Matrox
codec that you want to use to render your video previews. To check your video
preview settings, choose Sequence > Sequence Settings.
Depending on your sequence’s video format, you can select a different preview
file format or Matrox codec to render your video previews. For details on
configuring the Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codec settings, see “Selecting your
MPEG-2 I-frame settings” on page 80.
Remarks
• For an SD sequence, make sure that the preview file format matches your
sequence’s format (standard or widescreen).
• To use the Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codec for rendering video previews in
an NTSC or 486p sequence, select the appropriate MPEG-2 I-frame preview
file format, such as MPEG-2 I-frame NTSC Standard for a Matrox NTSC
standard sequence.
• If you set the bit depth for your video output on MXO2 to 10-bit, you must
use the Matrox 10-bit uncompressed codec for rendering video previews.
You must also select Maximum Bit Depth in order to output 10-bit video
when the playback is paused. For more information, see “About the Matrox
10-bit editing workflow” on page 55.
For details on specifying additional settings for your video previews, see your
Adobe Premiere Pro documentation.
Defining your video preview settings
70
Defining your capture settings
The Matrox Capture Settings dialog box has pages that you can use to specify
your settings for capturing video and audio in Adobe Premiere Pro on Matrox
MXO2. For information about the supported capture formats, see Appendix C,
“Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture Formats.” For a list of the
supported video output formats for monitoring the video that you’re capturing,
see “Supported video output formats for monitoring” on page 307.
If you want to capture material from an RS-422 device using Matrox device
control, see “Setting up Matrox device control” on page 90. For details on how to
capture material in Adobe Premiere Pro, see your Adobe Premiere Pro
documentation.
¦
Note When you specify your capture settings on Matrox MXO2, VU meters
can be displayed to let you monitor your audio input levels. For more
information, see “Monitoring audio levels for capture” on page 76.
Specifying your video capture settings
Matrox MXO2 lets you capture your video to an MPEG-2 I-frame or
uncompressed format to create .avi files for use in your Adobe Premiere Pro
projects. If you want to capture to an SD format, such as NTSC, you can choose
to capture your video to an .m2v file for DVD authoring using Adobe Encore. For
details about specific limitations when capturing to Matrox .m2v files, see “Notes
about capturing to Matrox .m2v files” on page 79.
° To specify your video capture settings:
1 Choose Project > Project Settings > General.
2 From the Capture Format list, select Matrox AVI to capture to an .avi file,
or Matrox M2V to capture to an .m2v file.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
71
3 Click the Configure button, then click the Video Capture Settings tab.
4 Under Input Format, select the video format that matches your source
video. For a list of the video input formats supported on the various MXO2
inputs for capturing clips, see “Supported input formats” on page 290.
5 Under Input Aspect Ratio, select the aspect ratio of your SD source video
(4:3 or 16:9). For example, to capture SD video that was recorded using the
standard TV screen format, select 4:3. To capture SD video that was
recorded using the widescreen 16:9 format, select 16:9. If you’re capturing
HD video, the Input Aspect Ratio will be set to 16:9.
6 Under Input Source, select the type of input you want to capture. For
example, to capture material from your HDMI source, select HDMI. The
available input sources depend on your selected input format.
¦
Note If Matrox MXO2 can’t detect your source device when you start a
capture, you’ll receive an error message. Either black video will be captured
or the capture won’t be able to start until a valid input signal is present. In
either case, you must make sure that your source device is switched on and
properly connected to MXO2 to properly capture the video.
7 Under Input Type, select the type of equipment you’re using for capture:
Select this if your source device is
broadcast-quality. This setting provides the best capture results for most
devices.
$
Broadcast-quality Source
$
Consumer-quality Source Select this if you’re having problems
capturing video because your source device doesn’t meet
broadcast-quality standards. For example, the capture may be interrupted
Defining your capture settings
72
when you try to capture from certain composite and S-Video devices,
especially from low-quality VCRs. If this happens, selecting
Consumer-quality Source will allow the video to be captured, but you
may experience dropped frames during the capture.
¦
Note For any change to the input type to take effect, you must restart
Premiere Pro and open your project again.
8 Select Use Automatic Gain Control (AGC) if you want the gain of your
composite or S-Video input signal to be adjusted automatically to
compensate for very bright or dark images. This improves the brightness or
contrast of your picture.
9 Under Capture Format, select the format to which you want to capture
your source video. The formats available depend on your selected input
format. If required, your source video will be scaled during capture to match
your capture format. For a list of the supported capture formats, see
“Supported capture formats for Adobe Premiere Pro” on page 291.
10 If you’re capturing HD video to an SD format, under Capture Aspect
Ratio, select 4:3 to capture video to the standard TV screen format, or 16:9
to capture to the widescreen 16:9 format. For all HD capture formats, the
Capture Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9. When capturing SD video to an SD
format, the Capture Aspect Ratio is set to match the Input Aspect Ratio .
11 Under Codec, select the codec that you want to use for the capture. When
capturing to an .m2v file, the codec is set to Matrox MPEG-2 IBP.
$
Matrox 8-bit Uncompressed
Captures video to 8-bit uncompressed
format.
Captures video to 10-bit
$
Matrox 10-bit Uncompressed
uncompressed format.
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame Captures video to MPEG-2 intra-frame
format using the 4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level at a selected data rate (SD
resolution only).
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD Captures video to MPEG-2 intra-frame
format using the 4:2:2 Profile @ High Level at a selected data rate (HD
resolution only).
12 If you’re capturing to a Matrox MPEG-2 format, click the Configure button
to configure your MPEG-2 settings. For details on the available settings, see
“Selecting your MPEG-2 I-frame settings” on page 80 or “Selecting your
MPEG-2 IBP settings” on page 82. Once you’ve configured your settings,
click OK to return to the Matrox Capture Settings dialog box.
13 Under Aspect Ratio Conversion, specify the type of aspect ratio
conversion that you want to be applied to your captured video (used when
upscaling or downscaling video during capture only):
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
73
¦
$
16x9 Letterbox Captures the widescreen 16:9 picture as letterbox
video by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for display
on a standard 4:3 television screen.
$
4x3 Pillarbox Captures the standard 4:3 picture as pillarbox video by
adding black bars at the left and right sides of the picture for display on a
widescreen 16:9 television screen.
$
Center Cut
$
Center Zoom
Captures the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Captures the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping the
top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen 16:9
television screen.
Note When capturing to an SD 16:9 format, such as NTSC 16:9, the video
will be captured as horizontally compressed 4:3 (anamorphic) video. To
display the video with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor,
select the 16:9 display setting on the monitor.
14 Click OK to save your settings.
Specifying your audio capture settings
You can specify various audio capture settings, such as to specify your input
source and the type of audio files (either stereo .wav or mono .wav) that you want
to create when capturing audio on Matrox MXO2.
Remarks
• When you capture to an .avi file on Matrox MXO2, the clip’s video and
audio are saved to the .avi file, and the clip’s audio is also saved to one or
more separate .wav files. You could choose to edit the separate .wav files
using an audio post-processing application.
• When you capture to an .m2v file on Matrox MXO2, the clip’s associated
audio is always saved to one or more separate .wav files.
° To specify your audio capture settings:
1 Choose Project > Project Settings > General.
2 From the Capture Format list, select Matrox AVI to capture to an .avi file,
or Matrox M2V to capture to an .m2v file.
Defining your capture settings
74
3 Click the Configure button, then click the Audio Capture Settings tab:
4 Under Input Source, select your audio source. For example, if you want to
capture the embedded audio of your HDMI source, select HDMI
(embedded audio). Your audio input source may be set for you based on
your selected video input source.
¦
Note When capturing HDMI embedded audio, only uncompressed
embedded audio is supported.
5 Under Capture Format, select the bit-depth for your captured audio files.
6 If you want the VU meters to be displayed each time you configure your
Matrox MXO2 capture settings or open the Capture panel to start a capture,
select Show VU meters. For details on using the VU meters, see
“Monitoring audio levels for capture” on page 76.
7 If you experience dropped frames during capture, select Disable audio
preview to disable the audio preview only while you’re capturing material
(for .avi captures only).
8 Under Capture Files, indicate whether you want to capture to stereo or
mono audio files, and select which channels you want to save to separate
.wav files.
$
From the File Type list, select Stereo to save your captured audio to
stereo .wav files, or Mono to save your captured audio to mono .wav files.
If you’re capturing an .m2v clip, the File Type will be set to Stereo.
$
From the Filename lists, select which stereo pairs or mono channels you
want to save to your .wav files (up to four stereo files or up to eight mono
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
75
files depending on the type of audio being captured). Select None for the
particular .wav files you don’t want to be created, or click the D (default)
button for each Filename list if you want to capture only channels 1 and
2. When Matrox MXO2 saves each .wav file, it assigns a .Stereo.wav or
.Mono.wav suffix to the base name you gave for the associated video file.
For example, if you’ve named your video file MyFile.avi, the associated
stereo audio files would be named MyFile.Stereo1.wav,
MyFile.Stereo2.wav, etc.
Remarks
$
The channels that you choose to save to the first stereo.wav file or first
two mono.wav files will be embedded in the associated .avi file. When
you import your .avi file to the Project panel, the clip’s separate .wav files
will also be imported, and the embedded audio in the .avi file will be
ignored. The clip’s .avi file and first associated .wav file, however, will
appear as a single Movie clip in your project. The embedded audio in the
.avi file will be used only if the .avi file does not have any associated .wav
files. Therefore, if you perform audio post processing on your .avi files,
make sure you delete the associated .wav files so that only the embedded
audio in the .avi files will be used in your project.
$
When performing an audio-only capture, Matrox MXO2 supports capture
of only one stereo pair. Your first stereo or first two mono channels will be
saved to a single stereo .wav file (any other channels will be ignored).
When MXO2 saves the .wav file of an audio-only capture, it does not
assign the .Stereo.wav suffix to the filename.
9 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your capture settings
76
Monitoring audio levels for capture
If you select Show VU meters on the Audio Capture Settings page, each
time you configure your Matrox MXO2 capture settings or open the Capture
panel to start a capture in Adobe Premiere Pro, VU meters will be displayed to let
you monitor the levels of your currently selected audio input source.
Clipping detectors
Peak level indicators
As you play your audio source, the color of the input level is green at or below
–12 dBFS, yellow between –12 and –6 dBFS, and red above –6 dBFS. The
clipping detectors will “light up” (become red) whenever audio clipping occurs.
The peak level indicators are thin lines that show the highest level recently
reached. These indicators will show the peak level for about two seconds or until
a higher peak level is reached.
If needed, adjust the audio level on your source device to keep the average input
level between –30 and –10 dBSF.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
77
Specifying your video output settings for
previewing captured clips
While capturing clips on Matrox MXO2, you can preview your captured video
using the MXO2 video outputs. You can specify various video output settings for
previewing your captured video as follows:
1 Choose Project > Project Settings > General.
2 From the Capture Format list, select Matrox AVI to capture to an .avi file,
or Matrox M2V to capture to an .m2v file.
3 Click the Configure button, then click the Video Output tab.
4 The settings provided are the same as explained in “Specifying your video
output settings” on page 56 and “Specifying your video output settings
(MXO2 Mini)” on page 61. However, the main and secondary video output
settings will be set for you based on your selected capture format. For a list
of the supported video output formats for previewing your captured video,
see “Supported video output formats for monitoring” on page 307.
5 Click OK to save your settings.
¦
Note The video output settings that you select for capture will be applied the
next time you capture clips to the same format. For example, the video output
settings you select for clips captured to NTSC format will be retained for the next
time you capture NTSC clips. Your new video output settings will also be applied
to all sequences in your project that have that video format.
Specifying your genlock settings for capture
¦
Note
This section does not apply to Matrox MXO2 Mini.
You can select the source to which you want to genlock all devices connected to
your MXO2 system during capture, as well as adjust the timing settings for all
video outputs from MXO2.
For examples of how to connect an external sync source to your system, see
“Typical Matrox MXO2 connections” on page 19, “Typical Matrox MXO2 Rack
connections” on page 28, and “Typical Matrox MXO2 LE connections” on
page 37. When using Matrox device control with an analog RS-422 device, you
need to connect an external broadcast-quality analog sync source, such as a
tri-level sync generator, as shown in the illustrations.
° To specify your genlock settings for capture:
1 Choose Project > Project Settings > General.
2 From the Capture Format list, select Matrox AVI to capture to an .avi file,
or Matrox M2V to capture to an .m2v file.
3 Click the Configure button, then click the Genlock tab.
Defining your capture settings
78
4 The settings provided are similar to the genlock settings for playback (see
“Specifying your genlock settings for playback” on page 64), except the
settings apply only during capture.
Remarks
$
To avoid inaccurate In/Out points during batch capture, you must select an
external sync source.
$
If you want to genlock to your video input source, make sure that you
select the correct genlock source before starting your capture. For
example, if you’ll be capturing HDMI video and you want to genlock to
your video input, make sure that you select HDMI Input as your genlock
source. If you later choose to capture analog video, you’ll need to change
your genlock source to Analog Input.
5 Click OK to save your settings.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
79
Notes about capturing to Matrox .m2v files
When capturing to Matrox .m2v files, keep the following points in mind:
• Automatic scene detection (Scene Detect) is not supported, but batch capture
is supported.
• An associated .xmp metadata file is created for all captured and logged
(offline) .m2v clips. These files are created in your specified video capture
folder, and contain time code and other information that you provided for
your .m2v clips, such as tape name, description, and scene. You can open the
.xmp files in Adobe Bridge. Take care not to delete the .xmp files and always
keep them with their associated .m2v files. Otherwise, you won’t be able to
batch capture logged .m2v clips, and the time code information won’t appear
for your .m2v clips in the Project panel.
• Matrox .m2v files are to be used for DVD authoring with Adobe Encore.
However, if you want to use your Matrox .m2v clips in Adobe Premiere Pro,
be aware of the following issues:
$
The associated .wav files for your .m2v clips are not automatically
imported to the Project panel.
$
When performing a batch capture of .m2v clips, the captured video and
audio clips won’t be automatically imported to the Project panel. Because
you won’t be able to link the logged (offline) clips to the captured files on
disk, you’ll have to import the batch captured .m2v clips manually. As
well, if you recapture clips using batch capture, captured video clips will
be imported automatically only if you choose to delete the original media
files from disk.
$
When you place a Matrox .m2v clip on a video track, an empty associated
.wav clip will be placed on an audio track beneath it. To get rid of this
clip, select it in the sequence and choose Clip > Unlink. Once you’ve
unlinked the .wav from the .m2v, you can select the .wav clip on the audio
track and delete it.
$
It’s recommended that you don’t add handles (extra frames) to your
captured .m2v clips. If you do, the handles will be appropriately trimmed
from the video when you add the clip to your sequence, but the handles
won’t be trimmed from the associated audio.
Defining your capture settings
80
Selecting your MPEG-2 I-frame settings
When using the Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame or Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD codec
to capture or render video, you can specify various settings for the MPEG-2
I-frame compression.
° To select your MPEG-2 I-frame settings:
1 Click the Configure button. This displays a dialog box similar to the
following:
2 Drag the Data Rate slider until your desired data rate is displayed. The
higher the data rate you select, the better the video quality will be. The range
of available data rates depends on whether you’re using the Matrox MPEG-2
I-frame HD or SD format.
¡ Important Depending on the capabilities of your system, you may drop
frames if you select a data rate higher than 125 Mb/sec.
3 To apply advanced settings to your MPEG-2 I-frame file, click the
Advanced button.
¦
Note The default advanced settings should provide good results for most
applications. We recommend that you change these settings only when needed
for special purposes.
4 Under Rounding Type, select one of the following:
$
MPEG-2 Rounds the AC coefficients up to the nearest whole number
when calculating the quantization coefficient.
$
Matrox Custom Truncates the AC coefficients to the lowest whole
number when calculating the quantization coefficient. In some cases, this
setting may yield less artifacts in graphics.
5 Under DC Precision, select the bit-depth precision of the DC intra block.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
81
¦
Note The higher the DC precision value that’s used to capture or render
your video, the more likely that the DC content will be increased at the expense
of the AC content in the encoded stream. This may result in lowering the
overall quality of the compressed stream at a specified data rate.
6 Under Zig Zag Type, select one of the following:
Sets the regular (default) zig zag scanning pattern of the AC
coefficient of the DCT block as defined in the ISO/IEC 13818-2 (figure
7-2) specification documentation.
$
Regular
$
Alternate
Sets an alternate zig zag scanning pattern of the AC
coefficient of the DCT block as defined in the ISO/IEC 13818-2 (figure
7-3) specification documentation. Use this setting when capturing or
rendering video at a high data rate (that is, at a data rate of about 50
Mb/sec for SD video, or 100 Mb/sec or higher for HD video).
7 Select the Force Frame-based DCT setting to render macroblocks as
frames rather than as fields. In some cases, graphics will yield less artifacts if
this option is selected.
8 Click OK to save your settings.
Selecting your MPEG-2 I-frame settings
82
Selecting your MPEG-2 IBP settings
When capturing video to a Matrox .m2v file using Adobe Premiere Pro, the codec
is set to Matrox MPEG-2 IBP. You can specify various settings for the MPEG-2
IBP compression.
° To select your MPEG-2 IBP settings:
1 Click the Configure button. This displays a dialog box similar to the
following:
2 Under Data Rate (Mb/sec), you can select the encoding type and data rate
for the MPEG-2 IBP compression.
$
Encoding type
•
From this list, select one of the following:
Constant bit rate (CBR) Video is compressed at your selected
target data rate, which is useful when you need to limit or predict the
size of your .m2v file. However, if your video is very complex (such as
scenes with many colors or sharp edges), you’ll need to select a high
data rate to avoid having frames of very blocky video in your file.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
83
•
$
¦
Video is compressed at varying data rates
based on the complexity of the video. The target data rate you select is
used as the average data rate for the compression.
Variable bit rate (VBR)
Min, Target, and Max sliders Use these sliders to select your desired
data rate. The higher the target data rate you select, the better the video
quality will be. Only the Target slider will be available if you selected
Constant bit rate (CBR). If you selected Variable bit rate (VBR), all
three sliders will be available so that you can set the minimum, target, and
maximum data rates for the video compression.
Note Adobe Encore requires CBR-encoded .m2v files longer than about two
minutes to be transcoded. VBR-encoded .m2v files do not require transcoding
in Adobe Encore.
3 Under GOP Structure, you can customize the GOP structure for the
MPEG-2 IBP compression as follows:
Determines the number of frames in the GOP (Group of
$
GOP length
Pictures).
$
Subgroup length
Determines the subgroup length of B-frames and
P-frames in the GOP, after the initial I-frame. For example, a subgroup of
3 appears as “BBP,” and a subgroup of 2 appears as “BP.” The available
subgroup lengths depend on your selected GOP length.
4 Under Profile, select one of the following MPEG-2 profiles:
$
4:2:0 This profile uses 4:2:0 luminance/chrominance sampling and is
suitable for broadcast transmission and distribution on DVD. You must
select this profile if you’re capturing to an .m2v file for DVD authoring.
$
4:2:2 This profile uses 4:2:2 luminance/chrominance sampling and is
suitable for high-quality distribution and archiving.
5 Under Motion Estimation, drag the slider to adjust the quality of the
motion estimation used for the video compression. The default setting gives
good results for most video. However, if you have a lot of fast motion in your
video, such as fast-paced sports footage, you can get better results by
dragging the slider to the right (towards Slow/High quality). This improves
the quality of the motion estimation, but decreases the speed of the video
compression. Alternately, if you have mostly slow-paced video, you may
want to drag the slider to the left (towards Fast/Low quality) to decrease
the quality of the motion estimation and speed up the video compression.
6 Click OK to save your settings.
Selecting your MPEG-2 IBP settings
84
Exporting to a Matrox .avi file
Several software codecs are included with Adobe Premiere Pro so that you can
export your video to different formats. Your Matrox MXO2 system adds several
Matrox codecs to the ones included with Premiere Pro to allow you to export
your sequence to a Matrox .avi file.
If you have a Matrox MXO2 product with MAX technology, you can also export
your sequence to a Matrox MAX H.264 file as explained in Chapter 17, “Using
the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software.”
° To export your sequence to a Matrox .avi file:
1 Unless you want to export your entire sequence, position the work area bar
over the section of the sequence you want to export.
2 Choose File > Export > Media. This opens the Export Settings dialog
box.
3 From the Format list, select Matrox AVI.
¦
Note Although the AVI format also lets you export your sequence to a
Matrox .avi file using Matrox codecs, it uses Video for Windows (VFW)
codecs only. To obtain the best performance when exporting material from
Adobe Premiere Pro to a Matrox .avi file, you must select the Matrox AVI
format for your exports.
4 From the Preset list, select the video format you want for your exported file.
5 Select Export Audio if you want to export both video and audio (Export
Video is always selected.)
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
85
¦
Note Exported audio will be embedded in your .avi file. Matrox MXO2
does not support audio-only exports to an .avi file.
6 Click the Video tab. Under Codec, an appropriate Matrox codec is
automatically selected for you based on your selected preset. You can change
the codec if you want.
Renders video to DV or DVCAM format.
$
Matrox DV/DVCAM
$
Matrox DVCPRO
$
Matrox DVCPRO50
$
Matrox DVCPRO HD
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame Renders video to MPEG-2 intra-frame
format using the 4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level (for SD resolutions) or High
Level (for HD resolutions) at a selected data rate.
$
Matrox 8-bit Uncompressed
Renders video to DVCPRO format.
Renders video to DVCPRO50 or D-9 format.
Renders video to DVCPRO HD format.
Renders video to 8-bit uncompressed
format.
$
Matrox 10-bit Uncompressed
Renders video to 10-bit uncompressed
format.
Exporting to a Matrox .avi file
86
7 If you’re exporting to Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame format, click the Configure
button to select your MPEG-2 I-frame settings (see “Selecting your MPEG-2
I-frame settings” on page 80).
8 Under Video, appropriate settings are applied based on your selected preset.
You can customize these settings as follows:
$
Frame Size Sets the width and height for your exported video. The
available frame sizes depend on your selected codec.
$
Frame Rate
$
Field Type Specifies the order in which the video fields are displayed,
such as Upper First for interlaced HD video, or Progressive for all
progressive video formats. The available field types depend on your
selected codec, frame size, and frame rate.
$
Aspect Ratio
$
De-interlace video If you’re exporting interlaced video to a
progressive format (such as 1080i to 720p), select this option to
de-interlace the video for display on a monitor that displays lines
progressively, such as an LCD or computer monitor. (This option won’t be
present if you’re exporting to an interlaced format or your source video is
progressive.)
$
Maintain aspect ratio when scaling
Sets the frame rate for the video format to which you are
rendering. The available frame rates depend on your selected frame size.
This is set to 16:9 when exporting to HD. When
exporting to SD, you can select 4:3 to export to the standard TV screen
format, or 16:9 to export to the widescreen 16:9 format.
Select this option if you’re
scaling your source video for export, and you want to maintain your
source video’s aspect ratio. Your source video will be exported as
pillarbox video when exporting to a larger aspect ratio, or letterbox video
when exporting to a smaller aspect ratio. If this option is not selected,
scaled video that doesn’t match the specified aspect ratio for export will
be exported as anamorphic video.
9 From the Source Range list in the Source panel, select the range you want
to export, such as Work Area.
10 Click Queue to send your export request to Adobe Media Encoder, or click
Export to immediately start your export.
For information about other export settings and using Adobe Media Encoder, see
your Adobe Media Encoder documentation.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
87
Exporting an NTSC or 486p sequence to
Adobe Premiere Pro 720x480 formats
When you choose File > Export > Media to export a sequence, Adobe
Premiere Pro provides the MPEG2-DVD export format in the Export Settings
dialog box, which lets you export your sequence to a DVD-compliant MPEG-2
file suitable for use with most DVD authoring programs, such as Adobe Encore.
To export an NTSC or 486p sequence that has a Matrox codec editing mode to a
720 ×480 MPEG2-DVD format or any other Adobe Premiere Pro 720 ×480
format, you must select Scale to Fill from the Source Scaling menu on the
Output panel of the Export Settings dialog box. For details on how to export to
MPEG2-DVD and other Adobe Premiere Pro 720×480 formats, see your Adobe
Premiere Pro documentation.
Adding a voice-over to your sequence
Matrox MXO2 supports voice-over, which allows you to record audio tracks as
.wav files directly in the Timeline panel to add commentary to video clips, such
as newsreels and documentaries.
¦
Note Matrox voice-over supports recording to standard, mono, and adaptive
audio tracks only.
Connection and setup
1 Connect the microphone to the audio input on your source device and
connect the audio output (analog or AES/EBU) from the source device to the
corresponding audio input on your MXO2 hardware.
2 Choose Edit > Preferences > Audio Hardware.
3 From the Default Device list, select Matrox ASIO Driver for Adobe
Premiere Pro , then click ASIO Settings.
4 From the Input Source list, select the audio source type corresponding to
the device to which the microphone is connected.
Exporting an NTSC or 486p sequence to Adobe Premiere Pro 720x480
88
5 The audio input channels are set to Channel 1-2. On MXO2 Rack, make
sure that your XLR or AES/EBU audio input source is connected to the
channel 1/2 connector(s) only.
6 Click OK to save your settings, and then click OK to close the Preferences
dialog box.
Recording your voice-over
You use Adobe Premiere Pro’s Audio Mixer to record your voice-over. For
further information on using the Audio Mixer, see your Adobe Premiere Pro
documentation.
1 Choose Window > Audio Mixer, then select the sequence in which you
want to record your voice-over (for example, Window > Audio Mixer >
Sequence 01 ).
2 Position the current-time indicator in the Timeline panel where you want the
voice-over to begin.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
89
¦
Note If a track that you’ll be recording your voice-over on already contains
audio at the current-time indicator, the audio will be overwritten by your
voice-over.
Enable track for
recording
Volume
Play/Stop toggle
Record
3 In the Audio Mixer panel, click the Enable track for recording button (R)
for each track on which you want to record audio. You can record your
voice-over on multiple tracks at the same time.
4 If you enable recording for a mono track, you can select Matrox Left or
Matrox Right from the Track Input Channel menu at the top of the panel to
indicate which channel you want to record on that track.
5 Select Meter Input(s) Only in the Audio Mixer menu to display the MXO2
audio input levels in the meters.
¥ Tip You can click the Solo Track button ( S) for a track on which you’ll be
recording audio to mute the audio playback of other audio tracks in your
sequence.
Adding a voice-over to your sequence
90
6 Test the audio input levels by speaking into the microphone, and watch the
levels in the meters. If needed, adjust the audio level on your source device
so that the input levels are sufficiently high but not clipping.
7 Click the Record button (
8 Click the Play button (
¦
) to prepare the sequence for recording.
) to start recording your voice-over.
Note During recording, there’s a slight delay in the audio preview of your
voice-over. To mute the preview, click the Mute Track button ( M) or you can
choose to lower the track volume by dragging the Volume slider.
9 Click the Stop button (
) to stop recording. Your voice-over will be added
to the selected audio tracks as .wav files.
Setting up Matrox device control
Matrox device control lets you control any device that supports the RS-422
SMPTE time code protocol when capturing or exporting material to tape in
Adobe Premiere Pro. To use this device control, you must connect your source
device or recorder as follows:
• Matrox MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE Connect the RS-422
connector on your MXO2 hardware to the serial device control port on your
source device or recorder using an RS-422 serial cable (see “MXO2 RS-422
serial connection” on page 18, “MXO2 Rack RS-422 serial connection” on
page 27, or “MXO2 LE RS-422 serial connection” on page 36).
• Matrox MXO2 Mini Matrox MXO2 Mini does not have an RS-422
connector. You can, however, use a suitable adapter to connect the serial
device control port on your source device or recorder to your computer. For a
list of supported device control adapters, see the Matrox MXO2 Support
section of our website at www.matrox.com/video/support.
° To configure your Matrox device control settings:
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Device Control.
2 From the Devices list, select Matrox RS-422 Device Control.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
91
3 Click Options to display the following dialog box:
4 From the Port list, select Matrox RS-422 if you’ve connected your device
to the RS-422 connector on your MXO2 hardware (not available on MXO2
Mini). For MXO2 Mini, select the COM port on your computer to which
you’ve connected your device.
5 From the Time Source list, select the time source to be used for controlling
your device:
$
LTC Longitudinal Time Code recorded on a track adjacent to the video
(this is the default time source). This type of time code can be read at all
tape speeds, except still.
$
VITC
$
LTC+VITC Select this if you want your device to decide which type of
time code to use in different operational modes (recommended only if
you’re sure that the two types of time code match on your tape).
$
Control Track
Vertical Interval Time Code that is recorded onto the vertical
blanking interval of the video. This type of time code can be read
whenever an image is displayed, but not usually during high-speed
operation.
Select this if you want to use only your tape’s control
track as the time source. Because using the control track is not as reliable
Setting up Matrox device control
92
as LTC or VITC for device control, you should select this option only if
you’re having problems using the time code on your tape.
6 From the Time Base list, select the time base that matches your tape, such as
30 fps Drop Frame if you’re using NTSC video with drop frame time code,
or 25 fps if you’re using PAL video.
7 Select Use VTR’s internal cue if the Matrox device control is having
problems cueing your VTR, such as when you cue to a specific In or Out
point. Because using the VTR’s internal cueing method slows down the
cueing, you should select this option only if you’re experiencing problems
cueing to a time code when using Matrox device control.
8 Under Capture, use the Time Code Offset to specify the number of frames
to adjust the start time for capture, if needed. For example, if your captures
are starting three frames too early (that is, three frames before your specified
In point), enter a time code offset of 3. Alternately, if your captures are
starting three frames too late, enter a time code offset of -3.
9 Under Export to Tape, you can specify various settings that enable you to
obtain a frame-accurate export to tape. For an example of how to calibrate
your device for frame-accurate recording, see “Obtaining a frame-accurate
export to tape using Matrox device control” on page 97.
$
Select one of the following modes to specify the
editing capabilities of your recorder:
Device Edit Mode
•
Auto Edit Select this if your recorder supports edit commands and
has auto edit capabilities. Devices that support this mode perform
frame-accurate recording. Therefore, you won’t need to make any
adjustments to the Mark In and Out time code offsets, and those
settings won’t be available.
•
Basic Edit
•
Edit Not Supported Select this if your recorder doesn’t support any
edit commands. In this case, you will probably need to specify both a
Mark In and a Mark Out time code offset, and you won’t be able to
perform an insert edit (the options to perform an insert edit won’t be
available in the Matrox Export to Tape dialog box).
Select this if your recorder supports edit commands, but
does not have auto edit capabilities. When using this mode, you may
need to adjust the Mark In time code offset, but the recording should be
accurate at the Out point.
¥ Tip If you’re not sure if your device supports edit commands, try
performing an export to tape using the different edit modes, starting with
Auto Edit. If your device doesn’t support the selected edit mode, the
recording will either not start or nothing will get recorded on the tape.
$
Mark In/Out Time Code Offset These offsets specify the number of
frames to adjust the recording start and stop times if the recording doesn’t
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
93
start at your specified In point and stop at your specified Out point on the
tape. For example, if the recording starts three frames before the In point,
set the Mark In Time Code Offset to 3 (or -3 if the recording starts three
frames too late). You should adjust the Mark In time code offset first,
because once this setting is accurate your device may also be accurate at
the Out point.
$
Playback Offset Specifies the number of frames to offset the playback
of your sequence for export to tape. For example, if playback starts too
late and you’re missing the first three frames of your sequence recorded
on the tape, enter an offset of -3. Alternately, if playback starts too early
and the first three frames of your sequence are repeated, enter an offset of
3. Before changing this offset, you must first make any required
adjustments to the Mark In and Mark Out time code offsets.
10 Click OK to save your settings.
For details on capturing with device control, see your Adobe Premiere Pro
documentation. For information about exporting your sequence to tape, see
“Exporting your sequence to tape” on page 94.
Requirements for using Matrox device control
When using Matrox device control, keep the following points in mind:
• You must set your device to Remote or VTR mode.
• When using an analog RS-422 device on MXO2, MXO2 Rack, or
MXO2 LE, you must genlock to an external broadcast-quality analog sync
source. If you’re using an SDI RS-422 device and you don’t have an external
broadcast-quality analog sync source, you can genlock to your SDI video
source for capture. For export to tape, you can set your genlock source to the
MXO2 internal reference and configure the setting on your deck to genlock
to the SDI video input. For details on how to set your genlock source, see
“Specifying your genlock settings for playback” on page 64 and “Specifying
your genlock settings for capture” on page 77.
• You must stripe your tapes with continuous and consecutive time code. You
can stripe your entire tape with time code by recording black video for the
duration of the tape. Avoid having the time code counter reset to 00:00:00:00
during the striping.
• When capturing material, make sure that you don’t specify any preroll or
time code offset value in the Device Control section of the Settings pane.
Instead, a preroll of about five seconds will automatically be applied, and
you must specify any required time code offset in the Matrox RS-422
Device Control Settings dialog box.
Setting up Matrox device control
94
Exporting your sequence to tape
To export your Adobe Premiere Pro sequence to tape without using device
control, simply play back your sequence and record the output from any of the
available outputs on your MXO2 system. If your recorder supports RS-422
device control, you can export your sequence to tape using Matrox device control
as explained in “Exporting to tape using Matrox device control” on page 94.”
Avoiding issues when using Matrox device
control
Keep the following points in mind when exporting to tape using Matrox device
control:
• To avoid having discontinuous (broken) time code recorded onto your tape
when using Matrox device control, set your recorder to generate time code
internally based on time code already present on the tape (this setting is
called INT REGEN on some devices). Don’t use free run or external time
code regeneration mode.
• Because Matrox device control requires a preroll, don’t start the export to
tape within the first ten seconds on your tape or at a time code less than
00:00:10:00.
• To avoid repeated frames or broken time code when performing an assemble
edit using Matrox device control, add ten seconds or more of black video or
color bars to the end of your sequence.
Exporting to tape using Matrox device control
With Matrox device control, you can perform either an insert or assemble edit to
record your Adobe Premiere Pro sequence onto tape as follows:
1 Open your project, activate the sequence that you want to export to tape, and
position the work area bar over the section of the sequence that you want to
export.
2 If you haven’t already done so, render all sections that are identified with a
red or yellow render bar.
¦
Note Adobe Premiere Pro will automatically render sections that have a red
render bar when you start an export to tape, but to avoid having dropped frames
you must render both the red and yellow sections before performing a Matrox
export to tape.
3 Make sure that you’ve properly connected your RS-422 recorder and
configured Matrox device control as explained in “Setting up Matrox device
control” on page 90.
4 Load a striped recordable tape into your recorder, and set your recorder to
Remote or VTR mode.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
95
5 Choose File > Export > Tape to display the following dialog box:
6 To review or change your device control settings, click Device Options.
This displays the Matrox RS-422 Device Control Settings dialog box as
explained in “Setting up Matrox device control” on page 90 (except you
won’t be able to change the specified port).
7 Under Export to Tape Mode, you can specify the type of export you want
to perform and the tracks you want to be recorded:
$
Format Determines the video format for the export to tape. The
available formats depend on your currently selected video output settings
(see “Specifying your video output settings” on page 56 and “Specifying
your video output settings (MXO2 Mini)” on page 61).
$
Assemble
Records all tracks (video and audio) sequentially onto the
tape. The control track and previously recorded material on the tape will
be replaced with the material recorded from your sequence.
Exporting your sequence to tape
96
$
¦
Records selected tracks (video and/or audio), without affecting
the control track. This lets you perform a video or audio dub. For
example, you can choose to record only video, only selected audio tracks,
or video and selected audio tracks from your sequence.
Insert
Note Check your device’s documentation to determine its recording
capabilities for assemble and insert editing. To perform an insert edit, the edit
mode for Matrox device control must be set to Auto Edit or Basic Edit as
explained in “Setting up Matrox device control” on page 90.
$
Select Abort export on dropped frames if you’d like the export to tape
to automatically stop when dropped frames are encountered. You’ll get a
warning if the export to tape is aborted due to a dropped frame.
8 Use the transport controls to play back your tape. The current time code of
your tape appears in the text box above the transport controls. You can also
use the J, K, and L shortcut keys to control the shuttle. Press J to shuttle left,
L to shuttle right, and K to stop. Pressing J or L multiple times increases the
speed of the shuttling.
9 Specify where you want the recording to start and stop as follows:
¦
$
Click the Set In Point button (
) to specify where you want the
recording to start, or enter the required time code in the In box.
$
Click the Set Out Point button (
) to specify where you want the
recording to stop, or enter the required time code in the Out box.
Alternately, you can select Duration and enter the duration you want for
the recording. The Out point will then be calculated for you. By default,
the duration is set to the duration of the work area. You can click Reset at
any time to set the duration back to the duration of the work area.
Note When Out is selected, the duration is calculated based on your
selected In and Out points. When Duration is selected, the Out point is
calculated based on your specified In point and duration.
10 Click Export to start the export to tape.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
97
Obtaining a frame-accurate export to tape
using Matrox device control
In order to obtain a frame-accurate export to tape when using Matrox device
control, there are various settings that you may need to adjust in the Matrox
RS-422 Device Control Settings dialog box:
• The Mark In Time Code Offset and Mark Out Time Code Offset
determine when your device starts and stops recording on the tape. If the
recording doesn’t start on the tape at your specified In point and stop at your
specified Out point, you can adjust these offsets so that the recording
starts/stops earlier or later.
¦
Note Adjusting the Mark In and Out time code offsets won’t be required if
your recorder has auto edit capabilities and you set the edit mode for export
to tape to Auto Edit as explained in “Setting up Matrox device control” on
page 90.
• The Playback Offset determines when your sequence starts playing back.
Depending on your system, you may need to adjust this offset so that your
sequence starts playing back earlier or later.
Here’s an example of how to calibrate your RS-422 device for frame-accurate
export to tape:
1 Stripe an NTSC tape with continuous and consecutive time code starting at
00:00:00:00.
2 Create a new Matrox NTSC sequence with a bars and tone clip at least ten
seconds long containing time code starting at 00:00:00:00. Make sure you
place the clip at the start of your sequence.
¥ Tip You can create a bars and tone clip by right-clicking in the Project
panel and choosing New Item > Bars and Tone. You can add time code to
the clip by applying a Timecode effect as explained in your Adobe Premiere
Pro documentation.
3 Set up Matrox device control with the Mark In Time Code Offset, Mark
Out Time Code Offset, and Playback Offset for export to tape set to 0
(see “Setting up Matrox device control” on page 90).
4 Export your sequence to tape and set the In point for the recording to
00:00:10:00 and the Out point for the recording to 00:00:20:00 (see
“Exporting to tape using Matrox device control” on page 94).
5 When the export to tape is finished, play back your tape and check where the
recording started. For example, if the bars and tone clip started recording at
00:00:09:25 on your tape (five frames before your specified In point), then
you need to set the Mark In Time Code Offset to 5. Alternately, if the
recording started at 00:00:10:05 (five frames after your specified In point),
then you need to set the Mark In Time Code Offset to -5.
Exporting your sequence to tape
98
6 Make any required adjustment to the Mark In Time Code Offset in the
Matrox RS-422 Device Control Settings dialog box, and perform another
export to tape with the same settings (In point at 00:00:10:00 and Out point
at 00:00:20:00.)
7 When the export to tape is finished, play back your tape and make sure that
your bars and tone clip stopped recording at 00:00:20:00 (the recording
should have started at 00:00:10:00). For example, if the recording stopped at
00:00:19:25 (five frames before your specified Out point), then you need to
set the Mark Out Time Code Offset to 5.
8 Once you’ve made any required adjustments to the Mark In and Out time
code offsets and ensured that your bars and tone clip starts and stops
recording at your specified In and Out points, perform another export to tape
with the In point for the recording set to 00:00:30:00.
9 When the export to tape is finished, go to 00:00:30:00 on your tape, and
check which frame from your sequence has been recorded. You should see
frame 00:00:00:00 from your bars and tone clip at 00:00:30:00 on your tape,
with no repeated frames. For example, if frame 00:00:00:00 has been
repeated for the next five frames, then your sequence started playing back
five frames too early and you need to set the Playback Offset to 5.
Alternately, if you see frame 00:00:00:05 from your bars and tone clip
recorded at 00:00:30:00, then the sequence playback started five frames too
late and you need to set the Playback Offset to -5.
Chapter 8, Using Matrox MXO2 with Adobe Premiere Pro
9
Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe
Premiere Pro
This chapter explains how to
set up Matrox effects such as
color corrections and wipes
using the Matrox plug-in for
Adobe Premiere Pro.
100
Available effects
The Matrox plug-in for Adobe Premiere Pro lets you set up the following Matrox
effects in your Adobe Premiere Pro projects1:
• Color corrections.
• Chroma key and luma key effects.
• Chroma clamper effect.
• Wipes.
When you install Matrox Mtx.utils, all the Matrox effects are added to Adobe
Premiere Pro. You set up Matrox effects in your projects the same way as other
effects included with your Adobe software. For example, you apply a Matrox
wipe to your clips in Adobe Premiere Pro just as you would any other type of
transition, except that the controls provided let you create a Matrox wipe, as
explained in this chapter. For instructions on setting up Adobe Premiere Pro
effects and transitions, refer to your Adobe documentation.
¥ Tip You can filter the Effects panel to show only the effects and transitions that
are accelerated by your Matrox hardware by clicking the
button at the top of
the Effects panel.
1
The Matrox color correction, chroma key, luma key, and chroma clamper effects are
also available in Adobe After Effects.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
101
How to apply a Matrox video effect in Adobe
Premiere Pro
The Matrox plug-in for Adobe Premiere Pro allows you to apply several Matrox
video effects to your clips. To apply a Matrox video effect, drag the desired effect
from the Effects panel onto the clip in the Timeline panel.
By default, the Matrox video effects are found in the Matrox bin under Video
Effects.
¥ Tips
• You can also apply preconfigured Matrox video effects found in the Matrox
Effect Presets bin under Presets.
• If you can’t see the Effects panel, choose Window > Effects. If you can’t
see the Effect Controls panel, choose Window > Effect Controls.
How to apply a Matrox video transition in
Adobe Premiere Pro
In Adobe Premiere Pro, the Matrox wipe transitions are found in the Matrox bin
under Video Transitions in the Effects panel.
There are numerous methods to create transitions in Premiere Pro. Use the
method that works best for you to apply your Matrox wipes. For information on
applying transitions, see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation.
How to apply a Matrox video effect in Adobe Premiere Pro
102
Applying a mask to your Matrox effects
The Matrox color correction, chroma key, and luma key effects allow you to add
a mask to define the area where you want to apply your effect. For example, you
may want to apply a color correction to only one area of your clip and leave the
rest of the clip untouched.
° To adjust the mask properties:
Click the triangle next to Mask to expand the property list.
The properties under Mask let you control the area on the clip where you want to
apply the mask. You can enter the values you want in the text boxes or drag the
appropriate sliders ( Left, Right, Top, and Bottom ).
• Left
Adjusts the left edge of your mask.
• Right Adjusts the right edge of your mask.
• Top
Adjusts the top edge of your mask.
• Bottom
Adjusts the bottom edge of your mask.
• Select Mask Displays a dialog box in which you can apply your mask
settings (see “Using Select Mask” on page 103).
• Invert Inverts the mask so that your effect is applied outside the mask,
instead of within the mask.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
103
Using Select Mask
To apply a mask to your Matrox effect using the Select Mask dialog box, click
the triangle next to the Select property to expand it, then click the Select Mask
button:
The Select Mask dialog box allows you to apply a mask in two ways:
• Click and drag directly in the Select Mask window to create the rectangular
area where you wish to apply the mask.
You can resize the mask area by dragging any side of the rectangle. For example, dragging the right side of the rectangle adjusts the right edge of the
mask area. To resize the entire mask area at once, drag one of the corners
(the corner that’s diagonally opposite the corner you are moving will remain
stationary).
• Use the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom controls to adjust any edge of your
mask by a given number of pixels. You can enter values in the text boxes or
drag the sliders to resize your mask area. For example, drag the Left slider to
adjust the left edge of your mask area.
Applying a mask to your Matrox effects
104
Creating a Matrox primary color correction
Color correction is important for all productions, whether you want to achieve
continuity when cutting between shots, ensure broadcast safe levels, or establish
and emphasize a “look.” Matrox color correction provides basic proc amp
control, three-way color correction complete with master, shadows, midtones,
and highlights control, and input and output level control. You can also easily
match colors with a reference shot. For more information about color matching,
see “Matching colors between two clips” on page 115.
¥ Tip Adobe Premiere Pro includes a workspace setup that is optimized for
working with clips and effects to facilitate color correction. To prepare your
workspace for color correction, choose Window > Workspace > Color
Correction.
° To set up a Matrox primary color correction:
Click the triangle next to Matrox Color Correction (Primary) or Matrox Color
Correction (Primary - Advanced) to expand the property list.
¦
Note The RGB Curves and Tonal Range settings are available only with the
advanced versions of the Matrox primary and secondary color correction effects.
Because the advanced versions of these effects require additional system
resources, you should apply them only if you want to use the RGB Curves or
Tonal Range settings.
• Enable Split View Select this option to split your clip into two sections in
the Program Monitor and on your video monitor. One section will display
your clip as you adjust the color correction controls, and the other section of
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
105
the clip will remain unchanged. For more information, see “Using Split
View” on page 106.
¡ Important This option is for preview only. You should clear it before you
render your clip, otherwise the split will appear in your video output.
• Proc Amps The processing amplifier (proc amp) controls allow you to
adjust different aspects of your clip:
Adjusts the tint of the colors in the image.
$
Hue
$
Saturation
$
Contrast
$
Brightness
Adjusts the saturation (vividness) of the image’s colors.
Adjusts the difference in luminance between the lightest and
darkest areas of the image.
Adjusts the level of black in the image.
• RGB Curves Lets you use curves to adjust the red, green, and blue color
channels of your clip individually, or use a master curve to adjust all color
channels simultaneously. For more information, see “Using RGB curves” on
page 108.
• Color Balance These controls let you adjust the mixture of colors in your
clip.
$
Tonal Range Allows you to fine-tune the tonal ranges of your clip by
reducing the range of pixels included for shadows, midtones, or
highlights. For more information, see “Adjusting tonal range” on
page 110.
$
Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes
when you adjust the color balance settings. You can also modify most of
the color balance settings directly within the graph. For more information,
see “Using the color balance graph” on page 111.
$
Numerical Lets you adjust your color balance settings numerically by
entering values in the text boxes, or by dragging the corresponding sliders.
You can adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance for each tonal
range.
Graphical
•
Master (Hue, Saturation, and Luminance)
Affects all areas of
your clip from the lightest white to the darkest black.
•
Shadows (Hue, Saturation, and Luminance)
Affects the darkest
areas of your clip.
•
Midtones (Hue , Saturation, and Luminance)
Affects the areas
with tones between the darkest and lightest areas of your clip.
•
Highlights (Hue, Saturation, and Luminance) Affects the lightest
areas of your clip.
• Luma Mapping
Creating a Matrox primary color correction
106
$
Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes
when you adjust the luma mapping settings. You can also modify the
luminance of your clip directly within the graph. For more information,
see “Using the luma mapping graph” on page 117.
$
Numerical Lets you adjust the luma mapping settings numerically by
entering values in the text boxes, or by dragging the corresponding sliders.
•
Input Levels (Black and White) These controls let you fine-tune
your clip’s brightness and contrast by changing the luminance value
that represents black, white, or gray. Doing so expands or compresses
the range of luminance levels in your clip, which increases or decreases
your clip’s tonal range.
For example, by increasing the black value, you set black in your clip
to a higher luminance value, which compresses the luminance range
and darkens your clip proportionally.
•
Output Levels (Black and White) These controls let you map the
values under Input Levels to any level of black and white. You can
reduce contrast in your clip, or reverse the luminosity of your clip by
setting black to a higher value than white.
•
Gamma Use this to adjust the midtones in your clip without
adjusting black or white.
• Mask Allows you to apply a mask to your effect. For more information,
see “Applying a mask to your Matrox effects” on page 102.
Using Split View
The Split View option allows you to split your clip in two for preview on your
Program Monitor and your video monitor. One section displays your clip as you
adjust the color correction controls, while the other section of the clip remains
unchanged.
There are two ways to enable Split View. You can select the Enable Split View
option in the Effect Controls panel, or work directly in Adobe Premiere Pro’s
Program Monitor using your mouse.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
107
Working with Split View in the Program Monitor
To activate the Split View controls in the Program Monitor, click the Transform
icon (
) beside the name of the Matrox color correction effect in the Effect
Controls panel. The Split View button will appear in the upper left corner of the
Program Monitor:
Split View button
Enable Split View by clicking the Split View button. You can then drag the
handles on the corners of the split rectangle to define the area you want to split.
You can also drag the split rectangle to move it to a specific region of your clip.
The area within the split view rectangle will display any color correction you
make, while the area outside remains unchanged.
In the following example, the split view rectangle has been moved to display the
color correction in the area surrounding part of the Chinese character on the wall:
Remarks
• The Split View option is for preview only. You should disable it before
rendering your material, otherwise the split will appear in your video output.
• If you enable Split View and create a mask outside the split view rectangle,
you will not be able to see it. The mask will only be visible when you move
the split view rectangle directly over it. If you invert a mask that is not in the
split view rectangle area, the whole clip will be inverted since the mask is
ignored.
Creating a Matrox primary color correction
108
Using RGB curves
¦
Note The RGB Curves settings are available only with the advanced versions
of the Matrox primary and secondary color correction effects.
With RGB curves, you can individually adjust the red, green, and blue color
channels across the entire tonal range of your clip, or adjust all three color
channels simultaneously with a master curve. RGB curves allow you to achieve
color effects that would be difficult, if not impossible, to achieve using the Color
Balance settings, and also give you a high degree of control over the color
channels in each tonal range. For example, you can easily add a red, green, or
blue tint to your clip, or use the master curve as a way to adjust the brightness and
contrast of your clip.
Each curve is displayed on a grid with the horizontal axis representing the input
or current pixel value, and the vertical axis representing the output value of the
pixel after the curve adjustment is applied. By default, a curve starts as a straight
line with two end points, one at the bottom left of the grid (shadows), and the
other at the top right of the grid (highlights). Before any adjustments are made,
each point on the curve has the same input and output value.
1
0
0 Default end point
(shadows)
1 Default end point
(highlights)
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
109
Click the R, G, or B button to select the curve corresponding to the color channel
you want to adjust, or click the Master button for the master curve, and then drag
the curve to obtain your desired effect. For example, click the R button and drag
the top right end point towards the top left of the grid to increase the slope of the
curve and add red to the clip. Drag that same point towards the bottom right of
the grid to decrease the slope of the curve and remove red from the clip. Clicking
the Enable button will show/hide any adjustments you have made to the RGB
channels at any time (you do not need to click Enable to start adjusting the
curves).
¥ Tip For increased precision, hold down the ALT key while you drag the curve,
or the CRTL key to change your cursor into a crosshair that will help you align
your curve to the grid.
You can add up to 14 control points to each curve in addition to the two default
end points. These control points act as anchors that allow you to lock your curve
so adjustments can be applied only to specific tonal ranges. Click on a curve to
add control points, and hold the SHIFT key while clicking a control point to
delete it (end points cannot be deleted). Adjusting the points in the top right area
of the grid affects highlights, the middle area affects midtones, and the bottom
left area affects shadows. For example, the following S-shaped master curve adds
contrast in the midtones range, without creating any completely black or white
areas.
Creating a Matrox primary color correction
110
If you want to reset the Master, R, G, or B curve to its default setting at any time,
click the appropriate Reset button.
Red curve Reset button
¥ Tip By applying a mask to your clip, you can adjust the RGB channels for that
specific area of your clip, or invert the mask to isolate that same area from being
affected by your RGB adjustments.
Adjusting tonal range
¦
Note The Tonal Range settings are available only with the advanced versions
of the Matrox primary and secondary color correction effects.
Using the tonal range curves allows you to fine-tune the range of pixels that are
affected when you make a color correction to the shadows, midtones, or
highlights of your clip using the color balance graph. For more information, see
“Using the color balance graph” on page 111.
The histogram shows the distribution of pixels in each tonal range of your clip. In
the following example, the histogram represents a clip with a high amount of
shadows (left), a lesser amount of midtones (middle), and an even lesser amount
of highlights (right).
0
1
2
0 Shadows 1 Midtones 2 Highlights
Click the Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights button to select the curve
corresponding to the tonal range you want to adjust, and then drag the curve as
desired to reduce the number of pixels to be included in each tonal range.
¦
Note You cannot increase the number of pixels in a tonal range. For example,
you can’t extend the shadows curve into the highlights range.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
111
Using the color balance graph
The color balance graph allows you to modify the Color Balance settings for
each tonal range directly within the color maps. You can also perform an auto
balance or a color match using the buttons beneath the color maps. For more
information, see “Performing an auto balance” on page 114 and “Matching
colors between two clips” on page 115. Depending on which color map you use,
you can adjust your clip globally, or only the shadows, midtones, or highlights.
You can drag the handle in the center of any color map to adjust the color balance
(Hue and Saturation) for a specific tonal range, such as to adjust the color
balance globally throughout your clip using the Master color map, or adjust the
color balance of only the shadows using the Shadows color map. Drag the
handle toward a color you want to increase in your clip, or away from a color you
Creating a Matrox primary color correction
112
want to decrease. For example, if you move the handle towards red, you also
decrease cyan by the same amount, as shown in the following diagram:
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
¥ Tip
MAGENTA
BLUE
CYAN
For increased precision, hold down the ALT key while you drag the handle.
If you want to reset the color balance ( Hue and Saturation) setting, click the
Reset Color Balance button under the color map you are using.
Reset Color
Balance button
To adjust the luminance for a tonal range, drag the corresponding luminance
slider under the appropriate color map. For example, if you want to adjust the
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
113
luminance for only the shadows, drag the luminance slider under the Shadows
color map.
Luminance
slider
Creating a Matrox primary color correction
114
Performing an auto balance
Before matching colors, you can perform an auto balance on your target clip to
automatically apply a color shift to your clip to compensate for different lighting
conditions. To do this, click the Auto Balance button under the corresponding
color map and use the eyedropper to select the area you want to correct in your
clip. For example, to balance your clip’s highlights, click the Auto Balance
button under the Highlights color map, and click (or click and drag) on the
lightest area of your clip. The auto balance is performed immediately.
Auto Balance
button
¦
Note To perform an auto white balance, click the Auto White Balance button
under the Master color map, and click (or click and drag) on a white or light gray
area of your clip.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
115
Matching colors between two clips
You can perform a color match to match colors between two clips (such as skin
tone, sky, etc.). The color match lets you select colors from a reference clip to
match to your target clip. You can affect the colors globally (Master), or just the
Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights .
You can select the colors for your reference color and match color by either
clicking the Color Picker button or the eyedropper.
Color Picker button
Eyedropper
The eyedropper can be used in two ways:
• Click the eyedropper button and click on the desired color in your clip.
• Click the eyedropper button and click and drag anywhere on your clip to
create a rectangular area containing the color you want to select. The
selected color will be an average of the pixel information contained within
the rectangle.
° To perform a color match:
1 Prepare your workspace for color correction by choosing Window >
Workspace > Color Correction.
2 Open your target clip (clip that contains the colors you want to correct) in the
Source Monitor.
¦
Note For best results when using a target clip that has multiple effects
applied to it, create a nested sequence and open it in your Source Monitor
before performing the color match. For more information about creating
nested sequences, see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation.
3 Apply the Matrox Color Correction effect to your target clip on the
timeline.
4 Use the controls under the Reference Monitor to move to a frame in your
reference clip that contains the colors you want to match.
5 Use the controls under the Source Monitor to go to the frame in your target
clip that contains the colors you want to match to your reference clip.
Creating a Matrox primary color correction
116
6 Select a reference color from your reference clip by using the Reference
Color eyedropper under the color map you want to affect (Master,
Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights ).
Reference Color eyedropper
7 For example, to match a very dark color in your reference clip to your target
clip, click the Reference Color eyedropper under the Shadows color map,
and click (or click and drag) on the desired color in your reference clip.
8 Select a match color from your target clip in the Source Monitor window by
using the Match Color eyedropper under the corresponding color map
(Master, Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights).
Match Color eyedropper
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
117
Using the luma mapping graph
To modify your luma mapping values directly in the graph, click the triangle next
to the Luma Mapping Graphical property to expand it:
• Map This is the default view when you first expand the Graphical
property. You can drag the handles in the graph to adjust the Input and
Output levels for black and white, as well as the Gamma .
3
4
2
0
0 Input
Black
Level
1 Input
White
Level
1
2 Output
Black
Level
3 Output
4 Gamma
White
Level
• Plot Click this button to plot the luminance values in the current frame of
your clip to the histogram (the plot will reflect any color correction changes
you’ve made). Each luminance value present in your image appears as a
vertical line in the histogram. A longer line indicates a higher amount of
pixels in your image of that line’s luminance value. You can drag the handles
Creating a Matrox primary color correction
118
in the graph to adjust the Input and Output levels for black and white, as
well as the Gamma.
3
4
2
1
0
0 Input
Black
Level
1 Input
White
Level
2 Output
Black
Level
3 Output
4 Gamma
White
Level
• Auto Black Click this to define the darkest pixels in your clip as black.
The intermediate luminance values are proportionally redistributed.
• Auto White Click this to define the lightest pixels in your clip as white.
The intermediate luminance values are proportionally redistributed.
¦
Note If you want to restore the default luminance values at any time, click
the Restore Default Values button.
Restore
Default Values
button
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
119
Creating a Matrox secondary color correction
Matrox secondary color correction offers all the properties found in Matrox
primary color correction, with the added capability of limiting the color
correction to a specific range of pixels using the selective key properties. For
example, secondary color correction can be used to change the color of a dress,
deepen the background sky color, or to achieve an effect where only one object or
person remains in color while the rest of the image becomes black and white. For
details on how to isolate a color and make the rest of the clip black and white, see
“Creating a color pass effect” on page 128.
¥ Tip Adobe Premiere Pro includes a workspace setup that is optimized for
working with clips and effects to facilitate color correction. To prepare your
workspace for color correction, choose Window > Workspace > Color
Correction.
° To set up a Matrox secondary color correction:
Click the triangle next to Matrox Color Correction (Secondary) or Matrox
Color Correction (Secondary - Advanced) to expand the property list.
¦
Note The RGB Curves and Tonal Range settings are available only with the
advanced versions of the Matrox primary and secondary color correction effects.
Because the advanced versions of these effects require additional system
resources, you should apply them only if you want to use the RGB Curves or
Tonal Range settings.
Creating a Matrox secondary color correction
120
• Enable Split View Select this option to split your clip into two sections in
the Program Monitor and on your video monitor. One section will display
your clip as you adjust the color correction controls, and the other section of
the clip will remain unchanged. For more information, see “Using Split
View” on page 106.
• Proc Amps The processing amplifier (proc amp) controls allow you to
adjust different aspects of your clip:
Adjusts the tint of the colors in the image.
$
Hue
$
Saturation
$
Contrast
$
Brightness
Adjusts the saturation (vividness) of the image’s colors.
Adjusts the difference in luminance between the lightest and
darkest areas of the image.
Adjusts the level of black in the image.
• RGB Curves Lets you use curves to adjust the red, green, and blue color
channels of your clip individually, or use a master curve to adjust all color
channels simultaneously. For more information, see “Using RGB curves” on
page 108.
• Color Balance These controls let you adjust the mixture of colors in your
clip.
$
Tonal Range Allows you to fine-tune the tonal ranges of your clip by
reducing the range of pixels included for shadows, midtones, or
highlights. For more information, see “Adjusting tonal range” on
page 110.
$
Graphical
$
Numerical Lets you adjust your color balance settings numerically by
entering values in the text boxes, or by dragging the corresponding sliders.
You can adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance for each tonal
range.
Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes
when you adjust the color balance settings. You can also adjust and
modify most of the color balance settings directly within the graph. For
more information, see “Using the color balance graph” on page 111.
•
Master (Hue, Saturation, and Luminance)
Affects all areas of
your clip from the lightest white to the darkest black.
•
Shadows (Hue, Saturation, and Luminance)
Affects the darkest
areas of your clip.
•
Midtones (Hue , Saturation, and Luminance)
Affects the areas
with tones between the darkest and lightest areas of your clip.
•
Highlights (Hue, Saturation, and Luminance) Affects the lightest
areas of your clip.
• Luma Mapping
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
121
$
Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes
when you adjust the luma mapping settings. You can also modify the
luminance of your clip directly within the graph. For more information,
see “Using the luma mapping graph” on page 117.
$
Numerical Lets you adjust your luma mapping settings numerically by
entering values in the text boxes, or by dragging the corresponding sliders.
•
Input Levels (Black and White) These controls let you fine-tune
your clip’s brightness and contrast by changing the luminance value
that represents black, white, or gray. Doing so expands or compresses
the range of luminance levels in your clip, which increases or decreases
your clip’s tonal range.
For example, by increasing the black value, you set black in your clip
to a higher luminance value, which compresses the luminance range
and darkens your clip proportionally.
•
Output Levels (Black and White) These controls let you map the
values under Input Levels to any level of black and white. You can
reduce contrast in your clip, or reverse the luminosity of your clip by
setting black to a higher value than white.
•
Gamma Use this to adjust the midtones in your clip without
adjusting black or white.
• Mask Allows you to apply a mask to your effect. For more information,
see “Applying a mask to your Matrox effects” on page 102.
• Selective Key The selective key settings allow you to apply the color
correction effect to a specific range of pixels in your clip. Performing a
selective key is similar to performing a chroma or luma key, however, with a
selective key you are applying color correction to the keyed area instead of
transparency. For example, if you use the selective key properties to select
red as your Hue color, the color correction will be applied to the red regions
in your clip. You can enable each keyer (Hue, Saturation, and Luma)
individually, or enable all three at the same time to get the desired results.
$
Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes
when you adjust the selective key Numerical settings. You can also
modify the settings directly within the graph and perform an auto key. For
more information, see “Using the selective key graph” on page 124.
$
Numerical Lets you adjust your key settings numerically by entering
values in the text boxes, or by dragging the corresponding sliders.
Graphical
•
This type of key lets you select areas to be keyed (affected
by the color correction) based on their hue.
Hue Key
$
Select this to enable the Hue Key properties and hue key
indicator in the selective key graph.
Enable
Creating a Matrox secondary color correction
122
•
$
Hue Use this to rotate the indicator around the perimeter of the color
spectrum so that you can select different hues (colors) on which to key.
$
Aperture Use this to widen or narrow the aperture of the indicator
to increase or decrease the range of colors on which you want to key.
$
Softness
Sets the amount of softness applied to the range of colors
specified in the aperture region.
This lets you select colors to be keyed (affected by
the color correction) based on their saturation value. Pale colors have a
low saturation value, while vivid colors have a high saturation value.
Saturation Key
Select this to enable the Saturation Key properties and
saturation key indicator in the selective key graph.
$
Enable
$
Low Clip
$
Use this to set the range of saturation values you want
to be partially affected based on the value set by the Low Clip control.
As you increase the Low Gain setting, more pixels are partially
affected by the color correction. If you decrease the Low Gain control,
less pixels are partially affected.
Use this to select the lower saturation values to be keyed.
Low Gain
A Low Gain setting of 100 provides the widest range for maximum
color correction. Alternately, a gain setting of 0 creates a key where
saturation values are either completely affected or left untouched. You
can think of the Low Gain control as defining an “Affected to
Untouched” range for keying the pale colors in your image.
$
This control is similar to the Low Gain setting, except
you use it to set the range of higher saturation values you want to be
partially affected based on the value set by the High Clip control. As
you increase the High Gain setting, less pixels are partially affected
by the color correction. If you decrease the High Gain setting, more
pixels are partially affected. You can think of the High Gain control
as defining an “Untouched to Affected” range for keying the vivid
colors of your image.
$
High Clip
¦
•
High Gain
This control is similar to Low Gain, except you use it to
select the higher saturation values to be keyed.
Note The values you can select using the Low Clip and Low Gain
controls are dependent on the High Clip and High Gain controls, and
vice versa. This prevents the low and high controls from keying on
the same values.
This type of key lets you select areas to be keyed (affected
by the color correction) based on their luminance value.
Luma Key
$
Select this to enable the Luma Key properties and luma key
indicator in the selective key graph.
Enable
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
123
$
Low Clip Use this to select the lower (darker) luminance values to
be keyed. A Low Clip setting of 0 represents black, and a setting of
255 represents white. Intermediate settings represent different shades
of gray, from very dark to very light gray.
$
Low Gain Use this to set the range of luminance values you want
to be partially affected based on the value set by the Low Clip control.
As you increase the Low Gain setting, more luminance values
become partially affected by the color correction.
A Low Gain setting of 100 provides the widest range for maximum
color correction. Alternately, a gain setting of 0 creates a key where
the luminance values are either completely affected or left untouched.
You can think of the Low Gain control as defining an “Affected to
Untouched” range for keying the dark areas of your image.
$
High Gain This control is similar to Low Gain, except you use it
to set the range of luminance values you want to be partially affected
based on the value set by the High Clip control. You can think of the
High Gain control as defining an “Untouched to Affected” range for
keying the lighter areas of your image.
$
High Clip This control is similar to Low Clip , except you use it to
select the higher (brighter) luminance values to be keyed.
¦
Note The values you can select using the Low Clip and Low Gain
controls are dependent on the High Clip and High Gain controls, and
vice versa. This prevents the low and high controls from keying on
the same luminance values.
•
Invert Key Select this to invert the key selection, giving you the
opposite result of what you originally selected.
•
Show Key as Output Select this to display the matte used to define
your selective key region. This enables you to further refine your key.
Areas that are completely affected by the color correction are white,
untouched areas are black, and gray areas are partially affected.
•
Expand Outside Mask Applies the color correction settings outside
the mask area. This setting is especially useful when setting up a color
pass effect where you have several objects of the same color but want to
retain the color for only one object. For more information, see
“Creating a color pass effect” on page 128.
Creating a Matrox secondary color correction
124
Using the selective key graph
The selective key graph allows you to modify your selective key settings ( Hue
Key, Saturation Key, and Luma Key) directly in the graph. You can also
perform an auto key.
• Map This is the default view when you first expand the graphical property.
You can drag the handles to move the indicator to different regions in the
graph to adjust the Hue Key, Saturation Key, and Luma Key settings.
In order to see the indicator and handles, you have to enable the key setting you
want to use. For example, if you want to adjust the Hue Key properties, you need
to click the Hue button in the selective key graph or select the Enable option in
the Hue Key numerical properties. In the following graph, the Hue properties
have been enabled.
• Plot Click this button to plot the colors and luminance values that are
present in the current frame of your clip. You can drag the handles to move
the indicator to different regions in the graph to adjust the Hue Key,
Saturation Key, and Luma Key properties. The luma plot histogram shows
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
125
each luminance value present in your image as a vertical line. A longer line
indicates a higher amount of pixels in your image of that line’s luminance
value.
• Hue Click this button to enable or disable the Hue Key properties ( Hue,
Aperture and Softness). When enabled you will be able to see the Hue
Key indicator and handles to modify the Hue Key properties in the selective
key graph.
2
1
0
1
2
0 Hue
1 Aperture
2 Softness
• Sat Click this button to enable or disable the Saturation Key properties
(Low Clip , Low Gain, High Gain, and High Clip). When enabled you will
Creating a Matrox secondary color correction
126
be able to see the Sat Key indicator and handles to modify the Saturation
Key properties in the selective key graph.
0123
0 Low Clip
1 Low Gain
2 High Gain
3 High Clip
• Lum Click this button to enable or disable the Luma Key properties (Low
Clip , Low Gain, High Gain , and High Clip). When enabled you will be
able to see the Lum Key indicator and handles to modify the Luma Key
properties in the selective key graph.
1 2
0
0 Low Clip
1 Low Gain
3
2 High Gain
3 High Clip
• For both the Saturation Key and Luma Key properties, you can lock and
move all the handles at the same time in the selective key graph by pressing
SHIFT and then dragging any handle. If you press CTRL you can lock and
move either the Low Clip and Low Gain handles or High Gain and High
Clip handles.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
127
¦
Note If you want to reset the hue, saturation, and luma key properties to the
default settings at any time, click the appropriate Reset button.
Saturation Key
Reset button
• Show Key Click this button to display the matte used to define your
selective key region. This enables you to further refine your key. Areas that
are completely affected by the color correction are white, untouched areas
are black, and gray areas are partially affected.
• Auto Key Click this button to automatically key on the most common
color at the current frame (except gray). Selecting Auto Key affects values
for the Hue Key, Saturation Key, and the Luma key properties.
Alternately, you can use the auto key eyedropper to select a color on which
you want to key.
Auto key
eyedropper
• The auto key eyedropper can be used in two ways:
$
Click the eyedropper button and click on a color on which you want to
key.
$
Click the eyedropper button and click and drag anywhere on your clip to
create a rectangular area containing the color on which you want to key.
The selected color will be an average of the pixel information contained
within the rectangle.
You can further refine your auto key color by using the plus and minus eyedroppers.
Plus and minus
eyedroppers
For example, if you selected light red as your auto key color and would like a
dark red color in your clip to be included in the auto key, you can use the
plus eyedropper to select that dark red in your clip. To remove colors from
your auto key, use the minus eyedropper.
¦
Note The Show Key mode and any color correction applied will be
temporarily deactivated in the Program Monitor when using an eyedropper.
Creating a Matrox secondary color correction
128
This allows you to see the original colors of your clip before any modifications
were made.
• Indicator Click this button to turn the indicator lines on or off.
• Handles Click this button to turn the handles for the indicator lines on or
off.
Creating a color pass effect
You can use the Matrox secondary color correction to create a color pass effect to
convert your clip to black and white, with the exception of one specified color.
This can be useful if you want to isolate a single color to make it prominent.
In the following example, the pink color of the girl’s shirt has been retained,
while the rest of the clip has been converted to black and white:
Pink shirt is isolated,
while the rest of clip is
grayscale.
° To perform a color pass effect:
1 Click the Auto Key eyedropper in the selective key graph and click and drag
anywhere on your clip to create a rectangular area containing the color you
want to isolate.
2 Under Proc Amps, set the Saturation to 0.
3 Select Invert Key.
If you have more than one object of the same color but you want to isolate only
one of those objects, you can apply a mask and use the Expand Outside Mask
option to isolate the area that contains the color you want to remain intact. For
example, if you have a clip that has two roses that are the same red and you
would like only one of them to remain red, you can do the following.
° To perform a color pass effect using the Expand Outside Mask option:
1 Click the auto key eyedropper in the selective key graph and click and drag
anywhere on your clip to create a rectangular area containing the color you
want to isolate.
2 Under Proc Amps set the Saturation to 0.
3 Select Invert Key.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
129
4 Apply a mask surrounding the colored object you want to remain intact (see
the next section, “Applying a mask to your Matrox effects).
5 Select Expand Outside Mask.
Overview of the Matrox chroma key effects
You can apply a Matrox chroma key or chroma key shadow effect to make certain
areas of a foreground image transparent based on a color in that image, so that an
underlying image can show through.
In the following example of a chroma key effect, our foreground image is a video
clip of a woman sitting in front of a green backdrop, and our underlying image is
a video clip of a sand dune:
+
Foreground image
Underlying image
By chroma keying on the particular shade of green in the backdrop of the
foreground image, the backdrop area becomes transparent and the corresponding
area of the underlying image shows through in the composite image as follows:
=
Result of chroma key
¡ Important The chroma key shadow effect includes controls for fine-tuning
shadows in your effect. It is best to use the chroma key shadow effect when you
are performing a chroma key without any additional effects. If you want to apply
Overview of the Matrox chroma key effects
130
additional effects to your chroma key, you will get more desirable results by
using the chroma key effect without shadow controls. For example, if you want to
apply an Adobe Motion effect to your chroma key, you should use the chroma
key effect and not the chroma key shadow effect.
Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow
effect
To set up a Matrox chroma key or chroma key shadow effect, click the triangle
next to Matrox Chroma Key/Matrox Chroma Key Shadow to expand the
property list:
• Graphical Provides a graphical representation of the chroma key controls
that you can use to select your key colors, and also lets you perform an auto
key.
$
Map Lets you select your key colors within a circular graph that
contains a color spectrum.
$
Plot Displays a plot of the colors present in your clip so that you can
select the particular colors on which you want to key.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
131
$
Show Key Click this button to display the matte used to create your key
effect. This enables you to further refine your key. For example, when you
display the matte, your key color (such as green) appears as black, and
opaque areas appear as white. If you notice some white spots that you
want to key, you can adjust the key controls until the undesired white
spots disappear.
$
Auto Key
Click this button to automatically key on the most common
color at the current frame in your clip (except gray).
For details on selecting key colors within the graph or performing an auto
key, see “Using the chroma key graph to modify key colors and perform an
auto key” on page 133.
¦
Note You must expand the Graphical property in order to see the indicator
when adjusting the chroma key controls.
• Hue Use this to rotate the indicator around the perimeter of the color
spectrum so that you can select different hues (colors) on which to key.
• Aperture Use this to widen or narrow the aperture of the indicator to
increase or decrease the range of colors on which you want to key.
• Saturation Use this to select colors that have a particular saturation value.
Pale colors have a low saturation value and are located at or near the center
of the spectrum. Vivid colors have a high saturation value and are located at
or near the perimeter of the spectrum. Because pale colors have low
saturation, you’ll find them more difficult to key on than the vivid colors.
• Saturation Threshold Use this to proportionally increase or decrease the
region outside of your saturation range. This controls how closely the
Saturation value must match the key color before a region becomes
transparent.
For example, after applying a chroma key effect to a foreground image that
includes dark areas or shadows that you want to preserve in your effect, you
may find that these areas have become semi-transparent. By adjusting the
Saturation Threshold , you can eliminate the key color from these dark
areas, so that they’ll become completely opaque.
• Softness Use this to soften the edges of your key by blending parts of
your foreground image with your underlying image. This makes certain
areas of your foreground image partially transparent instead of completely
transparent or opaque.
• Spill Removal Use this to remove the contamination (spill) that your key
color may leave on or around the edges of your foreground image. Spill is
usually caused by light reflecting from your solid color backdrop (key color)
onto your foreground image. Spill Removal replaces your key color from
the “spill areas” with the opposite color in the spectrum, which returns a
more natural look to these areas.
Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect
132
• Chroma Suppression Use this to remove any tint that your key color
imposes on your foreground image. For example, if your solid color
backdrop (key color) is green and you are using a person in your foreground
image, the person’s skin may have a green tint. You can adjust the Chroma
Suppression to replace the green tint with the opposite color in the
spectrum to return the person’s skin to a more natural-looking color.
¦
Note The following properties ( Luminance and Shadow Suppression)
are only available in the chroma key shadow effect.
• Luminance Use this to adjust the luminance of your shadow. Negative
values increase the brightness of the shadow, while positive values decrease
the brightness.
• Shadow Suppression Use this to make shadows in your clips less
apparent. A higher value indicates less shadow.
• Mask Allows you to apply a mask to your effect. For more information,
see “Applying a mask to your Matrox effects” on page 102.
• Transparent Outside Mask Select this option to apply transparency
outside the mask area. This allows you to define a mask area where you want
the keying to be performed, and show only your underlying image outside
the mask. For more information, see “Applying a mask to your Matrox
effects” on page 102.
• Invert Key Select this to invert the key selection, giving you the opposite
result of what you originally selected.
• Show Key as Output Select this to display the matte used to create your
key effect. This enables you to further refine your key. For example, when
you display the matte, your key color (such as green) appears as black, and
opaque areas appear as white. If you notice some white spots that you want
to key, you can adjust the key controls until the undesired white spots
disappear.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
133
Using the chroma key graph to modify key
colors and perform an auto key
To modify your key colors directly within the chroma key graph or perform an
auto key, click the triangle next to the Graphical property to expand it:
• Map This is the default view when you first expand the Graphical
property. You can drag the handles in the color spectrum to move the
indicator to different regions in the cube to adjust the Hue, Aperture,
Saturation , and Saturation Threshold.
3
2
1 0
3
4
0 Hue
1 Saturation 2 Saturation 3 Aperture
4 Luminance
Threshold
¦
Note This graph will contain a luminance spectrum only if you are creating a
chroma key shadow effect. You can drag the handle in the luminance spectrum to
adjust the Luminance.
• Plot Click this button to plot the colors and luminance values that are
present in the current frame of your clip. You can drag the handles in the
chroma plot graph to move the indicator to different regions in the graph to
adjust the Hue, Aperture, Saturation, and Saturation Threshold . The
luma plot histogram shows each luminance value present in your image as a
Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect
134
vertical line. A longer line indicates a higher amount of pixels in your image
of that line’s luminance value.
3
2
1 0
3
4
¦
Note The Plot graph will contain a luma plot histogram only if you are
creating a chroma key shadow effect. You can drag the handle in the luma plot
histogram to adjust the Luminance .
0 Hue
1 Saturation 2 Saturation 3 Aperture
4 Luminance
Threshold
• Show Key Click this button to display the matte used to create your key
effect. This enables you to further refine your key. For example, when you
display the matte, your key color (such as green) appears as black, and
opaque areas appear as white. If you notice some white spots that you want
to key, you can adjust the key controls until the undesired white spots
disappear.
• Auto Key Click this button to automatically key on the most common
color at the current frame (except gray). Selecting Auto Key affects values
for Hue, Aperture, Saturation, and Saturation Threshold . If your clip
consists of a uniform key color that is evenly lighted, Auto Key will usually
give you a good-quality chroma key. Alternately, you can use the eyedropper
to select a color on which you want to key.
eyedropper
You can use the eyedropper in two ways:
$
Click the eyedropper button and click on a color on which you want to
key.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
135
$
¦
Click the eyedropper button and click and drag anywhere on your clip to
select a rectangular area containing colors on which you want to key.
Note The Show Key mode and any chroma key applied will be temporarily
deactivated in the Program Monitor when using the auto key eyedropper. This
allows you to see the original colors of your clip before any modifications
were made.
• Indicator
• Handles
Click this button to turn the indicator on or off.
Click this button to turn the handles for the indicator on or off.
Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect
136
Overview of the Matrox luma key effect
You can apply a Matrox luma key to make certain areas of a foreground image
transparent based on the luminance in that image, so that an underlying image
can show through.
In the following example of a luma key effect, two video clips are combined to
produce the effect of two cowboys riding through fire. Our foreground image is a
video clip of a ring of fire against a black background, and our underlying image
is a video clip of two men riding horses:
+
Foreground image
Underlying image
By luma keying on the particular luminance (brightness) of the black areas in the
foreground clip, these areas become transparent and the corresponding areas of
the underlying image show through in the composite image as follows:
=
Result of luma key
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
137
Creating a luma key effect
To set up a Matrox luma key effect, click the triangle next to Matrox Luma Key
to expand the property list:
• Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes
when you adjust the property settings. You can adjust the luma key
properties directly in the graph to select the luminance values on which you
want to key. For more information, see “Using the luma key graph” on
page 138.
• Transparency Use this control to set the transparency level of your key
effect. Higher values indicate higher transparency. For example, a
Transparency value of 100 makes the keyed area in your foreground image
completely transparent, leaving the underlying image visible.
• Low Clip Use this to select the lower (darker) luminance values to be
keyed. A Low Clip setting of 0 represents black, and a setting of 255
represents white. Intermediate settings represent different shades of gray,
from very dark to very light gray.
• Low Gain Use this to set the range of luminance values you want to be
partially transparent based on the value set by the Low Clip control. As you
increase the Low Gain setting, more luminance values become partially
transparent to give you a softer-edged key.
A Low Gain setting of 100 provides the widest range for maximum
softness. Alternately, a gain setting of 0 creates a hard key where the
luminance values are either completely transparent or opaque. You can think
Creating a luma key effect
138
of the Low Gain control as defining a “Transparent to Opaque” range for
keying the dark areas of your foreground image.
• High Clip This control is similar to Low Clip, except you use it to select
the higher (brighter) luminance values to be keyed.
• High Gain This control is similar to Low Gain , except you use it to set the
range of luminance values you want to be partially transparent based on the
value set by the High Clip control. You can think of the High Gain control
as defining an “Opaque to Transparent” range for keying the lighter areas of
your foreground image.
The values you can select using the Low Clip and Low Gain controls are
dependent on the High Clip and High Gain controls, and vice versa. This
prevents the low and high controls from keying on the same luminance
values.
• Mask Allows you to apply a mask to your effect. For more information,
see “Applying a mask to your Matrox effects” on page 102.
• Transparent Outside Mask Select this option to apply transparency
outside the mask area. This allows you to define a mask area where you want
the keying to be performed, and show only your underlying image outside
the mask. For more information, see “Applying a mask to your Matrox
effects” on page 102.
• Invert Key Select this to invert the key selection, giving you the opposite
result of what you originally selected
• Show Key as Output Select this to display the matte used to create your
key effect. This enables you to further refine your key settings. For example,
when you display the matte, areas of your clip that are completely
transparent appear as black, and opaque areas appear as white. If you notice
some white spots that you want to key, you can adjust the key controls until
the undesired white spots disappear.
Using the luma key graph
The luma key graph contains a luminance spectrum and a luminance eyedropper.
You can drag the handles in the luminance spectrum to adjust the Transparency,
Low Clip , High Clip , Low Gain, and High Gain properties.
Eyedropper
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
139
You can select luminance values on which to key by adjusting the Low Clip and
High Clip handles, or you can use the luminance eyedropper to automatically
pick the luminance value you want to key on. The eyedropper can be used in two
ways:
• Click the eyedropper button and click on the color with the desired
luminance value in your clip.
• Click the eyedropper button and click and drag anywhere on your clip to
create a rectangular area containing the luminance values you want to select.
The selected luminance will be an average of the luminance values contained
within the rectangle.
¦
Note Any luma key displayed in the Program Monitor will be temporarily
deactivated when using the luminance eyedropper. This allows you to see the
colors of your clip before any modifications were made.
You can also adjust the softness of your key with the Low Gain, High Gain, and
Transparency handles. All these adjustments affect the shape and size of the
luminance selector as follows:
LOW CLIP
HIGH CLIP
TRANS
LOW GAIN
HIGH GAIN
• Plot Click this button to see the luminance spectrum with a plot that shows
each luminance value present in your image as a vertical line in the
histogram. A longer line indicates a higher amount of pixels in your image of
that line’s luminance value. You can drag the handles in the luma plot
spectrum to adjust the Transparency, Low Clip , High Clip, Low Gain , and
High Gain properties. Any adjustments made affect the shape and size of the
luminance selector in the Luma Plot.
Creating a luma key effect
140
Creating a wipe transition
The Matrox wipe transitions support standard dissolves, SMPTE wipes, and
organic wipes with soft edges and color borders.
° To set up a Matrox wipe transition:
Click the transition’s icon in your sequence, then click the Custom button in the
Effect Controls panel. This opens the Customize Matrox Wipes dialog box:
1 Under Wipe Pattern, click the Select Pattern button and choose a pattern
for your wipe.
2 If you would like to add a border to your wipe, select Enable under Border.
$
Width Lets you adjust the width of your border by dragging the slider
or entering a percentage in the text box.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
141
Click this button to select a color for your border.
$
Color
$
Balance Lets you adjust the prominence of the border between image A
and image B. For example, positive values make the border more
prominent in image B, while negative values make the border more
prominent in image A.
$
Reset
Click this button to restore the default Border values.
3 Use the controls under Softness to create a soft edge on the border of your
wipe.
$
Nonlinear softness This option is selected by default. You may find it
useful to clear this option when using certain wipe patterns. For example,
nonlinear softness often provides better results when creating SMPTE
wipes, while linear softness is usually preferable when creating organic
wipes.
$
Amount
$
Reset
Lets you adjust the amount of softness by dragging the slider
or entering a percentage in the text box. The higher the value, the less
sharp the edge of your border or wipe will become.
Click this button at any time to restore the default Softness
values.
4 Use the controls under Preview to preview your wipe transition on your
video monitor (the preview will not appear in the Program monitor):
$
Drag the slider beside the Play button to scrub through your transition.
$
Click the Play button or press the SPACEBAR to play back your transition.
Select Loop if you’d like the wipe to play back continuously until you
click Stop.
You can adjust the wipe settings as your transition is playing to immediately
see the result of your changes.
5 Use the controls under Presets to save and load your wipe transition
settings. You can also create default settings for your wipe transitions.
$
Allows you to save your organic wipe settings to a file for future
use. When you click the Save button, the Save As dialog box opens and
allows you to name your effect and save it as a Matrox wipe transition
(.mwt) file.
$
Load
$
Sets your current wipe settings as the default settings
for Matrox wipe transitions.
$
Restore Default Click this button to restore the default settings you
specified using the Set as Default button.
Save
Click this button to load a previously created .mwt file.
Set as Default
For more information about setting up transitions, see your Adobe Premiere Pro
documentation.
Creating a wipe transition
142
Using the Matrox chroma clamper effect
You can use the Matrox chroma clamper effect to ensure that when you’ve
applied effects that perform color space conversion on part of a clip, the clip’s
colors remain constant throughout. Some Adobe Premiere Pro native effects
perform color space conversions (YUV to RGB) that will clip RGB values to the
acceptable range of 0-255 per color component. The clipping, however, is usually
only required on clips that have very bright or highly saturated colors.
For example, if you split a clip that contains very bright or highly saturated colors
and apply an Adobe basic 3D effect to one portion of the clip, you may notice
minor color differences between the two halves on your video monitor. Applying
the Matrox chroma clamper effect to the portion of the clip that does not have the
Adobe effect ensures that colors remain constant throughout the clip.
Chapter 9, Setting Up Matrox Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro
10
Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing
Applications
This chapter explains how to
define various settings for
using Matrox MXO2 with Avid
editing applications. This
includes your playback and
capture settings.
144
Creating a new project on Matrox MXO2
You can create a new project for editing on Matrox MXO2 as explained in your
Avid documentation, with the following exceptions:
• Avid supports only standard raster dimensions for projects created on
Matrox MXO2 hardware. This means that when you create an HD project on
MXO2, the raster dimension will be set to 1280×720 for a 720p project, or
1920 ×1080 for a 1080i/p project. You can, however, still import, export, and
play back thin raster material in your HD project.
• Matrox MXO2 supports YCbCr video only. If you set your project’s color
space to RGB, your Avid editing application will convert your material to
YCbCr for output on Matrox MXO2. To capture video using your Matrox
MXO2 hardware, your project’s color space must be set to YCbCr.
Defining your playback settings
The Matrox Playback Settings dialog box provides settings that you can use to
configure your video and audio outputs on Matrox MXO2 for playing back
material in Avid editing applications. You can open the Matrox Playback
Settings dialog box using any of the following methods:
• Choose Tools > Hardware Setup.
• Click the Settings tab in the Project window, and then double-click Video
Output (this is the method explained in the step-by-step instructions).
• Click the Hardware tab in the Audio Project Settings dialog box, and
then click the Hardware Setup button (
).
¦
Note The Monitor Volume button (
) in the Timeline window can be used
as a shortcut to open the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, and therefore
does not work as described in your Avid documentation. For details on how to
adjust various audio output settings on MXO2, see “Specifying your audio output
settings” on page 154.
Specifying your video output settings
This section explains how to specify your video output settings for Matrox
MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE. For MXO2 Mini, see “Specifying your
video output settings (MXO2 Mini)” on page 148.
You can specify various settings to configure the main and secondary outputs
from your MXO2 system. Some of the settings are predetermined for you based
on your project’s video format. For a list of the supported video output formats,
see “Playback using Avid editing applications” on page 301.
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
145
° To specify your video output settings:
1 Click the Settings tab in the Project window, and then double-click Video
Output.
2 In the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, click the Video Output tab.
3 Under Main Output and Secondary Output, you can specify the settings
you want for your main and secondary outputs from MXO2. Depending on
your project’s video format, you may not be able to change some of the
settings.
Use this to select the video format you want for your outputs.
Be aware that the format you select may not be supported on all the
MXO2 outputs. For a list of the supported video output formats, see
“Playback using Avid editing applications” on page 301.
$
Format
$
Pulldown Method Depending on your project’s frame rate and the
current video output format, the pulldown method may be automatically
set to Standard 2:3.
$
Aspect Ratio Conversion
Use this to specify how you want your
video to be output when upscaling or downscaling:
Defining your playback settings
146
¦
•
16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture in letterbox
mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for
display on a standard 4:3 television screen.
•
4x3 Pillarbox Outputs the standard 4:3 picture in pillarbox mode by
adding black bars to the left and right sides of the picture for display on
a widescreen 16:9 television screen.
•
Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture as horizontally
compressed 4:3 video, which retains the picture’s full vertical
resolution for display on a widescreen television. To display the video
with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor, select the
16:9 display setting on the monitor.
•
Center Cut
•
Center Zoom
Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Outputs the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping
the top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen
16:9 television screen.
Note When aspect ratio conversion is applied to both the main and
secondary outputs, the same setting will be applied to both outputs.
4 Under Analog Output, you can specify your analog output format, NTSC
setup level, and output type.
$
Format Use this to specify whether you want the format for the analog
outputs to be the same as the main or secondary output.
$
Specifies the analog video output type. If you’re
outputting SD analog video, the output type will be set to All Available to
indicate that the output will be available on all the analog outputs. If
you’re outputting HD analog video, the output type will be set to
Component.
$
Setup (NTSC) Use this to select the setup level you want for your
NTSC analog video. This affects both the NTSC analog video input and
output.
$
Output Type
•
0 IRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE. You should select this option
only when working with a commercial DV device that uses the
Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE. For example, if the video
appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC
monitor, you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at
the correct brightness.
•
7.5 IRE
Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7.5 IRE.
YUV/RGB Select YUV or RGB - native to set the type of video signal
that is sent from the component output. For example, select RGB - native
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
147
if you connected the component output to a device that accepts an RGB
signal.
5 Under HDMI Output, you can specify your HDMI output format and type.
$
Format Use this to specify whether you want the format for your
HDMI output to be the same as the main or secondary output.
$
YUV/RGB Select the type of video signal that you want to be sent from
the HDMI output:
$
•
YUV Outputs YUV HDMI video. Select this only if you connected
the HDMI output to a device that accepts a YUV signal.
•
RGB - calibrated
•
RGB - native
Outputs adjusted RGB HDMI video using the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings for your HDMI
monitor or television. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor
and loading calibration settings using the Matrox HDMI Calibration
Utility, see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
Outputs native RGB HDMI video that does not apply
any calibration compensation. This is useful when you want to output
RGB HDMI video to a device other than an HDMI monitor or
television, such as an HDMI recorder to perform an export to tape.
3D Viewing Mode Select the 3D signal type that you want to be sent
from the HDMI output to your 3D monitor (this feature may not be
supported on some 3D monitors):
Select this if you’re not outputting 3D video, or to disable
3D video output. You can still monitor 3D video, but you must select
the correct viewing mode on your 3D monitor manually.
•
Disabled
•
Side-by-side
•
Over/Under
Outputs horizontally compressed side-by-side 3D
video (also referred to as side-by-side horizontal).
Outputs over/under 3D video (also referred to as top
bottom).
¡ Important If your project’s Stereoscopic setting is anything other than
Side by side , Over/Under, or Full, make sure that you set the 3D Viewing
Mode to Disabled. For example, if your project’s Stereoscopic setting is
Off or Leading Eye, you must disable the 3D video output in order to
properly view the HDMI output.
6 Under SDI Output, specify whether you want the format for your SDI
output to be the same as the main or secondary output.
7 Under Advanced, you can specify advanced video output settings.
$
Use this slider to advance or delay your analog
video output’s subcarrier phase with respect to the horizontal sync of the
genlock source (for composite video only).
Analog SC/H Phase
Defining your playback settings
148
$
¦
Select Allow Super White
to allow the highest luminance level of your video output to exceed the
standard maximum white level. Select Allow Super Black to allow the
lowest luminance level of your video output to fall below the standard
black level. These options apply to all video outputs.
Allow Super White/Allow Super Black
Note Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing
your final video production for broadcast.
8 Click OK to save your settings.
Specifying your video output settings (MXO2
Mini)
You can specify various settings to configure your main analog output and
secondary HDMI output from the MXO2 Mini. Some of the settings are
predetermined for you based on your project’s video format. For a list of the
supported video output formats, see “Playback using Avid editing applications”
on page 301.
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
149
° To specify your video output settings:
1 Click the Settings tab in the Project window, and then double-click Video
Output.
2 In the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, click the Video Output tab.
3 Under Priority Output (never blanked), select either Analog or HDMI to
indicate whether you want the analog or HDMI output to have priority (never
be blanked) when MXO2 Mini needs to blank either the main or secondary
output to perform additional scaling on the video output. Additional scaling
is needed when your main and secondary output formats don’t match and the
video quality for playback is set to anything other than Full Quality. For
example, if you select Analog as your priority output, then the secondary
HDMI output will be blanked whenever MXO2 Mini needs to perform
additional scaling on the video output.
4 Under Analog Output (Main), you can specify the settings you want for
your main analog output from MXO2 Mini. Under HDMI Output
(Secondary) you can specify the settings you want for your secondary
HDMI output. Depending on your project’s video format, you may not be
able to change some of the settings.
Defining your playback settings
150
Use this to select the video format you want for your outputs.
For a list of the supported video output formats, see “Playback using Avid
editing applications” on page 301.
$
Format
$
Pulldown Method Depending on your project’s frame rate and the
current video output format, the pulldown method may be automatically
set to Standard 2:3.
$
Setup (NTSC) Use this to select the setup level you want for your
NTSC analog video. This affects both the NTSC analog video input and
output.
$
$
•
0 IRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE. You should select this option
only when working with a commercial DV device that uses the
Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE. For example, if the video
appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC
monitor, you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at
the correct brightness.
•
7.5 IRE
Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7.5 IRE.
Use this to specify how you want your
video to be output when upscaling or downscaling:
Aspect Ratio Conversion
•
16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture in letterbox
mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for
display on a standard 4:3 television screen.
•
4x3 Pillarbox Outputs the standard 4:3 picture in pillarbox mode by
adding black bars to the left and right sides of the picture for display on
a widescreen 16:9 television screen.
•
Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture as horizontally
compressed 4:3 video, which retains the picture’s full vertical
resolution for display on a widescreen television. To display the video
with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor, select the
16:9 display setting on the monitor.
•
Center Cut
•
Center Zoom
Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Outputs the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping
the top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen
16:9 television screen.
Output Type (for analog output) For your main analog output, you can
select Component, or Composite & S-Video if you’re outputting SD
analog video. If you’re outputting HD analog video, the output type will
be set to Component (and the composite and S-Video outputs will be
invalid).
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
151
$
YUV/RGB (for analog output) Select YUV or RGB - native to set the
type of video signal that is sent from the component output. For example,
select RGB - native if you connected the component output to a device
that accepts an RGB signal.
$
YUV/RGB (for HDMI output) Select the type of video signal that you
want to be sent from the HDMI output:
$
•
YUV Outputs YUV HDMI video. Select this only if you connected
the HDMI output to a device that accepts a YUV signal.
•
RGB - calibrated
•
RGB - native
Outputs adjusted RGB HDMI video using the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings for your HDMI
monitor or television. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor
and loading calibration settings using the Matrox HDMI Calibration
Utility, see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
Outputs native RGB HDMI video that does not apply
any calibration compensation. This is useful when you want to output
RGB HDMI video to a device other than an HDMI monitor or
television, such as an HDMI recorder to perform an export to tape.
3D Viewing Mode Select the 3D signal type that you want to be sent
from the HDMI output to your 3D monitor (this feature may not be
supported on some 3D monitors):
Select this if you’re not outputting 3D video, or to disable
3D video output. You can still monitor 3D video, but you must select
the correct viewing mode on your 3D monitor manually.
•
Disabled
•
Side-by-side
•
Over/Under
Outputs horizontally compressed side-by-side 3D
video (also referred to as side-by-side horizontal).
Outputs over/under 3D video (also referred to as top
bottom).
¡ Important If your project’s Stereoscopic setting is anything other than
Side by side , Over/Under, or Full, make sure that you set the 3D Viewing
Mode to Disabled. For example, if your project’s Stereoscopic setting is
Off or Leading Eye, you must disable the 3D video output in order to
properly view the HDMI output.
5 Under Advanced, select Allow Super White to allow the highest
luminance level of your video output to exceed the standard maximum white
level. Select Allow Super Black to allow the lowest luminance level of your
video output to fall below the standard black level. These options apply to
both the main analog output and secondary HDMI output.
¦
Note Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing
your final video production for broadcast.
6 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your playback settings
152
Specifying your genlock settings
¦
Note
This section does not apply to Matrox MXO2 Mini.
You can select the source to which you want to genlock all devices connected to
your MXO2 system, as well as adjust the timing settings for all video outputs
from MXO2. For examples of how to connect an external sync source to your
system, see “Typical Matrox MXO2 connections” on page 19, “Typical Matrox
MXO2 Rack connections” on page 28, and “Typical Matrox MXO2 LE
connections” on page 37.
¦
Note These genlock settings are used during playback only. During capture,
MXO2 genlocks to your selected video input source.
° To specify your genlock settings:
1 Click the Settings tab in the Project window, and then double-click Video
Output.
2 In the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box, click the Genlock tab.
3 Under Genlock Source, select one of the following:
$
Internal Genlock to MXO2’s internal reference signal. Select this
option only if you don’t have an external sync generator or other reliable
external video sync source.
$
Black Burst Broadcast Quality Genlock to an external analog sync
source connected to the reference (REF) input on MXO2. This must be a
stable sync source, such as an external sync generator (bi-level black burst
for SD or tri-level sync for HD), or a source VTR that has a built-in TBC.
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
153
$
SDI , Composite, Component, S-Video, and HDMI Input Genlock to
your SDI, composite, component, S-Video, or HDMI video source
connected to the video input on MXO2.
Remarks
•
The status of your genlock source will be displayed, such as Locked or
Not Locked , to indicate whether or not MXO2 is presently locked to
your selected genlock source. When you change the genlock source,
distorted video and silent audio will be output until MXO2 locks to the
new genlock source.
•
If MXO2 is unable to lock to your genlock source, it will automatically
lock to the internal reference. However, if MXO2 is unable to do this,
you’ll need to manually set the genlock to Internal or select a different
genlock source.
4 Under Genlock Video Format, select your external genlock source’s video
format. When the genlock source is set to Internal, the genlock video format
is set to your main video output format.
¡ Important To ensure good output results, make sure that your genlock
source’s video format is compatible with the MXO2 video output format.
5 Under Advanced Settings, drag the Horizontal Delay and Vertical Delay
sliders to adjust the horizontal and vertical timing of your video outputs with
respect to your genlock source. This lets you compensate for cable delays
within your system.
6 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your playback settings
154
Specifying your audio output settings
The simultaneous audio outputs on your Matrox MXO2 hardware allow you to
send your audio to a variety of devices at the same time. Your Avid editing
application and Matrox provide various settings to configure your audio output
on MXO2.
° To specify your audio output settings:
1 Click the Settings tab in the Project window, and then double-click Audio
Project.
2 In the Audio Project Settings dialog box, click the Output tab and specify
your desired audio output settings as explained in your Avid documentation.
To map tracks directly to audio output channels on your Matrox hardware,
click the Mix Mode Selection button to select Direct or Direct, surround
tracks in SMPTE order, depending on the version of your Avid editing
application. You can then select an output channel on MXO2 for each audio
track in your sequence.
Remarks
$
For surround sound HDMI audio output, Matrox MXO2 supports the 5.1
and 7.1 SMPTE settings only (and the Direct SMPTE setting, if
available).
$
Matrox MXO2 supports the Audio tool so that you can monitor the global
output level of your sequence. If needed, you can use the Output Gain
(master attenuator) slider to adjust the overall output volume for all tracks.
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
155
3 Click the Hardware tab in the Audio Project Settings dialog box, and
then click the Hardware Setup button (
).
4 Under Analog Audio Volume, drag the sliders to adjust the volume of your
analog audio output. By default, the sliders are locked so that they move
together. To move each slider independently, click the lock button (
) to
disable it.
5 Under SDI Audio Output Format, select the bit depth you want for your
embedded SDI audio output (20-bit or 24-bit). This setting is not available
on MXO2 Mini.
6 Under HDMI Audio Output, select Output only two audio channels if
you want to output two audio channels from the MXO2 HDMI output,
instead of eight channels. This option is especially useful for HDMI
monitors that don’t accept more than two audio channels.
7 Select Use system sound card if you want to use your system’s sound card
to output audio played back from your sequence. Make sure this option is
cleared if you want audio to be output from your MXO2 system (this ensures
accurate A/V sync during playback).
8 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your playback settings
156
Defining your capture settings
The Matrox Capture Settings dialog box provides settings that allow you to
capture material from any of your MXO2 system’s video and audio inputs. The
settings available are based on your project’s video format and your input source
(video is always captured to your project’s video format). For information about
the supported capture formats, see Appendix C, “Matrox MXO2 Supported Input
and Capture Formats.” For a list of the supported video output formats for
monitoring the video that you’re capturing, see “Supported video output formats
for monitoring” on page 307.
To capture video and audio on Matrox MXO2, make sure that your video input
and audio input sources in the Capture tool are set to Matrox. For details on
how to capture material using your Avid editing application, see your Avid
documentation.
If you want to capture material using RS-422 device control, you can connect the
RS-422 connector on Matrox MXO2, MXO2 Rack, or MXO2 LE to the RS-422
serial device control port on your source device (see “MXO2 RS-422 serial
connection” on page 18, “MXO2 Rack RS-422 serial connection” on page 27, or
“MXO2 LE RS-422 serial connection” on page 36). On Matrox MXO2 Mini,
you must use a suitable adapter to connect the serial device control port on your
source device or recorder to your computer. For a list of supported device control
adapters, see the Matrox MXO2 Support section of our website at
www.matrox.com/video/support.When configuring your deck for RS-422 device
control, the RS-422 connector on your MXO2 hardware is usually identified as
the COM3 port.
° To specify your capture settings:
1 Do one of the following:
$
Click the Settings tab in the Project window, and then double-click
Video Input.
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
157
$
In the Capture tool, click the Hardware Setup button (
).
¡ Important In order to perform a capture, make sure that Audio Punch-in
mode is not selected. This mode is used only for recording a voice-over as
explained in “Adding a voice-over to your sequence” on page 160.
2 Under Input Type, select the type of equipment you’re using for capture:
¦
Select this if your source device is
broadcast-quality. This setting provides the best capture results for most
devices.
$
Broadcast-quality Source
$
Consumer-quality Source Select this if you’re having problems
capturing video because your source device doesn’t meet
broadcast-quality standards. For example, the capture may be interrupted
when you try to capture from certain composite and S-Video devices,
especially from low-quality VCRs. If this happens, selecting
Consumer-quality Source will allow the video to be captured, but you
may experience dropped frames during the capture.
Note For any change to the input type to take effect, you must restart your
Avid editing application and open your project again.
Defining your capture settings
158
3 Under Video Input Source, select the type of video you want to capture.
For example, to capture material from your composite source, select
Composite. The available video input sources depend on your project’s
video format.
4 Under Video Input Format, select the video format that matches your
source video. If required, your source video will be scaled during capture to
match your project’s video format. The formats available depend on your
selected input source. For information about the supported capture formats,
see Appendix C, “Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture Formats.”
5 Under Input Aspect Ratio, select the aspect ratio of your SD source video
(available only when capturing SD video in an HD project). For example, to
capture SD video that was recorded using the standard TV screen format,
select 4:3. To capture SD video that was recorded using the widescreen 16:9
format, select 16:9.
6 Under Aspect Ratio Conversion, specify the type of aspect ratio
conversion that you want to be applied to your captured video (used when
upscaling or downscaling video during capture):
$
16x9 Letterbox Captures the widescreen 16:9 picture as letterbox
video by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for display
on a standard 4:3 television screen.
$
4x3 Pillarbox Captures the standard 4:3 picture as pillarbox video by
adding black bars at the left and right sides of the picture for display on a
widescreen 16:9 television screen.
$
Center Cut
$
Center Zoom
$
None No aspect ratio conversion is applied. If your project and source
video have different aspect ratios, the video will be captured as
horizontally or vertically compressed (anamorphic) video.
Captures the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Captures the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping the
top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen 16:9
television screen.
7 If you’re working in a 1080p project, under Video Output Format, select
the format (p or PsF) that you want for previewing your captured video. For
example, if you’re capturing to 1080p @ 25 fps, you can choose to output
1080p or 1080PsF @ 25 fps video for preview.
8 Under Audio Input Source, select your audio source. For example, if you
want to capture the embedded audio of your HDMI source, select HDMI
(embedded audio). Your audio input source may be set for you based on
your selected video input source.
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
159
¦
Note When capturing HDMI embedded audio, only uncompressed
embedded audio is supported.
9 Select Use Automatic Gain Control (AGC) if you want the gain of your
composite or S-Video input signal to be adjusted automatically to
compensate for very bright or dark images. This improves the brightness or
contrast of your picture.
10 Click OK to save your settings.
Remarks
• To capture video on Matrox MXO2, your project’s color space must be set to
YCbCr.
• Matrox MXO2 supports the Audio tool so that you can monitor and adjust
your audio input levels for capture.
• Capture on Matrox MXO2 is not supported for a 24p NTSC, 24pPAL, or
720p/29.97 project.
• When Matrox MXO2 is outputting video for previewing your captured
video, attempting to open the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box will
stop the video preview and the Capture tool will lose the focus. However,
the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box will not open unless you attempt
to open it a second time.
Defining your capture settings
160
Adding a voice-over to your sequence
Matrox MXO2 supports the Audio Punch-In tool, which allows you to record
audio directly into the Timeline to add voice-over narration, such as to add
commentary to newsreels and documentaries.
¦
Note
The Audio Punch-In tool supports recording to mono tracks only.
Connection and setup
1 Connect the microphone to the audio input on your source device and
connect the audio output (analog or AES/EBU) from the source device to the
corresponding audio input on your MXO2 hardware.
2 Click the Settings tab in the Project window, and then double-click Video
Input.
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
161
3 Select Audio Punch-in mode and click Configure.
4 From the Input Source list, select the audio source type corresponding to
the device to which the microphone is connected.
5 The audio input channels are set to Channel 1-2. On MXO2 Rack, make
sure that your XLR or AES/EBU audio input source is connected to the
channel 1/2 connector(s) only.
6 Click OK to save your settings, and then click OK to close the Matrox
Capture Settings dialog box.
¡ Important When you’ve finished recording your voice-over, you’ll need to
clear Audio Punch-in mode before performing a capture as explained in
“Defining your capture settings” on page 156.
Recording your voice-over
You use the Audio Punch-In tool to record your voice-over. The following steps
provide guidelines for recording a voice-over. For details on using the Audio
Punch-In tool, see your Avid documentation.
Adding a voice-over to your sequence
162
1 With a sequence loaded in the Timeline, choose Tools > Audio Punch-In.
Stop
button
Record button
Punch-in
monitoring is
disabled
Audio tool button
2 Make sure that the Input Source is set to Matrox.
3 Select the input channels that you want to record (CH1 and/or CH2 ), and
select the corresponding tracks on which you want to record. If you select an
existing track, you can replace all or part of the audio on the track with your
voice-over.
4 Click the Audio tool button (
), and use the controls and meters in the
Audio tool to test the audio input levels while speaking into the microphone.
If needed, adjust the audio level on your source device so that the input
levels are sufficiently high but not clipping.
5 Set In and Out points to specify the section of the Timeline to which you
want to add your voice-over, and specify preroll and postroll values if
desired.
6 When you’re ready to start the voice-over, click the Record button (
7 Click the Stop button (
).
) to stop the recording. Your voice-over will be
added as an audio clip on the Timeline.
¦
Note During recording, your voice-over will not be output to your Matrox
MXO2 hardware, and audio punch-in monitoring is not supported.
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
163
Exporting your sequence to tape
You can record your sequence onto tape using device control or manually as
explained in your Avid documentation. Before exporting to tape, set your desired
playback settings as explained in “Defining your playback settings” on page 144.
For a list of the supported video output formats, see “Playback using Avid editing
applications” on page 301.
To export to tape without device control, simply play back your sequence and
record the output from any of the available outputs on your MXO2 system. If
your recorder supports RS-422 device control, you can connect the RS-422
connector on Matrox MXO2, MXO2 Rack, or MXO2 LE to the RS-422 serial
device control port on your recorder (see “MXO2 RS-422 serial connection” on
page 18, “MXO2 Rack RS-422 serial connection” on page 27, or “MXO2 LE
RS-422 serial connection” on page 36). On Matrox MXO2 Mini, you must use a
suitable adapter to connect the serial device control port on your source device or
recorder to your computer. For a list of supported device control adapters, see the
Matrox MXO2 Support section of our website at
www.matrox.com/video/support. When configuring your deck for RS-422 device
control, the RS-422 connector on your MXO2 hardware is usually identified as
the COM3 port.
To record the output from your MXO2 system using device control with the
Digital Cut tool, make sure that the Output Mode is set to Real-Time. For
details on using the Digital Cut tool, see your Avid documentation.
¡ Important If you want to downconvert a 720p/23.976, 1080p/23.976, or
1080p24 sequence to SD to record a digital cut, you must change your project’s
format (project type) to SD. For example, to downconvert a 720p/23.976 or
1080p/23.976 sequence to NTSC to record a digital cut, you must change the
project type to 23.976p NTSC. You can then select the output format that you
want in the Digital Cut tool.
Exporting your sequence to tape
164
Your notes
Chapter 10, Using Matrox MXO2 with Avid Editing Applications
11
Using Matrox A/V Tools
This chapter explains how to
use Matrox A/V Tools to
capture clips, grab
single-frame images, and play
back clips in a clip list.
166
About Matrox A/V Tools
Matrox A/V Tools is an application that allows you to capture and play back
clips. With A/V Tools, you can:
• Capture analog, SDI 1, or HDMI video from your camera or VTR into .avi
files on your computer.
• Use onscreen transport controls to navigate quickly and easily through clips
on disk.
• Grab single-frame images and save them as .tga files, such as to create photo
montages.
• Change the order of clips in your clip list by simply dragging and dropping
clips into the sequence you want.
Starting Matrox A/V Tools
1 Choose Start > Programs > Matrox Mtx.utils > Matrox AV Tools.
2 The Options dialog box pops up every time A/V Tools starts. For
information about the settings in the Options dialog box, see “Defining your
A/V Tools options” on page 170. To close the Options dialog box and start
working with A/V Tools, click OK.
1
SDI is not supported on Matrox MXO2 Mini.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
167
Using the Matrox A/V Tools interface
Once you’ve specified your A/V Tools options, a dialog box similar to the
following appears:
0
1
2
4
8
3
5
6
7
Here’s a brief description of the A/V Tools dialog box:
0 New tab
Use this tab to capture new clips to add to your clip list. See
“Capturing clips” on page 191.
1 Edit tab
Use this tab to edit clips, and update clip information. For details,
see “Editing clips” on page 192.
2 Preview Window
Allows you to preview video from your camera, VTR,
or clips on disk. The preview is also displayed on your video monitor.
3 CAM and Disk buttons
These buttons let you switch between the
following modes:
Using the Matrox A/V Tools interface
168
$
CAM mode lets you capture live video from your camera, or video on
tape.
$
Disk mode lets you play back captured clips in your clip list.
4 Clip identification area
This section contains several items to help you
identify your clips.
$
Tape ID
Displays the name that you’ve assigned to the tape in your
VTR.
$
Clip ID Displays the base name for your new clips when using the New
tab, or the name of the currently selected clip when using the Edit tab. For
details, see “How A/V Tools assigns clip names” on page 191.
$
Comment
Lets you enter comments that help you distinguish between
clips in your clip list.
5 Transport controls
A set of common transport controls that lets you
easily navigate through clips on disk. For more information, see “Navigating
through clips with the transport controls” on page 168.
6 Clip list
A numbered list of clips and their properties. As you capture clips
in A/V Tools, your clips are automatically added to the clip list. The clip list
can be docked to the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box or float freely as a
resizable window. For more information on using the clip list, see “Working
with the clip list” on page 193.
7 Status bar
Displays information about the operation you’re currently
performing in A/V Tools, such as clip information and if frames are dropped
during a capture.
8 Float/dock clip list button
This button lets you dock the clip list to the
Matrox A/V Tools dialog box, or detach the clip list so that you can move
and resize it. For more information, see “Detaching and resizing the clip list”
on page 195.
Using the A/V Tools pop-up menu
When you right-click anywhere in the clip list, a pop-up menu appears containing
commands for working with A/V Tools. All commands present in the A/V Tools
pop-up menu are described in this chapter.
Navigating through clips with the transport
controls
A/V Tools includes a common set of transport controls for navigating through
clips on your hard drive when working in Disk mode.
¦
Note
The transport controls are disabled in CAM mode.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
169
The transport controls are much like those on your VTR:
Loop
button
Positioner
Most of these controls perform standard transport functions, but some can be
used for special tasks:
• Scrub Drag the slider on the Positioner to scrub through any clip in your
clip list.
• Cue to In or Out point on disk Click the Rewind or Fast Forward
button to cue to the beginning or end of a clip on disk.
• View frame-by-frame
button.
Click the Frame Reverse or Frame Advance
• Play a clip on disk repeatedly
Play button.
Click the Loop button, then click the
Keyboard Shortcuts
Disk mode
Play
Rewind
Fast Forward
Frame Advance
Frame Reverse
Stop
Loop
K
B
Z
X
’ (apostrophe)
; (semicolon)
V
A
Using the Matrox A/V Tools interface
170
Changing the time code display
A value in a time code field can be displayed as a time code or a specific number
of frames. The first time you run A/V Tools, the fields display time codes. To
toggle between the two formats, press CTRL+SHIFT while the insertion point
(flashing vertical bar) is in any time code field.
For example, when working with NTSC clips, you could change a value of 24:04
(24 seconds, 4 frames) to 724 frames by pressing CTRL+SHIFT, and then switch
back to time codes again by pressing CTRL+SHIFT.
The time code format of your tape is indicated by the separator between the
seconds and frames digits in the time code fields as follows:
• A colon ( : ) indicates non-drop frame.
• A semicolon ( ; ) indicates drop frame.
Defining your A/V Tools options
Before capturing or playing back clips with A/V Tools, you need to specify
various options, such as your editing video format and your capture and playback
settings.
° To define your options for A/V Tools:
1 Click the Options button.
¦
Note The Options dialog box automatically pops up every time A/V Tools
starts.
2 Under Capture Folder, specify the folder where you want to store your
captured clips. For more information, see “Selecting your capture folder” on
page 172.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
171
3 Under Editing Video Format, select the video format and aspect ratio you
want for your clips. For example, select NTSC and 4:3 if you want to capture
and play back NTSC clips with a standard 4:3 aspect ratio.
Remarks
$
When you select an editing video format, many of the playback and
capture settings are predetermined for you. All clips are captured to your
selected video format, and clips added to the clip list must have the same
frame size and frame rate. You can mix interlaced and progressive clips
that have the same frame size and frame rate in a clip list.
$
Once your editing video format has been defined, it cannot be changed.
You can run multiple instances of A/V Tools if you want to capture or
play back clips with a different video format.
$
Your editing video format will automatically change if you load a .dvl file
with a different format. For more information see, “Saving and loading a
clip list” on page 193.
4 Under Display Time Code As, select the format that you want for
displaying time codes in A/V Tools (applicable only if you’re using a video
format that has a frame rate of 29.97 or 59.94). The format used is indicated
by the separator between the seconds and frames digits in the time code
fields as follows:
$
A colon ( : ) indicates non-drop frame.
$
A semicolon ( ; ) indicates drop frame.
5 Click the Playback Settings button to specify your playback settings (see
“Defining your playback settings” on page 172).
6 Click the Capture Settings button to specify your capture settings (see
“Defining your capture settings” on page 184). If capture is not supported for
your selected editing video format, a message will be displayed to indicate
that it is not supported. For information about the supported capture formats,
see Appendix C, “Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture Formats.”
7 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your A/V Tools options
172
Selecting your capture folder
You can select the folder where you want A/V Tools to store your captured clips
by typing the drive and folder name directly into the Capture Folder box, or by
using the Browse button.
To ensure the best capture and playback performance of your clips, save them on
one of your A/V drives.
A/V Tools will save your video and audio clips in a subfolder with the same
name as the Tape ID. For example, if you selected D:\Matrox AV Tools Capture
as your capture folder, all video and audio clips from tape “MyTape” will be
saved in D:\Matrox AV Tools Capture\MyTape.
Defining your playback settings
The Matrox Playback Settings dialog box has several pages that you can use to
specify various settings for working with A/V Tools. When you select your
editing video format in the Options dialog box, many settings are optimized for
you.
Specifying your general settings
To specify your general settings for playback in A/V Tools:
1 Click the Options button in the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box.
2 Click the Playback Settings button. This displays the Matrox Playback
Settings dialog box.
¦
Note You can also access the Matrox Playback Settings dialog box by
right-clicking the clip list and selecting Playback Settings.
3 Click the General tab.
4 Under Scrubbing Mode, select Frame, 1st Field, or 2nd Field to indicate
whether you want to display frames or only one field when you scrub your
clips in the clip list using the transport controls. For example, you may want
to scrub the first or second field to eliminate the flickering that can be seen in
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
173
your picture when you pause while scrubbing interlaced video. Scrubbing
fields can also be used to check for any dropped fields that may have
occurred in your video during a telecine process.
¦
Note When using a progressive editing video format, the scrubbing mode
is set to Frame.
5 Under Video Processing Format, select either 8-bit or 10-bit to indicate
the bit depth you want to use for processing video. This option is
automatically set to 8-bit when using a 1440 ×1080i/p editing video format.
¦
Note If you select a 10-bit video processing format, you’ll be able to capture
clips to Matrox 10-bit uncompressed format only.
6 Use the Preroll/Postroll frames for audio scrubbing sliders to specify the
number of audio frames you want to be played before/after the location of
the positioner when you scrub a clip. This lets you hear more audio to help
you better identify sounds when scrubbing. For example, if you set the
number of preroll frames for audio scrubbing to 3, you will hear the audio
for the current frame and three previous frames when you scrub a frame in a
clip.
¦
Note To return a slider to it’s default setting, click its D button. This button
is available for all sliders in the Matrox dialog boxes.
7 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your A/V Tools options
174
Specifying your video output settings
This section explains how to specify your video output settings for Matrox
MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE. For MXO2 Mini, see “Specifying your
video output settings (MXO2 Mini)” on page 178.
You can specify various settings to configure the main and secondary outputs
from your MXO2 system. Some of the settings are predetermined for you based
on your editing video format. For a list of the supported video output formats, see
“Playback using Matrox A/V Tools and Matrox WYSIWYG” on page 303.
° To specify your video output settings:
1 Click the Options button in the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box.
2 Click the Playback Settings button. This displays the Playback Settings
dialog box.
3 Click the Video Output tab.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
175
4 Under Main Output and Secondary Output, you can specify the settings
you want for your main and secondary outputs from MXO2. Depending on
the editing video format you chose in the Options dialog box, you may not
be able to change some of the settings.
¦
Use this to select the video format you want for your outputs.
Be aware that the format you select may not be supported on all the
MXO2 outputs. For a list of the supported formats, see “Playback using
Matrox A/V Tools and Matrox WYSIWYG” on page 303.
$
Format
$
Pulldown Method If this setting is available, select the pulldown
method you want to be applied to your video output (Standard 2:3 or
Advanced 2:3:3:2 ). Depending on your editing video format’s frame
rate and the current video output format, a pulldown method may
automatically be selected.
$
Aspect Ratio Conversion
Use this to specify how you want your
video to be output when upscaling or downscaling:
•
16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture in letterbox
mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for
display on a standard 4:3 television screen.
•
4x3 Pillarbox Outputs the standard 4:3 picture in pillarbox mode by
adding black bars to the left and right sides of the picture for display on
a widescreen 16:9 television screen.
•
Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture as horizontally
compressed 4:3 video, which retains the picture’s full vertical
resolution for display on a widescreen television. To display the video
with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor, select the
16:9 display setting on the monitor.
•
Center Cut
•
Center Zoom
Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Outputs the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping
the top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen
16:9 television screen.
Note When aspect ratio conversion is applied to both the main and
secondary outputs, the same setting will be applied to both outputs.
5 Under Analog Output, you can specify your analog output format, NTSC
setup level, and output type:
$
Format Use this to specify whether you want the format for the analog
outputs to be the same as the main or secondary output.
$
Output Type
Specifies the analog video output type. If you’re
outputting SD analog video, the output type will be set to All Available to
Defining your A/V Tools options
176
indicate that the output will be available on all the analog outputs. If
you’re outputting HD analog video, the output type will be set to
Component.
$
$
Setup (NTSC) Use this to select the setup level you want for your
NTSC analog video. This affects both the NTSC analog video input and
output.
•
0 IRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE. You should select this option
only when working with a commercial DV device that uses the
Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE. For example, if the video
appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC
monitor, you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at
the correct brightness.
•
7.5 IRE
Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7.5 IRE.
Select YUV or RGB to set the type of video signal that is
sent from the component output. For example, select RGB if you
connected the component output to a device that accepts an RGB signal.
YUV/RGB
6 Under HDMI Output, you can specify your HDMI output format and type.
$
Format Use this to specify whether you want the format for your
HDMI output to be the same as the main or secondary output.
$
YUV/RGB Select the type of video signal that you want to be sent from
the HDMI output:
$
•
YUV Outputs YUV HDMI video. Select this only if you connected
the HDMI output to a device that accepts a YUV signal.
•
RGB - calibrated
•
RGB - native
Outputs adjusted RGB HDMI video using the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings for your HDMI
monitor or television. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor
and loading calibration settings using the Matrox HDMI Calibration
Utility, see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
Outputs native RGB HDMI video that does not apply
any calibration compensation. This is useful when you want to output
RGB HDMI video to a device other than an HDMI monitor or
television, such as an HDMI recorder to perform an export to tape.
3D Viewing Mode Select the 3D signal type that you want to be sent
from the HDMI output to your 3D monitor:
Select this if you’re not outputting 3D video, or to disable
3D video output. You can still monitor 3D video, but you must select
the correct viewing mode on your 3D monitor manually.
•
Disabled
•
Side-by-side
Outputs horizontally compressed side-by-side 3D
video (also referred to as side-by-side horizontal).
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
177
•
Over/Under
Outputs over/under 3D video (also referred to as top
bottom).
¦
Note
This feature may not be supported on some 3D monitors.
7 Under SDI Output, specify whether you want the format for your SDI
output to be the same as the main or secondary output.
8 Under Advanced, you can specify advanced video output settings.
$
¦
Note This setting is unavailable until a clip is added to the clip list and you
click the Disk button.
$
¦
Use this slider to advance or delay your analog
video output’s subcarrier phase with respect to the horizontal sync of the
genlock source (for composite video only).
Analog SC/H Phase
Select Allow Super White
to allow the highest luminance level of your video output to exceed the
standard maximum white level. Select Allow Super Black to allow the
lowest luminance level of your video output to fall below the standard
black level. These options apply to all video outputs.
Allow Super White/Allow Super Black
Note Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing
your final video production for broadcast.
9 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your A/V Tools options
178
Specifying your video output settings (MXO2 Mini)
You can specify various settings to configure your main analog output and
secondary HDMI output from the MXO2 Mini. Some of the settings are
predetermined for you based on your editing video format. For a list of the
supported video output formats, see “Playback using Matrox A/V Tools and
Matrox WYSIWYG” on page 303.
° To specify your video output settings:
1 Click the Options button in the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box.
2 Click the Playback Settings button. This displays the Matrox Playback
Settings dialog box.
3 Click the Video Output tab.
4 Under Analog Output (Main), you can specify the settings you want for
your analog output from MXO2 Mini. Under HDMI Output (Secondary)
you can specify the settings you want for your secondary HDMI output.
Depending on the editing video format you chose in the Options dialog box,
you may not be able to change some of the settings.
$
Use this to select the video format you want for your outputs.
For a list of the supported formats, see “Playback using Matrox A/V Tools
and Matrox WYSIWYG” on page 303.
Format
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
179
$
Pulldown Method If this setting is available, select the pulldown
method you want to be applied to your video output (Standard 2:3 or
Advanced 2:3:3:2 ). Depending on your editing video format’s frame
rate and the current video output format, a pulldown method may
automatically be selected.
$
Setup (NTSC) Use this to select the setup level you want for your
NTSC analog video. This affects both the NTSC analog video input and
output.
$
•
0 IRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE. You should select this option
only when working with a commercial DV device that uses the
Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE. For example, if the video
appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC
monitor, you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at
the correct brightness.
•
7.5 IRE
Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7.5 IRE.
Use this to specify how you want your
video to be output when upscaling or downscaling:
Aspect Ratio Conversion
•
16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture in letterbox
mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for
display on a standard 4:3 television screen.
•
4x3 Pillarbox Outputs the standard 4:3 picture in pillarbox mode by
adding black bars to the left and right sides of the picture for display on
a widescreen 16:9 television screen.
•
Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture as horizontally
compressed 4:3 video, which retains the picture’s full vertical
resolution for display on a widescreen television. To display the video
with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor, select the
16:9 display setting on the monitor.
•
Center Cut
•
Center Zoom
Outputs the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Outputs the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping
the top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen
16:9 television screen.
$
YUV/RGB (for analog output) Select YUV or RGB - native to set the
type of video signal that is sent from the component output. For example,
select RGB - native if you connected the component output to a device
that accepts an RGB signal.
$
YUV/RGB (for HDMI output) Select the type of video signal that you
want to be sent from the HDMI output:
Defining your A/V Tools options
180
$
•
YUV Outputs YUV HDMI video. Select this only if you connected
the HDMI output to a device that accepts a YUV signal.
•
RGB - calibrated
•
RGB - native
Outputs adjusted RGB HDMI video using the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings for your HDMI
monitor or television. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor
and loading calibration settings using the Matrox HDMI Calibration
Utility, see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
Outputs native RGB HDMI video that does not apply
any calibration compensation. This is useful when you want to output
RGB HDMI video to a device other than an HDMI monitor or
television, such as an HDMI recorder to perform an export to tape.
3D Viewing Mode Select the 3D signal type that you want to be sent
from the HDMI output to your 3D monitor:
Select this if you’re not outputting 3D video, or to disable
3D video output. You can still monitor 3D video, but you must select
the correct viewing mode on your 3D monitor manually.
•
Disabled
•
Side-by-side
•
Over/Under
Outputs horizontally compressed side-by-side 3D
video (also referred to as side-by-side horizontal).
Outputs over/under 3D video (also referred to as top
bottom).
¦
Note
This feature may not be supported on some 3D monitors.
5 Under Advanced, select Allow Super White to allow the highest
luminance level of your video output to exceed the standard maximum white
level. Select Allow Super Black to allow the lowest luminance level of your
video output to fall below the standard black level. These options apply to
both the main analog output and secondary HDMI output.
¦
Note Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing
your final video production for broadcast.
6 Click OK to save your settings.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
181
Specifying your genlock settings
¦
Note
This section does not apply to Matrox MXO2 Mini.
You can select the source to which you want to genlock all devices connected to
your MXO2 system, as well as adjust the timing settings for all video outputs
from MXO2.
¦
Note Before adjusting these settings, you must have a clip in the clip list and
click the Disk button.
° To specify your genlock settings:
1 Click the Options button in the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box.
2 Click the Playback Settings button. This displays the Playback Settings
dialog box.
3 Click the Genlock tab.
4 From the Genlock Source list, select one of the following:
¦
$
Internal Genlock to MXO2’s internal reference signal. Select this
option only if you don’t have an external sync generator or other reliable
external video sync source.
$
Black Burst Broadcast Quality Genlock to an external analog sync
source connected to the reference (REF) input on MXO2. This must be a
stable sync source, such as an external sync generator (bi-level black burst
for SD or tri-level sync for HD), or a source VTR that has a built-in TBC.
$
Analog Input, SDI Input, and HDMI Input
Genlock to your analog,
SDI, or HDMI video source connected to the video input on MXO2.
Note The status of your genlock source will be displayed, such as Locked
or Not Locked, to indicate whether or not MXO2 is presently locked to your
Defining your A/V Tools options
182
selected genlock source. When you change the genlock source, distorted video
and silent audio will be output until MXO2 locks to the new genlock source.
5 Under Genlock Video Format, select your genlock source’s video format.
If you can’t select a video format, make sure that your genlock source
matches the specified video format. When the genlock source is set to
Internal , the genlock video format is set to your main video output format.
6 Under Advanced Settings, drag the Horizontal Delay and Vertical Delay
sliders to adjust the horizontal and vertical timing of your video outputs with
respect to your genlock source. This lets you compensate for cable delays
within your system.
7 Click OK to save your settings.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
183
Specifying your audio output settings
The audio output page lets you adjust various settings for your audio output from
your MXO2 system. For example, you can adjust the volume of your analog
audio output before or while playing back clips.
¦
Note Before adjusting these settings, you must have a clip in the clip list and
click the Disk button.
° To specify your audio output settings:
1 Click the Options button in the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box.
2 Click the Playback Settings button. This displays the Matrox Playback
Settings dialog box.
3 Click the Audio Output tab.
4 Under Analog Audio Volume, drag the sliders to adjust the volume of your
analog audio output. By default, the sliders are locked so that they move
together. To move each slider independently, click the lock button (
) to
disable it.
5 Under SDI Audio Output Format, select the bit depth you want for your
embedded SDI audio output (20-bit or 24-bit). This setting is not available
on MXO2 Mini.
6 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your A/V Tools options
184
Defining your capture settings
The Matrox Capture Settings dialog box has pages that you can use to specify
your settings for capturing video and audio in A/V Tools. The settings available
are based on your editing video format and your input source (video is always
captured to your selected editing video format). For a list of the supported
capture formats, see Appendix C, “Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture
Formats.” For a list of the supported video output formats for monitoring the
video that you’re capturing, see “Supported video output formats for monitoring”
on page 307.
¦
Note When you specify your capture settings in A/V Tools, VU meters will be
displayed to let you monitor your audio input levels. For more information, see
“Monitoring audio levels for capture” on page 190.
Specifying your video capture settings
You can capture video to MPEG-2 I-frame or uncompressed format, depending
on your selected editing video format and source video format. For example, you
can choose to capture analog NTSC clips to Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame .avi files.
° To specify your settings for capturing video in A/V Tools:
1 Click the Options button in the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box.
2 Click the Capture Settings button. This displays the Matrox Capture
Settings dialog box.
¦
Note You can also access the Matrox Capture Settings dialog box by
right-clicking the clip list and selecting Capture Settings.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
185
3 Click the Video Capture Settings tab.
4 From the Input Source list, select the type of input you want to capture. For
example, to capture material from your HDMI source, select HDMI.
5 From the Input Format list, select the video format that matches your
source video. If required, your source video will be scaled during capture to
match your editing video format. The formats available depend on your
selected input source. For information about the supported capture formats,
see Appendix C, “Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture Formats.”
6 From the Input Aspect Ratio list, select the aspect ratio of your SD source
video (4:3 or 16:9). For example, to capture SD video that was recorded
using the standard TV screen format, select 4:3. To capture SD video that
was recorded using the widescreen 16:9 format, select 16:9. If you’re
capturing HD video, the Input Aspect Ratio will be set to 16:9.
7 Under Codec, select the codec that you want to use for the capture.
$
Matrox 8-bit Uncompressed
Captures video to 8-bit uncompressed
format.
$
¦
Matrox 10-bit Uncompressed Captures video to 10-bit
uncompressed format. This is the only codec available when using a
10-bit video processing format, and is not available when using an 8-bit
format.
Note If you want to capture to a format other than Matrox 10-bit
Uncompressed , you can switch the video processing format (on the General
Defining your A/V Tools options
186
page) to 8-bit, and then change back to 10-bit after you’ve completed your
capture.
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame Captures video to MPEG-2 intra-frame
format using the 4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level at a selected data rate (SD
resolution only).
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD Captures video to MPEG-2 intra-frame
format using the 4:2:2 Profile @ High Level at a selected data rate (HD
resolution only).
8 If you’re capturing to a Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame format, click the
Configure button to configure your settings. The MPEG-2 I-frame settings
for capture in Matrox A/V Tools are the same as when you capture using
Adobe Premiere Pro. For more details, see “Selecting your MPEG-2 I-frame
settings” on page 80.
9 Under Aspect Ratio Conversion, specify the type of aspect ratio
conversion that you want to be applied to your captured video (used when
upscaling or downscaling video during capture only):
¦
$
16x9 Letterbox Captures the widescreen 16:9 picture as letterbox
video by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for display
on a standard 4:3 television screen.
$
4x3 Pillarbox Captures the standard 4:3 picture as pillarbox video by
adding black bars at the left and right sides of the picture for display on a
widescreen 16:9 television screen.
$
Center Cut
$
Center Zoom
Captures the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Captures the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping the
top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen 16:9
television screen.
Note When capturing to an SD 16:9 format, such as NTSC 16:9, the video
will be captured as horizontally compressed 4:3 (anamorphic) video. To
display the video with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor,
select the 16:9 display setting on the monitor.
10 Select Use Automatic Gain Control (AGC) if you want the gain of your
composite or S-Video input signal to be adjusted automatically to
compensate for very bright or dark images. This improves the brightness or
contrast of your picture.
11 From the Input Type list, select the type of equipment you’re using for
capture:
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
187
¦
Select this if your source device is
broadcast-quality. This setting provides the best capture results for most
devices.
$
Broadcast-quality Source
$
Consumer-quality Source Select this if you’re having problems
capturing video because your source device doesn’t meet
broadcast-quality standards. For example, the capture may be interrupted
when you try to capture from certain composite and S-Video devices,
especially from low-quality VCRs. If this happens, selecting
Consumer-quality Source will allow the video to be captured, but you
may experience dropped frames during the capture.
Note For any change to the input type to take effect, you must restart Matrox
A/V Tools.
12 If your editing video format is 1080p @ 23.98 fps, 25 fps, or 29.97 fps, from
the Output Format list, select the format (p or PsF) that you want for
previewing your captured video. For example, if you’re capturing to 1080p
@ 25 fps, you can choose to output 1080p or 1080PsF @ 25 fps video for
preview.
13 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your A/V Tools options
188
Specifying your audio capture settings
You can specify various audio capture settings, such as to specify the type of
audio files (either stereo .wav or mono .wav) that you want to create when
capturing audio in A/V Tools.
Remarks
• When you capture to an .avi file using A/V Tools, the clip’s video and audio
are saved to the .avi file, and the clip’s audio is also saved to one or more
separate .wav files. You could choose to edit the separate .wav files using
audio post-processing software.
• The separate .wav files are not supported in the A/V Tools clip list, but you
can import them into Adobe Premiere Pro.
° To specify your settings for capturing audio in A/V Tools:
1 Click the Options button in the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box.
2 Click the Capture Settings button. This displays the Matrox Capture
Settings dialog box.
3 Click the Audio Capture Settings tab.
4 Under Input Source, select the audio input source you want to capture. This
may be set for you based on your selected video input source.
¦
Note When capturing HDMI embedded audio, only uncompressed
embedded audio is supported.
5 Under Capture Format, select the bit-depth for your captured audio files.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
189
6 If you want the VU meters to be displayed each time you configure your
capture settings or start a capture in A/V Tools, select Show VU meters.
This option is not available if you’re working with 1080i @ 29.97 fps video
and using a 10-bit video processing format. For details on using the VU
meters, see “Monitoring audio levels for capture” on page 190.
7 If you experience dropped frames during capture, select Disable audio
preview to disable the audio preview only while you’re capturing material.
8 Under Capture Files, indicate whether you want to capture to stereo or
mono audio files, and select which channels you want to save to separate
.wav files.
¦
$
From the File Type list, select Stereo to save your captured audio to
stereo .wav files, or Mono to save your captured audio to mono .wav files.
$
From the Filename lists, select which stereo pairs or mono channels you
want to save to your .wav files (up to four stereo files or up to eight mono
files depending on the type of audio being captured). Select None for the
particular .wav files you don’t want to be created, or click the D (default)
button for each Filename list if you want to capture only channels 1 and
2. When A/V Tools saves each .wav file, it assigns a .Stereo.wav or
.Mono.wav suffix to the base name you gave for the associated video file.
For example, if you’ve named your video file MyFile.avi, the associated
stereo audio files would be named MyFile.Stereo1.wav,
MyFile.Stereo2.wav, etc.
Note The channels that you choose to save to the first stereo.wav file or first
two mono.wav files will be embedded in the associated .avi file.
9 Click OK to save your settings.
Defining your A/V Tools options
190
Monitoring audio levels for capture
If you select Show VU meters on the Audio Capture Settings page, each
time you configure your capture settings or start a capture in A/V Tools, VU
meters will be displayed to let you monitor the levels of your currently selected
audio input source.
¦
Note The VU meters won’t be available if you’re working with 1080i @ 29.97
fps video and using a 10-bit video processing format.
Clipping
detectors
Peak level
indicators
As you play your audio source, the color of the input level is green at or below
–12 dBSF, yellow between –12 and –6 dBFS, and red above –6 dBFS. The
clipping detectors will “light up” (become red) whenever audio clipping occurs.
The peak level indicators are thin lines that show the highest level recently
reached. These indicators will show the peak level for about two seconds or until
a higher peak level is reached.
If needed, adjust the audio level on your source device to keep the average input
level between –30 and –10 dBSF.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
191
How A/V Tools assigns clip names
When using the New tab, Clip ID displays the base name for your new clips. For
example, if the Clip ID is “MyClip,” A/V Tools will assign the name
MyClip000.avi to the first new clip you capture, and continue naming clips
sequentially (for example, MyClip001.avi, MyClip002.avi, etc.). Before
capturing new clips, you can change the Clip ID to any base name you like.
When editing clips using the Edit tab, Clip ID displays the name of the selected
clip in the clip list. You can change the name by typing a new name in the Clip ID
box on the Edit tab, then clicking Update. You can also change a clip ID directly
in the clip list by typing a new name in the clip’s Clip ID box, then pressing
ENTER.
¦
Note Changing the clip ID for a captured clip will not change the clip’s file
name.
Capturing clips
With A/V Tools you can capture live video from your camera, or video on tape.
Capturing saves the clips as .avi files on your computer’s hard drive.
¦
Note
A/V Tools does not support capture from tape with device control.
Capturing live video
1 In the A/V Tools dialog box, click the CAM button. To capture live video,
your device must be set to Camera mode.
2 In the Clip ID box, type the base clip name you’d like to be assigned to your
clip. For more information, see “How A/V Tools assigns clip names” on
page 191.
3 Click Capture.
4 A/V Tools will start capturing the clip. To stop the capture, click the Stop
button.
5 Your captured clip is added to the clip list with its duration and an icon
representing the first and last frames of the clip.
How A/V Tools assigns clip names
192
Capturing from tape without device control
1 In the A/V Tools dialog box, click the CAM button. To capture video from
tape, your device must be set to VTR mode.
2 In the Tape ID box, type a name for the tape presently loaded in your VTR.
3 In the Clip ID box, type the base clip name you’d like to be assigned to your
clip. For more information, see “How A/V Tools assigns clip names” on
page 191.
4 Press the Play button on your device. You will see the video play back in the
A/V Tools Preview Window and on your video monitor.
5 Click Capture.
6 A/V Tools will start capturing the clip. To stop the capture, click the Stop
button.
7 Your captured clip is added to the clip list with its duration and an icon
representing the first and last frames of the clip.
Editing clips
Matrox A/V Tools lets you update the clip ID and comment information for clips
in your clip list, as well as change a clip’s In and Out icons.
Updating clip information
To update the clip ID and comment information for a clip, select the clip in the
clip list and click the Edit tab. Type the new text in the text boxes, then click
Update. For more information on the clip ID, see “How A/V Tools assigns clip
names” on page 191.
Changing a clip’s In and Out icons
In and Out icons are the small icons representing the first and last frames of a
clip in the clip list. These icons can be changed to better represent your clip.
° To change the In and Out icons of captured clips in the clip list:
1 Use the transport controls to play back your clip in the preview window and
on your video monitor.
2 When you see the frame you want for the In icon, click Grab In Icon. A/V
Tools automatically updates the icon.
3 When you see the frame you want for the Out icon, click Grab Out Icon.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
193
Working with the clip list
The following sections explain how to add new clips to the clip list, play back
clips, save and load clip lists, copy, move and delete clips, and how to detach and
resize the clip list.
Adding clips
You can add a clip or a series of clips (.avi files) to the clip list using any of the
following methods:
• Drag an .avi file from a file management program, such as Windows
Explorer, to the clip list. If you’re adding clips to an existing clip list, you
can drag them to the bottom of the clip list, or place them in a specific
position using the methods described in the section “Moving clips” on
page 194.
• Right-click the clip list, then choose Import Clip from the pop-up menu (or
double-click an empty area of the clip list). In the Open dialog box, select
the .avi files you want to import, then click Open.
Playing back clips
You can play back your clips one at a time, or in the same sequence as they
appear in the clip list. To play back your clips:
• Select a clip in the clip list and click the Play button on the transport
controls.
• Right-click a clip on the clip list and choose Play.
• To play back multiple clips in sequence, select a range of clips in the clip list
using SHIFT+click or select individual clips using control click, then use
one of the afore-mentioned methods to play them back.
Saving and loading a clip list
To save a clip list, right-click the clip list. Choose Save As from the pop-up
menu to save your current clip list as a .dvl file.
You can load a clip list (.dvl) using any of the following methods:
• Right-click the clip list. Choose Open Clip List or Open Recent to select a
recently opened clip list.
• Drag a .dvl file from a file management program, such as Windows Explorer,
to the clip list.
• Double-click the .dvl file in Windows Explorer to start A/V Tools and load
the clip list. Make sure that A/V Tools is not running when you do this.
Working with the clip list
194
Remarks
$
The first time you double-click a .dvl file in Windows Explorer, you will
need to specify Matrox A/V Tools as the program you want to use to open
.dvl files.
$
If you load a .dvl file to a clip list that already contains clips, it will
replace the current clip list. If needed, your editing video format in A/V
Tools will be changed to match the video format of the clips in the loaded
clip list.
Copying clips
You can copy a clip or a series of clips in the clip list using either of the following
methods:
• Select the clips you want to copy, right-click the clip list, then choose Copy
from the pop-up menu. Select a clip in the clip list, then choose Paste to
paste the copied clips above the currently selected clip.
• Select the clips you want to copy, then CTRL+drag the clips and drop them
into the sequence you want.
¦
Note When copying a clip, the clip’s .avi file is not copied, only the reference
to the clip on disk is copied. A/V Tools assigns the -Copy extension to the Clip ID
of the copied clips.
Moving clips
You can change the order of clips in the clip list, such as to arrange clips in the
order you want to play them back. To rearrange your clips, do any of the
following:
• Select the clips you want to move, then drag and drop them into the sequence
you want. If you drag clips up in the clip list, the clips are inserted above the
black line. If you drag clips down in the clip list, the clips are inserted below
the black line. Releasing the mouse button places the clips in the list and
ripples the position of all subsequent clips in the clip list.
• Select the clips you want to move, then right-click the clip list. Choose Cut
from the pop-up menu to cut the clips. Select a clip in the clip list, then
choose Paste to paste the clip above the currently selected clip.
Deleting clips
Select the clips you want to delete, right-click the clip list, then choose one of the
following from the pop-up menu:
• To delete only the selected clips from the clip list, choose Delete Clip Only.
• To delete the selected clips and their corresponding files from your hard
drive, choose Delete Clip+File.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
195
Detaching and resizing the clip list
You can change the size of your clip list to suit your needs. First, detach the clip
list from the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box by clicking the Float/dock clip list
button (
) above the clip list. Now the clip list can be freely moved and
resized. To resize the clip list, drag the sides or corner of the clip list as needed.
You can also use the standard Windows Maximize and Restore buttons in the
top right corner of the window.
After resizing, A/V Tools will automatically rearrange the clips in the clip list. To
dock the clip list back to the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box, click the
Float/dock clip list button, or click the Close button in the top right corner of
the Clip List window. Once the window is docked again, A/V Tools will
remember the previous size and location of the clip list for the next time you
detach the clip list.
Grabbing a single-frame image
You can grab single-frame (still) images and save them as .tga files to use in your
Adobe Premiere Pro projects. Your source video can be a clip on tape, a clip on
disk, or live video.
Grabbing a single-frame image
196
° To grab a single-frame image:
1 Play back your source video. If it is on disk, you can use the transport
controls to locate the clip
2 In the A/V Tools dialog box, click the Grab Image button to open the Grab
Image dialog box.
3 When the frame you want is displayed in the Preview Window, click the
Grab button.
4 If you notice flickering in your image, you can choose to grab only one of
the fields. From the Grab list, select Field 1 or Field 2. One field contains
the odd-numbered scan lines in the frame, and the other field contains the
even-numbered lines. Select the field that best displays your image. A/V
Tools interpolates between the two consecutive scan lines to create the
missing field.
5 Click Save or Save As to save the image.
6 Click the Close button to return to the Matrox A/V Tools dialog box.
¦
Note If you do not specify a file name in the Save As text box, or if you select
Auto Save, A/V Tools will assign a default name to the first grabbed image
(such as MyImage01.tga or a name based on the last name you used) and
continue naming images sequentially.
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
197
Keyboard shortcuts
The following table provides a complete list of keyboard shortcuts available for
using A/V Tools.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Disk mode
CAM mode
Play
Rewind
Fast Forward
Frame Advance
Frame Reverse
Stop
Loop
Delete Clip Only
K
B
B
Z
X
’ (apostrophe)
; (semicolon)
V
A
DELETE
Delete Clip + File
Grab
Auto Save
SHIFT+DELETE
Save
Import Clip
Select All
F7
F5
F6
CTRL+I
CTRL+A
Cut
Copy
Paste
CTRL+X
New Clip List
Open Clip List
Save Clip List
CTRL+N
CTRL+C
CTRL+V
CTRL+O
CTRL+S
Keyboard shortcuts
198
Your notes
Chapter 11, Using Matrox A/V Tools
12
Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug-ins
This chapter explains how to
use the Matrox WYSIWYG
plug-ins available with Matrox
MXO2 so that you can display
the contents of your
composition or animation on
your video monitor.
200
Overview
Together with your Matrox MXO2 hardware, the Matrox WYSIWYG Control
Panel and Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins let you display the contents of your
composition or animation on your video monitor. This lets you see the exact
color temperature, safe-title area, and any interlaced artifacts as you work.
You can preview video played back using the following applications that are
supported by the Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins:
• Adobe After Effects.
• Adobe Photoshop.
• Autodesk 3ds Max.
• Autodesk Combustion.
• eyeon Fusion.
• NewTek LightWave 3D.
Configuring the Matrox WYSIWYG Control
Panel
The Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel lets you specify the settings you want for
previewing video on your video monitor. To use the Matrox WYSIWYG Control
Panel, right-click the
icon on your Windows taskbar. If you don’t see the
icon, check your taskbar properties and make sure that you’re showing the icons
for your Matrox applications. If you still don’t see the icon, choose Start > All
Programs > Matrox Mtx.utils > Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel .
The Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility uses the Matrox WYSIWYG Control
Panel to display specially designed graphics for calibrating your HDMI monitor
for video. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor, see Chapter 7,
“Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
¦
Note By default, the Matrox WYSIWYG output to your video monitor is
enabled. To disable it, clear the Enable WYSIWYG Output option in the
Control Panel.
1 From the Project Format menu, select the format that matches your
composition or animation, such as NTSC 4:3.
2 Choose Output Configuration to specify the video output settings you
want for previewing your video. The available settings depend on your
selected project format (editing video format), and are the same as those
provided when using Matrox A/V Tools as explained in “Specifying your
video output settings” on page 174 and “Specifying your video output
settings (MXO2 Mini)” on page 178.
Chapter 12, Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug-ins
201
¦
Note The Genlock page is also available to let you adjust the genlock
settings for your video output, if needed (not applicable to MXO2 Mini). For
details, see “Specifying your genlock settings” on page 181.
3 From the Preview Type menu, select one of the following options for the
preview:
Select this to view your composition or animation.
$
Video
$
Alpha Channel Select this to view only your composition’s or
animation’s grayscale alpha-key (matte) information.
4 From the Scaling menu, select one of the following options for your preview
output:
Select this to scale your output to fit your video monitor.
The aspect ratio of your project format will be preserved.
$
Scale to fit
$
Original Size Select this to output your video without any scaling. If
you are playing back HD clips in an SD project, your output will be
centered on your video monitor.
Required steps to use the WYSIWYG plug-ins
The following sections list the steps required to use the Matrox WYSIWYG
plug-in for each application in order to preview video on your video monitor.
¦
Note The following procedures may change with a subsequent release of the
program.
Adobe After Effects
1 Start Adobe After Effects and import the footage you want to preview.
2 Drag the footage from the Project panel to the Composition panel.
Adobe Photoshop
1 Start Adobe Photoshop and open the file you want to preview.
2 Choose File > Export > Matrox WYSIWYG Preview.
Autodesk 3ds Max
1 Start Autodesk 3ds Max and open the file you want to preview.
2 Open the Render Scene dialog box by choosing Rendering > Render
Setup .
3 Click the Common tab.
4 Under Render Output, click Devices.
5 In the Select Image Output Device dialog box, select Matrox WYSIWYG
Preview, and click OK.
6 Click Render.
Required steps to use the WYSIWYG plug-ins
202
Autodesk Combustion
1 Start Autodesk Combustion and open the file you want to preview.
2 Choose File > Preferences > Framebuffer.
3 In the menu beside Framebuffer Type, select Matrox WYSIWYG
Preview, and click OK.
eyeon Fusion
1 Start eyeon Fusion and open the file you want to preview.
2 Right-click on the file, and choose View On > Matrox WYSIWYG
Preview.
NewTek LightWave 3D
1 Start NewTek LightWave 3D and load the file you want to preview by
choosing File > Load > Load Scene.
2 Click the Render tab.
3 Under Options on the left hand side of the screen, click Render Globals.
4 From the Render Display menu, select Matrox WYSIWYG Preview.
5 Under Render on the left hand side of the screen, click Render Frame.
Chapter 12, Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug-ins
13
Using MXO2 with Adobe and Microsoft
Live Media Encoders
This chapter explains how to
use your Matrox MXO2 system
as an input device to feed live
video and audio to Adobe
Flash Media Live Encoder or
Microsoft Expression Encoder.
204
Overview
You can use your Matrox MXO2 system as an input device to feed live video and
audio to Adobe Flash Media Live Encoder or Microsoft Expression Encoder.
This lets you stream media for broadcasting live events such as sports, concerts,
news, educational seminars, and corporate meetings. For example, you can select
any video and audio source connected to the MXO2 inputs as your A/V sources
for use with Adobe Flash Media Live Encoder, scale the incoming video to the
streaming format that you want using the MXO2 hardware scaler, and stream the
live video and audio to a public distribution website or your dedicated IP hosting
site. While working in your encoding application, live video and audio
passthrough are provided so that you can monitor the source material that you’re
encoding using the MXO2 video and audio outputs.
Because the MXO2 hardware scaler is used to scale your incoming video, you
don’t need to perform any additional scaling in your encoding application. This
feature provides high-quality scaling of HD and SD video for live media
streaming, and frees up your system’s CPU to perform other tasks.
¦
Note You won’t be able to use your streaming media application with MXO2
if you’re currently running another application that uses your MXO2 hardware,
such as Matrox A/V Tools. You must close other applications that use your
MXO2 hardware before starting your streaming media application.
Specifying your settings for media streaming
The following instructions are guidelines for using MXO2 with Adobe Flash
Media Live Encoder or Microsoft Expression Encoder.
1 Connect the video and audio input sources that you want to stream to the
corresponding inputs on your MXO2 hardware.
¦
Note If you want to stream HDMI or SDI embedded audio only, you must
have a valid HDMI or SDI video source containing the audio that you want to
stream, although the video won’t be streamed. To perform audio-only
streaming of other types of audio input, you’ll need to select a video source
when you configure your Matrox A/V settings, but this source doesn’t need
to be connected or have a valid video input signal unless you select an HDMI
or SDI source.
2 Start your streaming media encoding application and select Matrox A/V
Input as your source video and audio devices.
3 Click the button that your application provides for configuring your video
device settings (you configure both your video and audio settings using the
Chapter 13, Using MXO2 with Adobe and Microsoft Live Media Encoders
205
source video device settings only). This displays a dialog box similar to the
following:
4 From the Video Input Format list, select the video format that matches
your source video. For a list of the video input formats supported on the
various MXO2 inputs, see “Supported input formats” on page 290.
5 From the Video Input Source list, select the type of video input you want
to stream. For example, to stream video from your composite source, select
Composite. The available video input sources depend on your selected
video input format.
6 From the Audio Input Source list, select your audio source. For example, if
you want to stream channels 1 and 2 of your XLR (balanced analog) audio
input, select XLR Channel 1-2. The available audio input sources depend on
your selected video input source. You can stream stereo audio only (two
input channels).
¦
Note When streaming HDMI embedded audio, only uncompressed
embedded audio is supported.
7 From the Video Frame Size list, select the frame size you want for your
streaming video. If required, your source video will be scaled to your
selected frame size for use with your media encoding application.
8 From the Video Frame Rate list, select the frame rate that you want for
your streaming video. The available frame rates depend on your selected
video input format. For example, if your source video’s frame rate is 29.97,
you can select a frame rate of 14.98 or 29.97.
¡ Important To avoid having your media encoding application perform
additional scaling or frame rate conversions, make sure that the video frame
Specifying your settings for media streaming
206
size and frame rate specified in your application match the frame size and
frame rate that you selected for your Matrox A/V settings.
9 Click OK to save your settings and return to your media encoding
application. You should see your selected video source play back in your
application’s live preview window. If you don’t see your source video, check
that your Matrox MXO2 hardware and selected video source are properly
connected.
10 If you want to stream audio only, clear the option to enable video encoding
in your application.
11 If your application provides an audio input volume control, you can use it as
needed to adjust the volume of the incoming audio for streaming.
For details on how to specify additional encoding settings and stream your live
video and audio, refer to the documentation for your streaming media encoding
application.
Chapter 13, Using MXO2 with Adobe and Microsoft Live Media Encoders
14
Using Matrox MXO2 with Livestream
Procaster
This chapter explains how to
use your Matrox MXO2 system
as an input device to feed live
video and audio to Livestream
Procaster.
208
Overview
You can use your Matrox MXO2 system as an input device to feed live video and
audio to LivestreamProcaster. This lets you stream media for broadcasting live
events such as sports, concerts, news, educational seminars, and corporate
meetings. For example, you can select any video and audio source connected to
the MXO2 inputs as your A/V sources for use with Procaster, and stream the live
video and audio to your Livestream channel.
¦
Note You won’t be able to use Procaster with MXO2 if you’re currently
running another application that uses your MXO2 hardware, such as Matrox A/V
Tools. You must close other applications that use your MXO2 hardware before
starting Procaster.
Specifying your settings for media streaming
This section provides instructions on how to use MXO2 as the input device for
video and audio in LivestreamProcaster.
¦
Note To use Livestream Procaster, you must have a Livestream account. If you
don’t already have an account, you can register for one by clicking Register
when you start Procaster.
Chapter 14, Using Matrox MXO2 with Livestream Procaster
209
1 Connect the video and audio input sources that you want to stream to the
corresponding inputs on your MXO2 hardware.
2 Start Livestream Procaster, enter your username and password, then click
LOGIN.
3 Below the GO LIVE button, your Matrox hardware will automatically be
selected as your video input source.
Specifying your settings for media streaming
210
4 Click Input Source to display the input source page, similar to the
following example:
¦
Note The available video and audio inputs depend on your Matrox MXO2
hardware.
5 Under Select Video Input, select the video input source and format that
match your source video. You should see a preview of your selected video
source play back at the top of the page. If you don’t see your source video,
check that your Matrox MXO2 hardware and selected video source are
properly connected. For a list of the video input formats supported on the
various MXO2 inputs, see “Supported input formats” on page 290.
6 Under Select Audio Input, select the audio input that you want to stream.
You can stream stereo audio only (two input channels). The levels for your
audio input should appear at the top of the page.
7 Click Finish and select your desired encoding settings as explained in your
Procaster documentation.
8 Click the GO LIVE button to start the streaming.
Chapter 14, Using Matrox MXO2 with Livestream Procaster
15
Using Matrox MXO2 with
Telestream Wirecast
This chapter explains how to
stream and record your video
and audio input feeds using
Matrox MXO2 in Telestream
Wirecast.
212
Overview
You can use your Matrox MXO2 system as an input device to feed live video and
audio to Telestream Wirecast for streaming, and simultaneously record your
original feeds to disk. The easy-to-use Matrox ISO recording tool lets you record
using the high-quality Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codec at up to 300 Mb/s in HD.
You can then use Adobe Premiere Pro to natively edit your material.
Using Wirecast, you can choose any stereo pair for your streaming production.
When streaming HDMI or SDI video, you can simultaneously record up to eight
channels of embedded audio to disk using the Matrox ISO recording tool. You
have complete flexibility to go from a simple stereo mix to surround sound for
your post-event editing needs.
Specifying your settings for media streaming
This section provides instructions on how to use Matrox MXO2 for video and
audio streaming in Telestream Wirecast.
1 Connect the video and audio input sources that you want to stream to the
corresponding inputs on your Matrox hardware.
2 In Telestream Wirecast, add a new Matrox shot for the input source that you
want to stream by clicking
, and then selecting your Matrox device (do
not select Matrox A/V Input).
3 For the Matrox shot added in step 2, select the shot, click
, and then
select your Matrox device as the audio source for the shot. Alternately, you
can select a system audio source for your shot.
¦
Note For a Matrox device or system audio source to appear in the list of
audio sources, a shot must have been added for that Matrox device or system
audio source (see step 2).
Chapter 15, Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast
213
4 To configure your source settings, choose Sources > Show Sources
Settings.
5 In the Source Settings dialog box, under MATROX: INPUT DEVICES,
select your Matrox device, and then specify the following settings:
$
From the Video Format list, select the video format that matches your
source video. For a list of the video input formats supported on the various
MXO2 inputs, see “Supported input formats” on page 290.
$
From the Video Source list, select the type of video input you want to
stream. For example, to stream video from your HDMI source, select
HDMI . The available video input sources depend on your selected video
input format.
$
Aspect Ratio Specify the aspect ratio of your SD source video. For HD
sources, this option is automatically set to 16:9.
Specifying your settings for media streaming
214
$
¦
From the Audio Source list, select your audio source. For example, if
you want to stream your HDMI embedded audio input, select HDMI
(embedded audio). The available audio input sources depend on your
selected video input source.
Note When streaming HDMI embedded audio, only uncompressed
embedded audio is supported.
Based on the audio source selected for your shot (see
step 3), select the audio pair that you want to stream with your source
video. This option does not apply if you selected a system audio source
for your Matrox shot. Telestream Wirecast outputs one stereo pair when
streaming.
$
Audio Channels
$
If your source video is interlaced (i) and you want
to de-interlace your video before encoding, select De-interlace Video.
This option is used to better display your encoded video on a monitor that
displays lines progressively, such as an LCD or computer monitor.
De-interlace Video
6 Click Output Settings to specify the settings that you want for monitoring
your source video and audio on your Matrox hardware as explained in
“Specifying your output settings” on page 222.
7 Click Save Settings to save the source settings for the selected Matrox
device. The saved source settings are automatically loaded when Wirecast
opens, and when creating a new Wirecast document.
8 Set any additional encoding options in Telestream Wirecast as you would
normally, and then output your video.
¦
Note To scale the source video for streaming to another video format, use
the scaling options that are available in Telestream Wirecast.
9 If you want to simultaneously record your original feeds to disk, see the next
section, “Specifying your settings for Matrox ISO recording.”
Specifying your settings for Matrox ISO
recording
Matrox MXO2 not only sends your source feeds to Wirecast for streaming (see
“Specifying your settings for media streaming” on page 212), it can also
simultaneously record your original feeds to disk using the Matrox ISO recording
tool. You can, however, record your feeds without streaming. The high-quality
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codec is used to record your input sources to disk as
.avi files. Depending on your selected audio source, you can also choose to
record up to eight audio channels as separate mono or stereo .wav files. A log file
(Record.Log) is generated after every recording session, wherein you can view
the events for each recording (see “Record log file” on page 221).
Chapter 15, Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast
215
¦
Note All settings in the Matrox ISO Record dialog box are automatically
saved.
1 Connect the video and audio input sources that you want to record to the
corresponding inputs on your Matrox hardware.
2 In Telestream Wirecast, choose Sources > Show Sources Settings.
3 In the Source Settings dialog box, under MATROX: INPUT DEVICES,
select your Matrox device, and then specify your source settings for
recording as follows:
$
From the Video Format list, select the video format that matches your
source video. For a list of the video input formats supported on the various
MXO2 inputs, see “Supported input formats” on page 290.
$
From the Video Source list, select the type of video input you want to
record. For example, to record video from your HDMI source, select
Specifying your settings for Matrox ISO recording
216
HDMI . The available video input sources depend on your selected video
input format.
¦
$
Aspect Ratio Specify the aspect ratio of your SD source video. For HD
sources, this option is automatically set to 16:9.
$
From the Audio Source list, select your audio source. For example, if
you want to record your HDMI embedded audio input, select HDMI
(embedded audio). The available audio input sources depend on your
selected video input source.
Note When recording HDMI embedded audio, only uncompressed
embedded audio is supported.
4 Click Output Settings to specify the settings that you want for monitoring
your source video and audio on your Matrox hardware as explained in
“Specifying your output settings” on page 222.
5 To specify your recording settings, click ISO Record.
¦
Note You can hide or show the settings in the Matrox ISO Record dialog
box by clicking
or
respectively.
6 In the Matrox ISO Record dialog box, specify your settings for recording:
$
Record Path Specify the destination where all your recorded clips will
be stored, or click Browse to select the location that you want. Every
recording session generates a separate subfolder within the specified
location, in the form YYYY-MM-DD HHMMSS, which contains the
recorded video and audio files, and the log file (Record.Log) for that
recording session.
$
Input Selection
$
Filename For your Matrox input, specify the base name for your
recorded files. A default base name is provided, but you can change this
name if you want. The base name applies to both the video and audio files
that are recorded, but the naming conventions for video and audio files
Select the Matrox input that you want to record. You
can also select or clear an input during a recording session (see “Input
recording” on page 219). You must have a valid input signal in order for
an input to be recorded. For more information on the input states and how
they affect recording, see “Input states and video formats” on page 221.”
Chapter 15, Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast
217
differ (see “Matrox ISO recording file naming conventions” on
page 218”).
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame Data Rate Set the data rate at which the
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codec will record your source video to disk. The
last setting for an SD or HD source is automatically saved and loaded
when an SD or HD source is connected to the input. Click
to set the
data rate to the default value for an SD or HD input source.
$
When recording a video input, you can also record the
input from your selected audio source. If you choose to record audio, the
first stereo pair (channels 1-2) from your audio source is automatically
embedded in the resulting .avi file, and separate .wav audio files are also
created. When 0 is selected for this option, the audio input is not recorded.
When 2, 4, 6, or 8 is selected, the Matrox ISO recording tool embeds the
first stereo pair (channel 1-2) in the .avi file, and creates separate .wav
files for the first two, four, six, or eight audio channels from your audio
source respectively (the number of audio channels available depends on
your selected audio source).
$
Audio Bit Depth
$
If 2, 4, 6, or 8 is selected for Audio Channels, select
the file type that you want for the separate .wav audio files that are
created. This setting does not affect the embedded audio in the .avi file,
which is always stereo. If Mono is selected, the Matrox ISO recording
tool will create a separate audio file for every selected channel. For
example, if four audio channels are selected, four mono audio files will be
created. If Stereo is selected, a separate audio file will be created for each
audio pair selected. For example, if four audio channels are selected, two
stereo audio files will be created.
Audio Channels
If 2, 4, 6, or 8 is selected for Audio Channels, select
the bit depth that you want for your recorded audio.
Audio File Type
¡ Important The separate .wav audio files can have a maximum file size of
4 GB. See “Audio recording” on page 220 for the approximate maximum
duration for a separate .wav audio file based on the audio settings.
7 Click
to start recording your selected input. Click
to stop the
recording session. You can also start and stop the recording of your input
during a recording session (see “Input recording” on page 219).
¡ Important If the status light turns red when recording, this indicates that
the input experienced dropped or skipped frames. After the recording session
ends, check the Record.Log file to see the dropped/skipped events for your
recording session (see “Record log file” on page 221).
8 Click
to open Windows Explorer at the specified Record Path location
to view the recorded video/audio files, including the record log file
(Record.Log).
Specifying your settings for Matrox ISO recording
218
9 You can play back the recorded video files using Windows Media Player, or
use the recorded video and audio files in Adobe Premiere Pro for post-event
editing.
Matrox ISO recording file naming conventions
The base name specified under Record Path in the Matrox ISO Record dialog
box applies to both the video and audio files that are recorded, but the naming
conventions for video and audio files differ as follows:
• Video files Recorded video files contain the base name, Matrox input, and
recording number using the following convention:
basename_input_recordingnumber.avi
For example, if the base name for input 1 is Record, the resulting file will be
named Record_1_0.avi. You can also have more than one recording for a
Matrox input. In this case, the files are differentiated by a recording number.
This occurs when:
$
You clear and then re-select an input during a recording session. This
creates a different file for each selection sequence. For example, if the
base name for input 1 is Record, and you select input 1 three times during
a recording session, the resulting video files will be Record_1_0.avi,
Record_1_1.avi, and Record_1_2.avi.
$
You disconnect the source from your selected input during a recording
session, and then reconnect a source to that input. For example, if you’re
recording the video connected to input 1, and then you connect a source
with the same or a different video format to the input, the resulting video
files will be Record_1_0.avi, and Record_1_1.avi. If you connect a source
with a different video format, however, you must select the source’s video
format in the Source Settings dialog box.
• Audio files If your recording includes audio, the separate .wav audio files
that are created are named the same as the video files, except that they also
include the audio file type (mono or stereo) and an incremental suffix using
the following convention:
basename_input_recordingnumber_filetypesuffix.wav
For example, if the base name for input 1 is Record, Audio Channels is set
to 8, and Stereo is selected as the Audio File Type, the resulting audio files
will be Record_1_0_Stereo1.wav, Record_1_0_Stereo2.wav,
Record_1_0_Stereo3.wav, and Record_1_0_Stereo4.wav. If Mono is
selected as the Audio File Type instead of Stereo, eight files will be created
instead of four, and the files will be named Record_1_0_Mono1.wav,
Record_1_0_Mono2.wav, Record_1_0_Mono3.wav, and so on.
Chapter 15, Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast
219
Record functionality
This section describes the Matrox ISO recording functionality regarding the
recording session, record time code, and input recording.
Recording session
A recording session begins when you click
, and ends when you click
.
You must have a valid input signal in order for your selected input to be recorded.
See “Input recording” on page 219 for the input recording methods.
¡ Important If the status light turns red when recording, this indicates that the
input experienced dropped or skipped frames. After the recording session ends,
check the Record.Log file to see the dropped/skipped events for the recording
session (see “Record log file” on page 221).
Record time code
Starting a recording session also starts the record time code for a selected input.
Depending on the video input frame rate, the time code is displayed in either drop
frame (HH:MM:SS;FF) or non-drop frame (HH:MM:SS:FF) SMPTE format.
Drop frame format is used for NTSC, 23.98 fps, 29.97 fps, and 59.94 fps video,
and non-drop frame format is used for all other video frame rates, such as PAL
and 25 fps. If you select an input at any time during a recording session, the
record time code for that input starts when you select the input. A recording’s
time code stops only when the recording ends for that input. See “Input
recording” on page 219 for information on stopping an input recording.
Input recording
This section describes the various ways of recording an input source, and
stopping an input recording.
Recording methods:
• Selecting an input and then starting a recording session If an input is
selected with a valid video signal when you start a recording session, a
recording is created for that input. If the selected input is invalid or
disconnected, the recording will start once a valid signal is connected to the
input. See “Input states and video formats” on page 221 for information on
how to determine the video format of an “invalid input.”
• Selecting an input during a recording session You can select an input at
any time during a recording session to begin recording that input. If you
clear and then re-select an input during the same recording session, a
separate file will be created for each selection sequence. The files are
differentiated by a recording number (see “Matrox ISO recording file
naming conventions” on page 218).
• Connecting an input source during a recording session You can connect
a valid input source to an unselected input during a recording session, and
then select the input to record your source feed.
Specifying your settings for Matrox ISO recording
220
To stop an input recording:
• Clear an input during a recording session Clearing a selected input
during a recording session stops the recording for that input.
• Disconnect an input during a recording session If you disconnect a
selected input’s source, the recording will stop. You can later connect a
source with the same or a different format to start recording to a new file. If
you connect a source with a different video format, however, you must select
the source’s video format in the Source Settings dialog box.
• Stop the recording session Click
to stop the recording session. The
input recording will stop for your selected input.
Audio recording
When you record audio along with your video, the first stereo pair (channels 1-2)
from your input source is automatically embedded in the resulting .avi file, and
separate .wav audio files are also created. The separate .wav audio files can have
a maximum file size of 4 GB. This means that depending on your specified audio
settings, the .wav audio file has a maximum duration. This restriction does not
apply to the embedded audio in the .avi file, which can last as long as the
associated video. The following table lists the approximate maximum duration
for a separate .wav audio file based on the audio settings:
Audio File Type
Mono
Stereo
Audio Bit Depth
Approximate
Maximum Duration
16-bit
12 hours
24-bit
6 hours
16-bit
6 hours
24-bit
3 hours
Record status
The Matrox ISO Record dialog box includes a record status indicator. If the
indicator remains green throughout the entire recording session, all recordings
completed without any dropped or skipped frames. If dropped or skipped frames
occur during a recording, the indicator turns red for the duration of the recording.
Check the Record.Log file to see the dropped/skipped events for your recording
session (see “Record log file” on page 221).
Record status indicator
Chapter 15, Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast
221
Input states and video formats
The video format that you selected in the Source Settings dialog box for your
Matrox device is displayed in the Matrox ISO Record dialog box.
Input
indicator
The following input states are displayed:
• Valid input signal When a signal that matches the video format selected
for your Matrox device is connected to the input, such as [email protected],
the video format is displayed under the input label. If the input is selected for
recording, the resulting video file will be in the displayed video format.
• No input signal/Invalid input signal If your Matrox hardware detects no
input signal or an invalid signal for an input, Disconnected or Invalid
Input Signal will be displayed. If the input is selected, the input indicator
switches between displaying the state (Disconnected or Invalid Input
Signal) and the expected video format for that input. To record the input,
you must connect a source that matches the displayed video format. If
needed, change the video format for your Matrox device in the Source
Settings dialog box as explained in “Specifying your settings for Matrox
ISO recording” on page 214.
Record log file
After every recording session (see “Recording session” on page 219) a record log
file (Record.Log) is generated. The Record.Log file is located in the same folder
that contains the files for that recording session. When dropped or skipped
frames occur during a recording session, the Record.Log file provides a
breakdown of the events, and the time code of when the events occurred.
Specifying your settings for Matrox ISO recording
222
Specifying your output settings
To specify the output settings that you want for monitoring your source video and
audio on your Matrox hardware, click the Output Settings button in the Source
Settings dialog box.
¦
Note In order to monitor the audio channels that you’re streaming, you must
connect your speakers to the output of your sound card (not your Matrox
hardware), and make sure that your sound card is set as your default sound
playback device in the Windows Control Panel. For a list of the supported video
output formats for monitoring your source video, see “Supported video output
formats for monitoring” on page 307.
1 Under Analog Output, you can specify the settings you want for your
analog output from MXO2.
$
Output Type Specifies the analog video output type. If you’re
outputting SD video on MXO2, MXO2 Rack, or MXO2 LE, this will be
set to All Available to indicate that the output will be available on all the
analog outputs. On MXO2 Mini, you can select Component, or
Composite & S-Video if you’re outputting SD video. When outputting
HD analog video, the output type will be set to Component (on MXO2
Mini, the composite and S-Video outputs are invalid when outputting
component video).
$
Setup (NTSC) Use this to select the setup level you want for your
NTSC analog video:
Chapter 15, Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast
223
•
0 IRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE. You should select this option
only when working with a commercial DV device that uses the
Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE. For example, if the video
appears too bright when you preview DV video on your NTSC monitor,
you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output the video at the correct
brightness.
•
7.5 IRE
Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7.5 IRE.
Select YUV or RGB to set the type of video signal that is
sent from the component output. For example, select RGB if you
connected the component output to a device that accepts an RGB signal.
$
YUV/RGB
$
Under HDMI Output, select the type of video signal that you want to be
sent from the HDMI output:
•
YUV Outputs YUV HDMI video. Select this only if you connected
the HDMI output to a device that accepts a YUV signal.
•
RGB - calibrated
•
RGB - native
Outputs adjusted RGB HDMI video using the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings for your HDMI
monitor or television. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor
and loading calibration settings using the Matrox HDMI Calibration
Utility, see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
Outputs native RGB HDMI video that does not apply
any calibration compensation. Select this when you want to disable the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings and output RGB
HDMI video from MXO2 using its native color settings for previewing
video on your HDMI monitor.
2 Under SDI Audio Output Format, select the bit depth you want for your
embedded SDI audio output (20-bit or 24-bit). This setting is not available
on MXO2 Mini.
3 Under Analog Audio Volume, drag the sliders to adjust the volume of your
analog audio output. By default, the sliders are locked so that they move
together. To move each slider independently, click the lock button (
) to
disable it.
4 Under Advanced , you can use the Analog SC/H Phase slider to advance or
delay your analog video output’s subcarrier phase with respect to the
horizontal sync of the genlock source (for composite video only). This
setting is not available on MXO2 Mini.
5 Click OK to save your settings.
Specifying your output settings
224
Your notes
Chapter 15, Using Matrox MXO2 with Telestream Wirecast
16
Using the Matrox Video for Windows
Codecs
This chapter explains how to
use the Matrox Video for
Windows codecs to render
material to Matrox .avi files.
226
Overview
When using Video for Windows (VFW) programs to render material to an .avi
file, you can use a Matrox VFW codec to create a Matrox .avi file. For example,
you may want to render an animation to a Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame .avi file for
use in your Adobe Premiere Pro projects on Matrox MXO2.
When rendering compositions or animations that have an alpha channel, you can
select a “+ Alpha” Matrox VFW codec to render to a Matrox uncompressed or
MPEG-2 I-frame .avi file that contains the alpha-key information. This .avi file
will be automatically keyed when you place the clip in an Adobe Premiere Pro
sequence.
The following sections explain the various settings that you need to make to
render material to a Matrox .avi file using a VFW program. For details on
exporting a sequence in Adobe Premiere Pro, see “Exporting to a Matrox .avi
file” on page 84.
¦
Note Although Matrox has tested many VFW programs, there may be certain
operational limitations when using the Matrox VFW codecs with some of these
programs (as well as with untested programs).
Using VFW programs without the MXO2
hardware
If you installed the Matrox VFW software codecs for use without the MXO2
hardware (see “Installing the Matrox VFW software codecs on a system without
the MXO2 hardware” on page 9), you can render and play back Matrox .avi files
using your VFW program without having the MXO2 hardware. For example, if
you captured clips to Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame format using Adobe Premiere Pro,
you could edit and play back those clips on a system without the MXO2
hardware, assuming that you installed the Matrox VFW software codecs on that
system.
Chapter 16, Using the Matrox Video for Windows Codecs
227
Before you start rendering
Before you start rendering material to a Matrox .avi file, make the following
settings in your VFW program:
• Set the frame size (width and height) of your rendered material to
full-screen, depending on the codec that you’ll be using.
$
$
$
$
DV/DVCAM, DVCPRO, DVCPRO50, or MPEG-2 I-frame SD:
•
720 × 480 to render to NTSC or 486p format.
•
720 × 576 to render to PAL or 576p format.
Uncompressed SD:
•
720 × 486 to render to NTSC or 486p format.
•
720 × 576 to render to PAL or 576p format.
MPEG-2 I-frame HD:
•
1280 ×720 to render to 720p format.
•
1440 ×1080 to render to 1440×1080i/p format.
•
1920 ×1080 to render to full-size 1080i/p format.
DVCPRO HD or Uncompressed HD:
•
1280 ×720 to render to 720p format.
•
1920 ×1080 to render to 1080i/p format.
• Set the appropriate frame rate for the video format to which you are
rendering. For example, if you are rendering to PAL format, set the frame
rate to 25 fps.
• If available, select the “Recompress” option. This allows you to render video
using the same compression format, frame size, and frame rate as your
source video but using a different data rate, scanning mode (interlaced or
progressive), or bit depth (8-bit or 10-bit).
• If you’ll be rendering audio, set the audio sample rate to 48 kHz and the
sample size to 16-bit (mono or stereo).
• For best results, make sure that there is no data rate limit set in your program
for rendered material. This ensures that your .avi files will be rendered at the
particular data rate you select.
¦
Note Before rendering a lot of material, check that your rendered animations
and transitions such as wipes and slides play back smoothly. If they appear
jumpy, try adjusting the field dominance or field order for your rendered material.
Before you start rendering
228
Selecting color space conversion options
When you render material to an .avi file using a Matrox VFW codec, you can
determine how you want the luminance levels and chroma information to be
processed during the color space conversion that’s performed during the render.
¦
Note The default settings for color space conversion provide good results for
most applications. We recommend that you change these settings only when
needed for special purposes.
° To select the color space conversion options you want:
1 Choose Start > All Programs > Matrox Mtx.utils (or Matrox VFW
Software Codecs) > Matrox VFW Codec Configuration.
2 In the provided dialog box under Color Space Conversion, select the
options you want:
Renders video using standard broadcast luminance levels.
Super black and super white luminance levels are clipped.
$
Standard
$
Expanded Renders video using the full range of luminance levels.
Super black and super white luminance levels are retained. You may want
to use this setting, for example, to render material on which you’ll be
applying luminance key effects.
¡ Important When rendering RGB graphics, selecting Expanded will
create super black and/or white in your rendered images. For example, all
black in your RGB graphics will become super black, and white will become
super white. To render your RGB graphics with standard black and white
levels, set your luminance range to Standard.
Chapter 16, Using the Matrox Video for Windows Codecs
229
$
Chroma filtering and Chroma interpolation
Select these options to
adjust the chroma bandwidth of RGB graphics. This improves images that
have abrupt changes between different colors, such as a blue box on a
black or white background. You should select these options for most
animation and compositing work (computer-generated material). For most
video editing programs, however, it’s best that you not select these
options. If you find that your rendered images appear to be blurred, try
clearing one or both of these options.
3 Click OK to save your settings. Any change you make to your selected
luminance range setting (such as switching from Standard to Expanded)
will only take effect the next time you start your VFW program.
Rendering material to a Matrox VFW .avi file
When you render material to an .avi file, such as when you render a finished
composition or an animation, you must select the compressor (codec) you want
to create the file. The compressor determines the quality of your rendered video.
Refer to your program’s documentation for instructions on how to select a
compressor for your .avi file.
If you want to export material from Adobe Premiere Pro to a Matrox .avi file, it’s
recommended that you use the Matrox AVI export format as explained in
“Exporting to a Matrox .avi file” on page 84.
° To create a Matrox VFW .avi file:
1 Select one of the following codecs from your program’s list of available
compressors:
Renders video to DV or DVCAM format.
$
Matrox DV/DVCAM
$
Matrox DVCPRO
$
Matrox DVCPRO50
$
Matrox DVCPRO HD
$
Renders video to MPEG-2 intra-frame
format using the 4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level at a selected data rate (SD
resolution only).
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame + Alpha
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD
$
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD + Alpha
Renders video to DVCPRO format.
Renders video to DVCPRO50 or D-9 format.
Renders video to DVCPRO HD format.
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame
Renders video to MPEG-2
intra-frame format with alpha using the 4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level at a
selected data rate (SD resolution only).
Renders video to MPEG-2 intra-frame
format using the 4:2:2 Profile @ High Level at a selected data rate.
Renders video to MPEG-2
intra-frame format with alpha using the 4:2:2 Profile @ High Level at a
selected data rate.
Rendering material to a Matrox VFW .avi file
230
Renders video to 8-bit or 10-bit
$
Matrox Uncompressed SD
uncompressed SD format.
$
Matrox Uncompressed SD + Alpha
Renders video to 8-bit or 10-bit
uncompressed SD format with alpha.
$
Matrox Uncompressed HD
Renders video to 8-bit or 10-bit
uncompressed HD format.
$
¦
Matrox Uncompressed HD + Alpha
uncompressed HD format with alpha.
Renders video to 8-bit or 10-bit
Note The Matrox Offline HD codec is not supported for rendering clips.
This codec is provided only for playback of legacy Matrox Axio offline HD
projects.
2 If you’ve selected a Matrox codec that requires configuration, click the
button provided by your program that allows you to configure your codec
settings. For more details, see the following sections.
Configuring the Matrox DVCPRO HD codec
When you choose to configure the Matrox DVCPRO HD codec, a dialog box
similar to the following appears:
From the Frame Rate list, make sure that you select the frame rate that matches
the frame rate specified for rendering video in your editing application.
Configuring the Matrox Uncompressed codecs
When you choose to configure a Matrox Uncompressed codec (SD or HD
resolution), a dialog box similar to the following appears:
Chapter 16, Using the Matrox Video for Windows Codecs
231
1 Under Bit Depth, select the bit depth you want for your video.
¦
Note
Matrox RT.X2 does not support 10-bit uncompressed video.
2 Under Scan Mode, select the scan mode of your video.
3 Click OK to save your selection. The settings you selected will be used each
time you render material with your program, until you change the settings
again.
Configuring the Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codecs
When you choose to configure a Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codec (SD or HD
resolution), a dialog box similar to the following appears:
1 Drag the Data Rate slider until your desired data rate is displayed. The
higher the data rate you select, the better the video quality will be.
Depending on the capabilities of your system, however, you may not be able
to smoothly play back video at a high quality using your VFW program.
2 Beside Frame Rate, select a frame rate from the list. Make sure the frame
rate you select is appropriate for the format to which you are rendering.
3 To apply advanced settings to your MPEG-2 I-frame file, click the
Advanced button.
¦
Note The default advanced settings should provide good results for most
applications. It’s recommended that you change these settings only when
needed for special purposes.
4 Beside DC Precision , select the bit-depth precision of the DC intra block.
The higher the DC precision value that’s used to render your video, the more
likely that the DC content will be increased at the expense of the AC content
in the encoded stream. This may result in lowering the overall quality of the
compressed stream at a specified data rate.
5 Under Zig Zag Order, select one of the following:
Rendering material to a Matrox VFW .avi file
232
Sets the regular (default) zig zag scanning pattern of the AC
coefficient of the DCT block as defined in the ISO/IEC 13818-2
(figure 7-2) specification documentation.
$
Regular
$
Alternate
Sets an alternate zig zag scanning pattern of the AC
coefficient of the DCT block as defined in the ISO/IEC 13818-2 (figure
7-3) specification documentation. Use this setting when capturing or
rendering video at a high data rate (for example, at a data rate of 100
Mb/sec or higher).
6 Under Rounding Type, select one of the following:
$
MPEG-2 Rounds the AC coefficients up to the nearest whole number
when calculating the quantization coefficient.
$
Matrox Custom Truncates the AC coefficients to the lowest whole
number when calculating the quantization coefficient. In some cases, this
setting may yield less artifacts in graphics.
7 Select the Force Frame-based DCT setting to render macroblocks as
frames rather than as fields. In some cases, graphics will yield less artifacts if
this option is selected.
8 Click OK to save your settings. The settings you selected will be used each
time you render material with your program, until you change the settings
again.
Chapter 16, Using the Matrox Video for Windows Codecs
17
Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec
with Adobe Software
This chapter explains how to
use the Matrox MAX H.264
codec on your Matrox MXO2
product with MAX technology
or Matrox CompressHD card
to export material to Blu-ray
Disc and other media formats
from Adobe Media Encoder,
Premiere Pro, and Encore.
234
Exporting to Matrox MAX H.264 files using
Adobe Media Encoder
If you have a Matrox MXO2 product with MAX technology or your system
includes a Matrox CompressHD card, you can use the Matrox MAX H.264 codec
on MXO2 or CompressHD to quickly and easily export material to H.264 files
for Blu-ray Disc and other media formats from Adobe Media Encoder. Matrox
presets are provided for creating .264 elementary stream files in HD formats that
are supported for Blu-ray Disc authoring using Adobe Encore, and .mp4 files for
creating files suitable for the web and mobile devices.
Your Matrox .264 elementary stream files can be imported to Adobe Encore
without having to transcode the files. If you prefer, you can choose to transcode
your material to Matrox H.264 format for Blu-ray Disc authoring directly within
Encore as explained in “Transcoding for Blu-ray Disc authoring in Adobe
Encore” on page 241.
If you’d like to capture clips directly to Matrox MAX H.264 files, see Chapter
18, “Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture.”
Remarks
• When the Matrox MAX H.264 codec on your MXO2 is in use for export,
your MXO2 inputs and outputs won’t be available. You’ll be able to continue
working in Adobe Premiere Pro, but the video preview and output won’t be
updated until the encoding is complete. In order to perform a capture, use
Matrox A/V Tools, or use the Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins, you’ll have to
wait until the encoding is complete. These limitations, however, don’t apply
if your system includes a Matrox CompressHD card. In this case, the Matrox
MAX H.264 codec on your CompressHD card will be used for the encoding,
and your MXO2 hardware will be available for other tasks (except when
embedding closed captioning in an exported Matrox .mp4 file).
• When you export an Adobe Premiere Pro sequence, the speed of the export
is affected by the rendering of any non-realtime sections of the sequence. If
your sequence’s video format matches your export format and you’ve
rendered previews of non-realtime sections, you can select Use Previews in
the Export Settings dialog box prior to performing your export. When you
do this, Premiere Pro won’t need to render the non-realtime sections for
which you’ve already created preview files.
• If you want to export a single Adobe Premiere Pro sequence, you may find it
more convenient and get faster results if you don’t export from Adobe Media
Encoder, and instead perform a direct export from Adobe Premiere Pro.
You’ll also need to perform a direct export if you want closed captioning in
your sequence to be embedded in your exported Matrox .mp4 file. For details
Chapter 17, Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
235
on this feature, see “Performing a direct export of an Adobe Premiere Pro
sequence” on page 239.
° To export material to a Matrox MAX H.264 file:
1 Start Adobe Media Encoder and add the clip, sequence, or composition that
you want to export as explained in your Adobe documentation, then click
Settings to display the Export Settings dialog box.
2 From the Format list, select one of the following Matrox formats:
$
Matrox 264 (Blu-ray) Creates a .264 elementary stream file, which is
supported for Blu-ray Disc authoring. Audio is exported as separate mono
or stereo .wav files (PCM audio).
$
Matrox MP4 Creates an .mp4 file with embedded stereo AAC audio,
which is suitable for the web and mobile devices.
3 From the Preset list, select the preset that matches the video format you
want for your exported file. Appropriate video and audio settings are
automatically set based on your selected preset.
¦
Note If you’re exporting to a Matrox .mp4 file, two types of presets will be
available—Fast Encode and High Quality. Select a Fast Encode preset for fast
encoding that leverages your system’s resources with your Matrox hardware.
Select a High Quality preset for high-quality encoding that is performed
entirely by your Matrox hardware, which frees your system’s resources for
other tasks.
Exporting to Matrox MAX H.264 files using Adobe Media Encoder
236
4 Select Export Video and Export Audio if you want to export both video
and audio.
5 Click the Video tab to display the settings for your exported video.
6 Under Codec, click Configure to customize your Matrox MAX H.264
codec settings as explained in “Specifying your Matrox MAX H.264
settings” on page 244.
¥ Tip You can check the Estimated File Size at the bottom of the dialog
box to determine the approximate file size of your exported material based
on your currently selected settings. If needed, you can change your Matrox
MAX H.264 settings to better meet your file size requirements, such as by
selecting a different encoding type and lower data rate.
7 Under Video, you can customize the settings that you want for your
exported video:
$
Frame Size Sets the width and height for your exported video. When
exporting to a Matrox .264 file, the available frame sizes are 1920 x 1080
and 1280 x 720. When exporting to a Matrox .mp4 file, you can select a
Chapter 17, Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
237
frame size, or select Custom (Square Pixels) if you want to enter a
custom size. If you enter an unsupported frame size, the closest supported
frame size will be used.
Sets the frame rate for your exported video.
$
Frame Rate
$
Field Type Indicates the order in which the video fields are displayed,
such as Upper First for interlaced HD video, or Progressive for all
progressive video formats.
This is set to 16:9 when exporting to HD. When
exporting to SD, you can select 4:3 to export to the standard TV screen
format, or 16:9 to export to the widescreen 16:9 format.
$
Aspect Ratio
$
Maintain aspect ratio when scaling
$
Use Matrox MAX hardware scaler Select this option if you’re
scaling your source video for export, and you want to use the Matrox
MAX hardware scaler to perform the scaling. This gives good
performance when scaling to an HD resolution. If you’re downscaling to
an SD or lower resolution, you can get a faster export by clearing this
option, which allows Adobe to perform the scaling.
$
De-interlace video If you’re exporting interlaced video to a
progressive format (such as 1080i to 720p), select this option to
de-interlace the video for display on a monitor that displays lines
progressively, such as an LCD or computer monitor. (This option won’t be
present if you’re exporting to an interlaced format or your source video is
progressive.)
Select this option if you’re
scaling your source video for export, and you want to maintain your
source video’s aspect ratio. Your source video will be exported as
pillarbox video when exporting to a larger aspect ratio, or letterbox video
when exporting to a smaller aspect ratio. If this option is not selected,
scaled video that doesn’t match the specified aspect ratio for export will
be exported as anamorphic video.
Exporting to Matrox MAX H.264 files using Adobe Media Encoder
238
8 Click the Audio tab to display the settings for your exported audio. The
available settings depend on whether you’re exporting to a Matrox .264 or
.mp4 file.
9 Under Audio, you can customize the settings that you want for your
exported audio:
¦
$
Audio Codec This is set to Uncompressed when exporting to a
Matrox .264 file, or AAC when exporting to an .mp4 file.
$
Sample Rate
$
Output Channels Specifies the audio channels to be exported (set to
Stereo when exporting to a Matrox .mp4 file).
This is set to 48 kHz.
Note When exporting audio from an Adobe Premiere Pro sequence to a
Matrox .264 file, the available output channels depend on the type of audio
tracks being exported. For example, you can select Surround 5.1 to export
5.1 surround tracks to six mono .wav files. For a 16-channel track, you can
select Mono or Stereo to export the audio to a single mono or stereo .wav file.
You can select 16-bit or 24-bit.
$
Sample Size
$
Bitrate For AAC audio, drag the bitrate slider to select the bitrate you
want for your exported audio.
10 Click Start Queue (
) to start the export.
For more information about using Adobe Media Encoder and specifying export
settings, see your Adobe Media Encoder or Premiere Pro documentation.
Chapter 17, Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
239
Performing a direct export of an Adobe
Premiere Pro sequence
When you export an Adobe Premiere Pro sequence from within Adobe Media
Encoder, additional processing is required to transfer the sequence from Premiere
Pro to Media Encoder. If you want to export only a single sequence to a Matrox
MAX H.264 file (.264 or .mp4 file), you may find it more convenient and get
faster results by performing a direct export as explained in this section. If you’ll
be exporting to a Matrox .mp4 file and you want the closed captioning in your
sequence to be embedded in your exported file, you must perform a direct export
from Adobe Premiere Pro because this feature is not supported when you export
a sequence from Adobe Media Encoder.
¦
Note A direct export can’t be used for batch encoding of Premiere Pro
sequences. As well, you won’t be able to work in Premiere Pro while your
sequence is being exported. If you want to batch encode sequences to Matrox
MAX H.264 files or continue to work in Premiere Pro while exporting, you must
export from Media Encoder. To avoid problems, don’t perform a direct export
and use Media Encoder independently to export Matrox MAX H.264 files at the
same time.
° To perform a direct export of a Premiere Pro sequence:
1 Unless you want to export your entire sequence, position the work area bar
over the section of the sequence you want to export.
2 Choose File > Export > Media.
3 In the Export Settings dialog box, select your desired Matrox format,
preset, video settings, and audio settings as explained in “Exporting to
Matrox MAX H.264 files using Adobe Media Encoder” on page 234 (see
steps 2 to 9).
Performing a direct export of an Adobe Premiere Pro sequence
240
4 If you’ve attached a closed caption data file to your sequence and you’d like
the closed captioning to be embedded in your exported Matrox .mp4 file,
under Video, select Embed closed captioning in file :
Remarks
$
Your sequence can have either an attached .mcc or .scc data file. However,
if you’ve attached an .mcc file to your sequence, it must contain CEA-608
data in order for the closed captions to be embedded in your exported
Matrox .mp4 file.
$
Embedding of closed captioning is supported only when exporting a
sequence that has a frame rate of 29.97 fps to an export format that also
has a frame rate of 29.97 fps.
$
The closed captioning in your Matrox .mp4 file can be displayed when
you play back the file using supported applications and mobile devices
that are capable of playing back .mp4 files with closed captioning. If you
don’t see the closed captioning when you play back your Matrox .mp4
file, try changing the file’s extension to .m4v.
5 From the Source Range list in the Source panel, select the range you want
to export, such as Work Area.
6 Click Export to immediately start your export.
Chapter 17, Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
241
Transcoding for Blu-ray Disc authoring in
Adobe Encore
Instead of exporting material to a Matrox .264 file from Adobe Media Encoder or
Premiere Pro and then importing the file into Adobe Encore for Blu-ray Disc
authoring, you can choose to perform the transcoding directly within Encore. The
transcoding will be accelerated using the Matrox MAX H.264 codec.
° To transcode to Matrox H.264 format for Blu-ray Disc authoring:
1 Start Adobe Encore, create a new Blu-ray project, and import the asset (clip
or Premiere Pro sequence) that you want to transcode as explained in your
Adobe Encore documentation.
2 Right-click the clip or sequence in the Project panel, choose Transcode
Settings, and click Edit Quality Presets to display the Export Settings
dialog box:
3 From the Format list, select Matrox H.264 Blu-ray, and from the Preset
list, select the preset that matches the video format you want for the
transcoding. Appropriate video and audio settings are automatically set
based on your selected preset.
¦
Note Only Matrox presets that are compatible with your project’s settings
will be available. The Matrox presets transcode video to Matrox .264 files and
audio to .wav files. If you want to transcode .wav files that you’ve imported
to Adobe Encore, you must use an Adobe preset.
Transcoding for Blu-ray Disc authoring in Adobe Encore
242
4 Click the Video tab to display the settings for your transcoded video.
5 Under Codec, click Configure to customize your Matrox MAX H.264
codec settings as explained in “Specifying your Matrox MAX H.264
settings” on page 244.
¥ Tip You can check the Estimated File Size at the bottom of the dialog
box to determine the approximate file size of your transcoded material based
on your currently selected settings. If needed, you can change your Matrox
MAX H.264 settings to better meet your file size requirements, such as by
selecting a different encoding type and lower data rate.
6 Under Video, you can customize the settings that you want for your
transcoded video:
$
Frame Size
Sets the width and height for your transcoded video.
$
Frame Rate
Sets the frame rate for your transcoded video.
$
Field Type Indicates the order in which the video fields are displayed,
such as Upper First for interlaced HD video, or Progressive for all
progressive video formats.
Chapter 17, Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
243
This is set to 16:9.
$
Aspect Ratio
$
De-interlace video If you’re transcoding interlaced video to a
progressive format (such as 1080i to 720p), select this option to
de-interlace the video for display on a monitor that displays lines
progressively, such as an LCD or computer monitor. (This option won’t be
present if you’re transcoding to an interlaced format or your source video
is progressive.)
$
Maintain aspect ratio when scaling
$
Use Matrox MAX hardware scaler When scaling your source video
for transcoding to HD for Blu-ray Disc, it’s recommended that you select
this option to use the Matrox MAX hardware scaler to perform the
scaling.
Select this option if you’re
scaling your source video for transcoding, and you want to maintain your
source video’s aspect ratio. Your source video will be transcoded as
pillarbox video when transcoding SD video to HD for Blu-ray Disc
authoring. If this option is not selected, scaled video that doesn’t match
the specified aspect ratio will be transcoded as anamorphic video.
7 Click the Audio tab to display the settings for your transcoded audio.
8 Under Audio, you can customize the settings that you want for your
transcoded audio:
¦
$
Audio Codec
This is set to Uncompressed.
$
Sample Rate
This is set to 48 kHz.
$
Output Channels
Specifies the audio channels to be transcoded.
Note When transcoding audio from an Adobe Premiere Pro sequence to
Matrox H.264 format for Blu-ray Disc authoring, the available output channels
depend on the type of audio tracks being transcoded. For example, you can
select Surround 5.1 to transcode 5.1 surround tracks.
$
Sample Size
You can select 16-bit or 24-bit.
Transcoding for Blu-ray Disc authoring in Adobe Encore
244
9 Click OK to save your settings. If you changed any of the preset settings,
you’ll be prompted to name the preset.
10 Right-click the clip or sequence that you want to transcode in the Project
panel, and choose Transcode Now to start the transcoding.
For more information about using Adobe Encore and specifying transcode
settings, see your Adobe Encore documentation.
Specifying your Matrox MAX H.264 settings
When creating Matrox MAX H.264 files (Matrox .264 or .mp4 files), appropriate
codec settings are applied based on the Matrox preset you selected. If needed,
you can customize the settings that you want for the H.264 compression.
Chapter 17, Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
245
° To select your Matrox MAX H.264 settings:
1 Click the Configure button provided for the Matrox MAX H.264 codec
settings.
Specifying your Matrox MAX H.264 settings
246
2 Under H.264 Level, select the H.264 level that you want for your encoded
video. The available levels depend on your encoded video’s frame size and
frame rate.
H.264 level
Maximum
frame size
Maximum
frame rate
(fps)
Maximum
data rate
(Mb/sec)
2.0
352 ×288
29.97
2
3.0
720 ×576
29.97
10
3.1
1280×720
29.97
14
4.0
1920 ×1080
29.97
20
4.1
1920 ×1080
29.97
50
4.2
1920 ×1080
59.94
50
Remarks
$
Use H.264 level 4.0 if you want to create Matrox MAX H.264 files
intended for mass replication of Blu-ray Discs. You can use either level
4.0 or 4.1 if you want to author and burn individual copies that are
compatible with Blu-ray Disc players.
$
Use H.264 level 3.1 to create HD video for use with Apple iPad.
3 Under Algorithm, select the entropy coding method to be used during
compression:
$
CABAC Encodes the video stream using the H.264 Main profile. This is
the only method available for Matrox .264 files.
$
CAVLC
Encodes the video stream using the H.264 Baseline profile.
This method is recommended when creating Matrox .mp4 files at small
frame sizes, such as for Apple iPhone devices or the web.
4 Under Data Rate (Mb/sec), you can select the encoding type and various
data rate settings for the H.264 compression.
$
Encoding Type
From this list, select one of the following:
Video is compressed at varying data rates
based on the complexity of the video and your specified minimum and
maximum data rates. The Matrox MAX H.264 codec analyzes and
encodes each frame to deliver the highest possible quality at your target
data rate.
•
Variable bit rate (VBR)
•
Constant bit rate (CBR) Video is compressed at your specified
target data rate, which is useful when you need to limit or predict the
size of your video file. However, if your video is very complex (such as
scenes with many colors, sharp edges, or transitions), you’ll need to
Chapter 17, Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
247
specify a high target data rate to avoid having frames of blocky video in
your file.
¦
Note When creating Matrox .264 files for Blu-ray Disc authoring, it’s
recommended that you use a constant bit rate.
•
¦
Use these sliders to select
your desired data rate. The higher the target data rate you select, the
better the video quality will be. Only the Target data rate will be
available if you selected Constant bit rate (CBR). If you selected
Variable bit rate (VBR) , all three sliders will be available so that you
can set the target, minimum, and maximum data rates for the video
compression.
Target/Minimum/Maximum data rate
Note When customizing the settings for a Matrox .264 file, be aware that
Matrox .264 files that have a data rate higher than about 30 Mb/sec may require
transcoding in Adobe Encore. The maximum H.264 level and data rate
accepted by Adobe Encore for Blu-ray Disc authoring with audio and video
is level 4.1 at 35 Mb/sec.
(Variable data rate only) Specifies the
complexity level of your source video. A complex video can be defined
as containing scenes with many colors, sharp edges, or transitions. The
Matrox MAX H.264 codec uses this setting to determine how much
compression is required in order to deliver high-quality video at your
specified target data rate. The default setting (15) is suitable for most
moderately complex videos. For simpler or more complex videos, you
may need to adjust this setting to obtain the highest-quality encoding
possible while respecting your target data rate. If the size of your
encoded video is good but the quality can be improved, lower the
complexity level setting. Your video will then be encoded with less
compression. If the quality of your encoded video is good but the size
is larger than expected, raise the complexity level setting. Your video
will then be encoded with more compression. In any case, you may
need to try different settings to get your desired results.
•
Source video complexity
•
Sample rate
•
Data rate adjustment When the current encoding data rate does not
match your specified target data rate, this setting determines how
quickly the current data rate is adjusted to reach the target data rate. A
gradual adjustment produces smoother transitions than a quick
adjustment.
Determines how frequently the Matrox MAX H.264
codec verifies the current data rate while encoding and compares it to
your selected target data rate. If a discrepancy exists between the
current and target data rates, the current data rate is adjusted as
specified by the Data rate adjustment setting (see below).
Specifying your Matrox MAX H.264 settings
248
5 Under GOP Structure, select the GOP structure that you want to be used to
encode your video:
$
¦
Select one of the following GOP types (can be changed for
CABAC encoding only):
GOP type
•
Simple GOP Offers a fixed structure in how frames are referenced,
and may be more easily decoded than advanced GOPs. This is the
recommended GOP type when creating Matrox .264 files for Blu-ray
Disc authoring.
•
Advanced GOP (short/long) An advanced GOP has more
structural flexibility than a simple GOP, is capable of using more
reference frames, and therefore may provide better overall
compression. For a “short” advanced GOP, the distance between P
frames is always 4, and for a “long” advanced GOP, the distance
between P frames is always 8. Advanced GOPs may not be compatible
with some Blu-ray Disc players, and may cause stability issues in
Adobe Encore when burning a Blu-ray Disc.
Note The GOP type provides standard default values for the GOP size and
the distance between P frames. You can change these default values as
explained below.
$
GOP size Drag the slider to select the number of frames in the GOP
(must be a multiple of the distance between P frames). When creating a
Matrox .264 file for Blu-ray, the GOP size must be less than one second of
video. For example, if the frame rate for your encoded video is 29.97 fps,
the GOP size must be 29 frames or less.
$
Distance between P frames
Drag the slider to select the number of
frames between P frames in the GOP (can be changed for a simple GOP
only).
6 Drag the Noise Filter slider to set the level of noise filtering that you want to
apply to your video before encoding. Increasing the noise filter level reduces
the amount of high frequencies in your source video by softening the
high-detail portions of your video. Since high frequencies require more bits
to encode, increasing the noise filter level leaves more bits available for the
encoding of other frames, which can improve the overall quality of your
encoded video. However, if you lose too much detail in your encoded video
you may need to decrease the noise filter level.
7 Click OK to save your settings.
Chapter 17, Using the Matrox MAX H.264 Codec with Adobe Software
18
Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
This chapter explains how to
use the Matrox MAX H.264
Capture application to capture
clips to various formats on
Matrox MXO2 products with
MAX technology or a Matrox
CompressHD card.
250
Overview
The Matrox MAX H.264 Capture application lets you use your Matrox MXO2
product with MAX technology or a Matrox CompressHD card to capture clips
directly to Matrox MAX H.264 files for Blu-ray Disc, the web, and mobile
devices. You can also use this application to capture clips to Matrox MPEG-2
I-frame or uncompressed .avi files.
You can capture material from any of your MXO2’s video and audio inputs, and
monitor the source material that you’re capturing using the MXO2 video and
audio outputs. Matrox presets are provided for capturing clips to various formats
for creating .264, .mp4, and .avi files. This includes presets for creating .264
elementary stream files in HD formats that are supported for Blu-ray Disc
authoring using Adobe Encore, and .mp4 files suitable for the web and mobile
devices. Your Matrox .264 elementary stream files can be imported to Adobe
Encore without having to transcode the files.
Remarks
• When performing a capture, your MXO2 hardware won’t be available for
use with any other application. For example, you’ll be able to work in Adobe
Premiere Pro, but you won’t be able to perform a capture or export to a
Matrox MAX H.264 file, and the video preview and output won’t be updated
until your capture is complete.
• If your MXO2 hardware is in use by another application while running the
Matrox MAX H.264 Capture application, you’ll get a warning and you
won’t be able to perform a capture or preview your video input until your
MXO2 hardware becomes available.
• If you want to run Adobe Encore at the same time as the Matrox MAX
H.264 Capture application, you must set your video and audio output devices
in Encore to Adobe devices only.
Chapter 18, Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
251
How to capture clips
1 Connect the video and audio input sources from which you want to capture
clips to the corresponding inputs on your MXO2 hardware.
2 Choose Start > Programs > Matrox Mtx.utils> Matrox MAX H.264
Capture .
3 Click Input Settings to select your video and audio input settings for
capturing clips as explained in “Specifying your input settings” on page 252.
4 Click Output Settings to select your video and audio output settings for
monitoring the source material that you’re capturing as explained in
“Specifying your output settings” on page 254.
5 Select a preset for the type of clips that you want to capture. The Matrox
presets available depend on the frame rate of your video input source.
6 Click the Advanced button to review the settings provided by your selected
preset and make any required changes as explained in “Specifying your
capture format settings” on page 256.
How to capture clips
252
7 Click Capture to specify where you want to store your captured clips, the
base filename to use, and start capturing clips as explained in “Starting your
capture” on page 260.
Specifying your input settings
To specify your video and audio input settings for capturing clips, click the Input
Settings button.
1 From the Video Input Format list, select the video format that matches
your source video. For a list of the video input formats supported on the
various MXO2 inputs for capturing clips, see “Supported input formats” on
page 290.
¦
Note If you select a 1080PsF video input format, you won’t be able to
capture to a 1080i format. As a workaround, select a 1080i video input format,
even though your connected video input is actually 1080PsF.
2 From the Input Aspect Ratio list, select the aspect ratio of your SD source
video (4:3 or 16:9). For example, to capture SD video that was recorded
using the standard TV screen format, select 4:3. To capture SD video that
was recorded using the widescreen 16:9 format, select 16:9. If you’re
capturing HD video, the Input Aspect Ratio will be set to 16:9.
3 From the Video Input Source list, select the type of input you want to
capture. For example, to capture material from your HDMI source, select
HDMI . The available video input sources depend on your selected video
input format.
Chapter 18, Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
253
4 From the Audio Input Source list, select your audio source. For example, if
you want to capture the embedded audio of your HDMI source, select HDMI
(embedded audio). This may be set for you based on your selected video
input source.
¦
Note When capturing HDMI embedded audio, only uncompressed
embedded audio is supported.
5 From the Input Type list, select the type of equipment you’re using for
capture:
Select this if your source device is
broadcast-quality. This setting provides the best capture results for most
devices.
$
Broadcast-quality Source
$
Consumer-quality Source Select this if you’re having problems
capturing video because your source device doesn’t meet
broadcast-quality standards. For example, the capture may be interrupted
when you try to capture from certain composite and S-Video devices,
especially from low-quality VCRs. If this happens, selecting
Consumer-quality Source will allow the video to be captured, but you
may experience dropped frames during the capture.
6 Select Use Automatic Gain Control (AGC) if you want the gain of your
composite or S-Video input signal to be adjusted automatically to
compensate for very bright or dark images. This improves the brightness or
contrast of your picture.
7 Click OK to save your settings. Your selected video source will play back in
the Preview Window of the Matrox MAX H.264 Capture dialog box.
¦
Note If your source video is HD and you choose to capture to a Matrox .avi
file, video in the Preview Window will be scaled to quarter-size, and the frame
rate of video played back in the Preview Window may also be reduced.
Specifying your input settings
254
Specifying your output settings
To specify the output settings you want for monitoring the source material that
you’re capturing, click the Output Settings button.
¦
Note For a list of the supported video output formats for monitoring the video
that you’re capturing, see “Supported video output formats for monitoring” on
page 307.
1 Under Analog Output, you can specify the settings you want for your
analog output from MXO2.
$
Output Type Specifies the analog video output type. If you’re
outputting SD video on MXO2, MXO2 Rack, or MXO2 LE, this will be
set to All Available to indicate that the output will be available on all the
analog outputs. On MXO2 Mini, you can select Component, or
Composite & S-Video if you’re outputting SD video. When outputting
HD analog video, the output type will be set to Component (on MXO2
Mini, the composite and S-Video outputs are invalid when outputting
component video).
$
Setup (NTSC) Use this to select the setup level you want for your
NTSC analog video:
•
0 IRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE. You should select this option
only when working with a commercial DV device that uses the
Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE. For example, if the video
appears too bright when you preview DV video on your NTSC monitor,
Chapter 18, Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
255
you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output the video at the correct
brightness.
•
7.5 IRE
Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7.5 IRE.
Select YUV or RGB to set the type of video signal that is
sent from the component output. For example, select RGB if you
connected the component output to a device that accepts an RGB signal.
$
YUV/RGB
$
Under HDMI Output, select the type of video signal that you want to be
sent from the HDMI output:
•
YUV Outputs YUV HDMI video. Select this only if you connected
the HDMI output to a device that accepts a YUV signal.
•
RGB - calibrated
•
RGB - native
Outputs adjusted RGB HDMI video using the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings for your HDMI
monitor or television. For details on calibrating your HDMI monitor
and loading calibration settings using the Matrox HDMI Calibration
Utility, see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for Video.”
Outputs native RGB HDMI video that does not apply
any calibration compensation. Select this when you want to disable the
currently loaded Matrox HDMI calibration settings and output RGB
HDMI video from MXO2 using its native color settings for previewing
video on your HDMI monitor.
2 Under SDI Audio Output Format, select the bit depth you want for your
embedded SDI audio output (20-bit or 24-bit). This setting is not available
on MXO2 Mini.
3 Under Analog Audio Volume, drag the sliders to adjust the volume of your
analog audio output. By default, the sliders are locked so that they move
together. To move each slider independently, click the lock button (
) to
disable it.
4 Under Advanced , you can use the Analog SC/H Phase slider to advance or
delay your analog video output’s subcarrier phase with respect to the
horizontal sync of the genlock source (for composite video only). This
setting is not available on MXO2 Mini.
5 Click OK to save your settings.
Specifying your output settings
256
Specifying your capture format settings
When you select a capture preset, appropriate capture format settings are
automatically applied for you. To review or change any of these settings, click the
Advanced button.
1 Under Video Capture Format, you can select the video format settings you
want for your captured clips. For a list of the supported capture formats
based on your selected video input format, see “Supported capture formats
for Matrox MAX H.264 Capture” on page 294.
$
File Type
•
Select one of the following Matrox formats:
Matrox 264 (Blu-ray) Creates a .264 elementary stream file, which
is supported for Blu-ray Disc authoring. Audio is captured as separate
mono or stereo .aac files (AAC audio) or .wav files (PCM audio).
Chapter 18, Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
257
$
•
Matrox MP4 Creates an .mp4 file with embedded stereo AAC audio,
which is suitable for the web and mobile devices. You can choose to
also capture audio to separate .wav files (PCM audio), and select an
option to simultaneously capture to a Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame .avi file
in the same format as your source video.
•
Matrox AVI Creates an MPEG-2 I-frame or uncompressed .avi file.
Audio is embedded in the .avi file and also captured as separate .wav
files (PCM audio).
If you’re capturing to a Matrox .264 or .mp4 file, the codec
will be set to Matrox MAX H.264. If you’re capturing to a Matrox .avi
file, select the codec that you want to use for the capture:
Codec Type
•
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame Captures video to MPEG-2 intra-frame
format using the 4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level (for SD resolutions) or
High Level (for HD resolutions) at a selected data rate.
•
Matrox 8-bit Uncompressed
Captures video to 8-bit
uncompressed format.
•
Matrox 10-bit Uncompressed
uncompressed format.
Captures video to 10-bit
Click this to configure your codec settings (for the Matrox
MAX H.264 and MPEG-2 I-frame codecs only). The Matrox MAX H.264
settings are the same as when you export clips as explained in “Specifying
your Matrox MAX H.264 settings” on page 244. The Matrox MPEG-2
I-frame settings are the same as when capturing clips using Adobe
Premiere Pro as explained in “Selecting your MPEG-2 I-frame settings”
on page 80.
$
Configure
$
Frame Size Sets the width and height for your captured video. The
available frame sizes depend on your specified file type, codec, and
source video format. When capturing to a Matrox .264 or .avi file, only
standard SD and/or HD frame sizes are available. When capturing to a
Matrox .mp4 file, you can select a frame size, or select Custom if you
want to enter a custom size. If you enter an unsupported frame size, the
closest supported frame size will be used.
$
Frame Rate
Sets the frame rate for your captured video. When
capturing to a Matrox .264 or .avi file, an appropriate frame rate is
automatically set based on your selected frame size and the frame rate of
your source video. When capturing to a Matrox .mp4 file, you can select a
frame rate from the list of compatible frame rates. For example, if your
source video is 29.97 fps, you can set the frame rate for your captured
video to 14.98, 29.97, or 59.94. Frame rates of 50 and 59.94, however, are
supported only when the frame size is set to 1280×720.
Specifying your capture format settings
258
¦
Note When using the Matrox MAX H.264 codec to capture to a 1440×1080
or 1920 ×1080 progressive video format, the highest supported frame rate is
29.97 fps. The specified frame size and frame rate determine the H.264 levels
available for your encoded video. For details on the maximum frame size and
frame rate supported for each H.264 level, see “Specifying your Matrox MAX
H.264 settings” on page 244.
$
Scan Mode Determines the scan mode of your captured video
(Interlaced or Progressive). This may be automatically set for you
based on your specified file type, frame size, and source video format.
$
Aspect Ratio
$
Aspect Ratio Conversion
$
This is set to 16:9 when capturing to HD. When
capturing to SD, you can select 4:3 to capture to the standard TV screen
format, or 16:9 to capture to the widescreen 16:9 format.
If your source video and captured video
have different aspect ratios, select the option that you want for the aspect
ratio conversion:
•
16x9 Letterbox Captures the widescreen 16:9 picture as letterbox
video by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for
display on a standard 4:3 television screen.
•
4x3 Pillarbox Captures the standard 4:3 picture as pillarbox video by
adding black bars at the left and right sides of the picture for display on
a widescreen 16:9 television screen. (This option is not available for
frame sizes smaller than 720 ×576.)
•
Anamorphic Captures the video as horizontally or vertically
compressed video (the aspect ratio of your source video is not
maintained).
•
Center Cut
•
Center Zoom
Captures the widescreen 16:9 picture by evenly cropping
the left and right sides of the picture for display on a standard 4:3
television screen.
Captures the standard 4:3 picture by evenly cropping
the top and bottom edges of the picture for display on a widescreen
16:9 television screen.
Also capture Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame AVI Select this if you’re
capturing to a Matrox .mp4 file, and you’d like to simultaneously capture
to a Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame .avi file in the same format as your source
video. For example, if your source video is 1080i @ 29.97 fps, your
Matrox .avi file will also be 1080i @ 29.97 fps. To configure your
MPEG-2 I-frame codec settings, click Configure. The settings are the
same as when capturing clips using Adobe Premiere Pro as explained in
“Selecting your MPEG-2 I-frame settings” on page 80.
2 Under Audio Capture Format, you can select the audio format settings you
want for your captured clips:
Chapter 18, Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
259
$
¦
File Type
Specifies the type of audio files to be captured:
•
AAC Captures AAC audio to separate .aac files (for Matrox .264 files
only).
•
WAV Captures PCM audio to separate .wav files. For Matrox .mp4
files, stereo AAC audio will also be embedded in the .mp4 file.
•
Matrox MP4 Captures stereo AAC audio that is embedded in the
Matrox .mp4 file (separate .wav files will not be created).
Note When capturing to a Matrox .mp4 file with simultaneous capture to a
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame .avi file, stereo audio will be embedded in the .mp4
and .avi files. When capturing to a Matrox .avi file only, audio is always
captured to separate .wav files, and the channels that you choose to save to the
first stereo .wav file or first two mono .wav files will be embedded in the
associated .avi file.
$
Channel Type Select Stereo to save your captured audio to stereo
files, or Mono to save your captured audio to mono files. This is set to
Stereo for embedded AAC audio in Matrox .mp4 files.
$
Format
$
AAC bit rate For AAC audio, drag the bit rate slider to select the bit
rate (in kilobits per second) that you want for your captured audio.
$
From the Filename lists, select which stereo pairs or mono channels you
want to capture for each file.
Select the format for your captured audio (16-bit or 24-bit).
•
When capturing to a Matrox .mp4 file with only embedded AAC audio,
you can select one stereo pair to be embedded in the .mp4 file (only one
Filename list will be available). When capturing to a Matrox .mp4 file
with separate .wav files, the channels that you choose to save to the first
stereo .wav file or first two mono .wav files will be embedded in the
associated .mp4 file, and the associated .avi file if you’re
simultaneously capturing to a Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame .avi file.
•
When capturing to separate .aac or .wav files, you can select up to four
stereo channels or up to eight mono channels, depending on the type of
audio being captured. Select None for the particular files that you
don’t want, or click the D (default) button for each Filename list if you
want to capture only channels 1 and 2. When Matrox MXO2 saves
separate audio files, it assigns a .Stereo or .Mono suffix to the base
name of the associated video file. For example, if you’re capturing to
separate .wav files and your video file is named MyFile.001.264, the
associated stereo audio files will be named MyFile.001.Stereo1.wav,
MyFile.001.Stereo2.wav, etc.
3 Under Automatic File Switch, you can indicate whether you want the
capture to automatically switch to the next clip after a specified time or file
Specifying your capture format settings
260
size limit has been reached (available only when capturing to Matrox .mp4
files without .wav or .avi files).
¦
$
Every n minutes Select this option to specify the number of minutes
after which you want the capture to switch to the next clip.
$
Every n GB Select this option to specify the maximum file size (in
gigabytes) after which you want the capture to switch to the next clip.
Note If you select both automatic file switch options, the capture will switch
to the next clip based on the limit that is reached first (minutes or file size).
Be aware that your captured clips won’t have exactly the same duration or file
size because the capture must always end at a GOP boundary.
4 If you’d like to save your changes as a custom preset, click the Save (
)
button beside the preset list in the Matrox MAX H.264 Capture dialog box.
You’ll then be prompted to enter a name for your custom preset.
¦
Note To delete a custom preset, select the preset and click the Delete (
button.
)
Starting your capture
Once you’ve specified your input, output, and capture format settings, you’re
ready to start capturing clips. To do this, click the Capture button.
1 Enter the capture path and subfolder where you want to store your captured
clips, or click Browse to select the location that you want.
2 A default filename will be provided as the base name for your captured clips.
You can change this name if you want. When capturing to Matrox .mp4 files
using the automatic file switching feature, your clips will be numbered
Chapter 18, Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
261
sequentially with a three-digit suffix, such as MyClip.000.mp4,
MyClip.001.mp4, and so on.
¦
Note Each time you start a new capture, the base filename will be
incremented accordingly with a _n suffix (for example, _1, _2, and so on).
3 Click Explore to open Windows Explorer. You can then go to your capture
folder and delete any clips that you no longer need, and you’ll be able to see
your clips being added as they are captured.
4 If you’re capturing to Matrox .mp4 files without .wav or .avi files, you can
select the automatic file switching options that you want, such as to switch to
the next clip after a specified time limit. These options are the same as
provided in the Matrox Capture Format Settings dialog box (see
“Specifying your capture format settings” on page 256).
5 To limit the capture to a maximum duration, enter the duration (in minutes)
that you want in the Maximum Duration box. The capture will
automatically stop once this limit has been reached.
¦
Note Keep the maximum duration close to the actual maximum that you
want. If the maximum duration is a lot longer than you need, the file size of
your clips will be larger.
6 Make sure that your video source is playing in the Preview Window, and
click Start Capture to start the capture (the button will change to Stop
Capture ).
7 If you’re capturing to Matrox .mp4 files without .wav or .avi files, you can
click Switch File at any time during the capture to switch the capture to the
next file.
8 To stop the capture before the maximum duration is reached, click the Stop
Capture button.
Starting your capture
262
Your notes
Chapter 18, Using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
19
Monitoring Your Matrox MXO2 System
This chapter explains how to
use the Matrox X.info program
to display important details
about your Matrox MXO2
system and installed hardware.
264
Using X.info to display MXO2 information
The Matrox X.info program lets you display information about your Matrox
MXO2 system and installed hardware, and provides warnings when certain
problems arise, such as when the temperature of your MXO2 exceeds the
maximum operating temperature.
Matrox X.info runs continuously to monitor your system, whenever your
computer is turned on and the MXO2 is connected. You can open Matrox X.info
to display system and hardware details by double-clicking the
icon on your
Windows taskbar.
¦
Note If you do not see the icon, check your taskbar properties and make sure
that you’re showing the icon for Matrox X.info.
Displaying system information
To display information about your Matrox MXO2 system, select System from
the Display Information About list. On this page, you can see Install
Information, such as the install path and version of Matrox Mtx.utils.
You can also create an HTML log file of your system information, which can be
useful for troubleshooting. To create this log, use the Browse button under
System Information Log to select the path and name of the log, then click
Chapter 19, Monitoring Your Matrox MXO2 System
265
Create . If Open file after scan is selected, the HTML system log opens after it
is created.
If you had previously turned off certain Matrox warnings and want them to be
re-enabled, click Re-enable Warnings . For example, some Matrox warnings
provide an option to turn off the warning (that is, you can select Don’t display
this message again). Clicking Re-enable Warnings allows these warnings to
be displayed again.
Using X.info to display MXO2 information
266
Displaying hardware information
To display information about your Matrox MXO2 hardware, select Hardware
from the Display Information About list. This displays a page with hardware
information (for example, serial number and production date). You can also
monitor the current and maximum operating temperatures for your MXO2
hardware.
¡ Important Whether or not you have opened Matrox X.info, if your MXO2
exceeds the maximum operating temperature, you’ll receive a warning message
with further instructions as explained in the section “Error notification” on
page 267.
Chapter 19, Monitoring Your Matrox MXO2 System
267
Monitoring your MXO2’s operating
temperatures
As shown in the X.info Hardware section, the MXO2 page displays the current
and maximum operating temperatures for your Matrox MXO2 hardware. To
avoid damage to your Matrox MXO2, make sure that you don’t operate your
MXO2 at or near the maximum temperature for a prolonged period of time. You
should target your MXO2 to operate at least 10°C below the maximum operating
temperature.
You should monitor the temperature of your MXO2 periodically and take
measures as needed to lower the room temperature and/or make sure that the
MXO2 is not close to a heat source and the MXO2 ventilation holes are not
obstructed.
Error notification
X.info provides temperature warnings and warnings for other possible MXO2
hardware problems. Once X.info has detected a hardware problem, the Matrox
X.info Notification dialog box will be displayed to give you details of the
problem and further instructions. You will not be able to close this dialog box
until the problem has been resolved.
Using X.info to display MXO2 information
268
Your notes
Chapter 19, Monitoring Your Matrox MXO2 System
A
Understanding Pulldown
This appendix describes the
available MXO2 pulldown
methods.
270
Overview
Depending on your editing video format, a pulldown may be required to convert
23.98 fps video to 29.97 fps video for output on Matrox MXO2. When a
pulldown is required for your video output, Matrox MXO2 performs either a
standard 2:3 pulldown or an advanced 2:3:3:2 pulldown.
Standard 2:3 pulldown
Standard 2:3 pulldown is often used as part of the telecine process to transfer
24 fps film footage to 29.97 fps interlaced video. This pulldown method is also
used to convert any 23.98 fps progressive video to 29.97 fps interlaced video,
such as for converting 486p @ 23.98 fps video to NTSC.
In order to convert 24 fps film or 23.98 progressive video to 29.97 fps interlaced
video, additional video frames, and more specifically video fields, must be
created and added to the video sequence. For example, to convert a sequence of
four film or progressive frames, five frames of video are needed for a total of 10
video fields. Therefore, one additional video frame or two video fields must be
created. To accomplish this, the first and third frames of a four-frame film or
progressive video sequence are each converted to two video fields. The second
and fourth frames of the sequence are converted to three video fields to make up
a total of five interlaced video frames.
The following diagram demonstrates the process:
Film frames @ 24 fps or progressive frames @ 23.98 fps
A
B
C
D
Video fields @ 29.97 fps
a1
a2
Frame A
b1
b2
Frame B
b3
c1
Frame C
c2
d1
Frame D
d2
d3
Frame E
Standard 2:3 pulldown is accomplished by representing the first frame of film or
progressive video (frame A) as two fields of video (fields a1 and a2), the second
frame (frame B) as three fields of video (fields b1, b2, and b3), the third frame
(frame C) as two fields (fields c1 and c2), and the fourth frame (frame D) as three
fields (fields d1, d2, and d3). This sequence repeats six times each second.
Appendix A, Understanding Pulldown
271
Advanced 2:3:3:2 pulldown
Advanced 2:3:3:2 pulldown was developed as an alternative to the standard
pulldown method for making frame rate conversions in DV video. It is used to
convert 486p @ 23.98 fps video to NTSC (486i @ 29.97 fps) video. This
conversion is used when video footage is acquired by a DV camera at 23.98 fps
and recorded to DV tape with the recorder set for advanced pulldown (called
24PA or 24P Advanced mode on some devices). Advanced 2:3:3:2 pulldown
differs from standard 2:3 pulldown in that the two middle frames of the video
sequence are each converted to three video fields.
The following diagram demonstrates the process:
Progressive frames @ 23.98 fps
A
B
C
D
Video fields @ 29.97 fps
a1
a2
Frame A
b1
b2
Frame B
b3
c1
Frame C
c2
c3
Frame D
d1
d2
Frame E
Advanced 2:3:3:2 pulldown is accomplished by representing the first frame of
progressive video (frame A) as two fields of video (fields a1 and a2), the second
frame (frame B) as three fields of video (fields b1, b2, and b3), the third frame
(frame C) as three fields (fields c1, c2, and c3), and the fourth frame (frame D) as
two fields (fields d1 and d2).
Advanced 2:3:3:2 pulldown
272
Your notes
Appendix A, Understanding Pulldown
B
Matrox MXO2 Connectors
This appendix describes the
inputs and outputs for all MXO2
products.
Matrox MXO2
Analog
audio
(balanced)
CH 1
Analog
audio
(balanced)
CH 2
Analog
audio
(unbalanced)
CH 2
Analog
audio
(unbalanced)
CH 1
AES/EBU
digital
audio
CH 1/2
HDMI
(HD only)
Appendix B, Matrox MXO2 Connectors
SDI
(HD/SD)
Composite
video
Component
video
(HD/SD)
Pr
Y/C
(S-Video)
Component
video
External
(HD/SD)
reference
(REF)
Pb
Y
274
Inputs
The following sections detail the MXO2, MXO2 Rack, MXO2 LE, and MXO2
Mini inputs.
MXO2 inputs
Power
(see “Powering
MXO2 Rack” on
page 24)
Matrox MXO2 Rack
(partial view)
Host
(see “Connecting
MXO2 Rack to your
computer” on
page 25)
RS422
(see “MXO2 Rack
RS-422 serial
connection” on
page 27)
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
Analog
audio
(balanced)
CH 4
AES/EBU
digital
audio
CH 3/4
AES/EBU
digital
audio
CH 1/2
Y/C
(S-Video)
HDMI
(HD only)
Y
Pb
IN
Pr
OUT
External
reference
(REF)
Component
video
(HD/SD)
Composite
video
SDI
(HD/SD)
275
MXO2 Rack inputs
Inputs
276
MXO2 LE inputs
Component
video
External
(HD/SD)
reference
Pb
Y
(REF)
Analog audio
(unbalanced)
L (CH 1)
Matrox MXO2 LE
R (CH 2)
Analog audio
(unbalanced)
CH 1
CH 2
Analog
audio
(balanced)
Appendix B, Matrox MXO2 Connectors
Y/C
HDMI
(HD/SD) (S-Video)
Composite
video
Component
video
(HD/SD)
Pr
SDI
(HD/SD)
277
MXO2 Mini inputs
Composite
video (CVBS)
Y
S-Video
(see “Connecting
S-Video devices to
MXO2 Mini” on
page 44)
Pb
(Y)
Pr
(C)
Power
(see “Powering
MXO2 Mini” on
page 40)
HDMI
(HD only)
Component video
(HD/SD)
Y
Pb
Pr
Analog audio
(unbalanced)
L
R
(CH 1)
(CH 2)
Host
(see “Connecting
MXO2 Mini to your
computer” on
page 42)
Matrox MXO2 Mini
Inputs
278
Input connector descriptions
This section describes the Matrox MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE inputs.
For MXO2 Mini inputs, see “Input connector descriptions (MXO2 Mini)” on
page 280.
¦
Note Depending on your MXO2 hardware, some of the following connectors
may not be available or may be available in a limited capacity only. Some
connectors on your MXO2 hardware may not appear exactly as shown below.
(MXO2 and
MXO2 LE)
External reference (REF) Allows you to genlock all devices
connected to your MXO2 system to an external genlock source
(bi-level analog black burst for SD, or analog tri-level sync for
HD). MXO2 Rack features an additional REF OUT connector
with loop through that allows you to daisy chain the genlock
reference input to another device’s reference input.
¡ Important If you connected an external genlock
source to MXO2 Rack’s REF IN connector, and you’re
(MXO2 Rack)
not using the REF OUT connector, you must terminate
the reference signal by connecting a BNC 75-ohm
terminator to REF OUT.
To compensate for cable delays, timing-offset controls that
align your video output relative to your external genlock source
are available (see “Specifying your genlock settings” on
page 181).
HDMI Provides an input for HD HDMI video (either YUV
or RGB), and up to eight channels of uncompressed embedded
audio, from a digital HDMI device. HDCP sources and SD
video are not supported on this input. Connect a standard
HDMI video/audio cable from a camera, VTR, or other video
input source.
SDI Provides an input for use with a digital SDI device. This
input supports HD-SDI and SD-SDI video, and up to eight
channels of embedded audio. Connect an SDI video/audio cable
from a camera, VTR, or other video input source.
Appendix B, Matrox MXO2 Connectors
279
Component video (Y, Pb, Pr) Provide inputs for use with an
analog component device, and support HD and SD video.
Connect component Y, Pb, Pr video cables from a camera,
VTR, or other video input source.
Y/C (S-Video) Provides an input for use with an analog
S-Video device (SD only). Connect an S-Video cable from a
camera, VTR, or other video input source.
Composite video (CVBS) Allows you to input SD video
from an analog NTSC or PAL device. Connect a composite
video cable from a camera, VTR, or other video input source.
AES/EBU digital audio Allows you to input stereo digital
audio. Connect a coaxial BNC audio cable from a camera,
VTR, audio mixer, or other audio input source.
¦
Note
Not available on MXO2 LE.
Analog audio (balanced) Allows you to input balanced
stereo analog audio. Connect XLR cables from a camera, VTR,
audio mixer, or other audio input source.
Analog audio (unbalanced) Allows you to input unbalanced
stereo analog audio. Connect RCA cables from a camera, VTR,
audio mixer, or other audio input source.
Inputs
280
Input connector descriptions (MXO2 Mini)
This section describes the Matrox MXO2 Mini inputs. For other MXO2 products,
see “Input connector descriptions” on page 278.
¦
Note Analog A/V cables connected to Matrox MXO2 Mini must be limited to
less than three meters to comply with EEC and EMC directives.
HDMI Provides an input for HD HDMI video (either YUV
or RGB), and up to eight channels of uncompressed embedded
audio, from a digital HDMI device. HDCP sources and SD
video are not supported on this input. Connect a standard
HDMI video/audio cable from a camera, VTR, or other video
input source.
Component video (Y, Pb, Pr) Provide inputs for use with an
analog component device, and support HD and SD video.
Connect component Y, Pb, Pr video cables from a camera,
VTR, or other video input source.
¦
Note When you connect an analog component device
to MXO2 Mini, you won’t be able to connect an
S-Video or composite device at the same time.
S-Video Input connectors Pb and Pr allow you to connect the
MXO2 S-Video adapter cable for use with an analog S-Video
device (SD only). Connect an S-Video cable, via the MXO2
S-Video adapter cable, from a camera, VTR, or other video
input source. For an illustration on how to connect S-Video
devices to MXO2 Mini, see “Connecting S-Video devices to
MXO2 Mini” on page 44.
Composite video (Y) Allows you to input SD video from an
analog NTSC or PAL device. Connect a composite video cable
from a camera, VTR, or other video input source.
Analog audio (unbalanced) Allows you to input unbalanced
stereo analog audio. Connect RCA cables from a camera, VTR,
audio mixer, or other audio input source.
Appendix B, Matrox MXO2 Connectors
Y
SDI A
(HD/SD)
Pb
AES/EBU
Y/C
HDMI
(S-Video) (HD/SD) digital
audio
CH 1/2
Component
video
(HD/SD)
Pr
Composite
video
SDI B
(HD/SD)
Component
video
(HD/SD)
CH 3 CH 5
CH 2 CH 4 CH 6
Analog audio
(unbalanced)
CH 1
Analog audio
(unbalanced)
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
Analog
audio
(balanced)
CH 4
Matrox MXO2
281
Outputs
The following sections detail the MXO2, MXO2 Rack, MXO2 LE, and MXO2
Mini outputs.
MXO2 outputs
Outputs
Matrox MXO2 Rack
(partial view)
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
CH 5
Analog
audio
(balanced)
CH 6
CH 7
CH 8
AES/EBU
digital
audio
CH 3/4
AES/EBU
digital
audio
CH 1/2
Appendix B, Matrox MXO2 Connectors
Y/C
(S-Video)
HDMI
(HD/SD)
Y
Pb
Pr
Component
video
(HD/SD)
Composite
video
SDI B
(HD/SD)
SDI A
(HD/SD)
282
MXO2 Rack outputs
283
MXO2 LE outputs
SDI B
(HD/SD)
Component
video
(HD/SD)
Y
Analog audio
(unbalanced)
L (CH 1)
Pb
Matrox MXO2 LE
Composite
video
SDI A
(HD/SD)
Y/C
HDMI
(S-Video) (HD/SD)
Component
video
(HD/SD)
Pr
R (CH 2)
Analog audio
(unbalanced)
CH 1
CH 2
Analog
audio
(balanced)
Outputs
284
MXO2 Mini outputs
Matrox MXO2 Mini
Y
Pb
Pr
Component video
(HD/SD)
L
R
(CH 1)
(CH 2)
Analog audio
(unbalanced)
Host
(see “Connecting
MXO2 Mini to
your computer”
on page 42)
HDMI
(HD/SD)
Power
(see “Powering
MXO2 Mini” on
page 40)
Pb
Pr
(Y)
(C)
S-Video
(see “Connecting
S-Video devices to
MXO2 Mini” on
page 44)
Composite
video (CVBS)
Y
Appendix B, Matrox MXO2 Connectors
285
Output connector descriptions
This section describes the Matrox MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE outputs.
For MXO2 Mini outputs, see “Output connector descriptions (MXO2 Mini)” on
page 287.
¦
Note Depending on your MXO2 hardware, some of the following connectors
may not be available or may be available in a limited capacity only. Some
connectors on your MXO2 hardware may not appear exactly as shown below.
HDMI Provides an output for HD/SD HDMI video, and up to
eight channels of embedded audio, to a digital HDMI device.
HDCP is not supported on this output. This output supports 1:1
pixel mapping for accurate monitoring on your HDMI display
of NTSC, PAL, 1280×720, and 1920 ×1080 video. Connect a
standard HDMI video/audio cable to an HDMI monitor, VTR,
or other digital HDMI device. You can also connect directly to a
home theatre system for surround sound monitoring.
¦
Note The HDMI output supports YUV and RGB
devices.
HDMI monitor calibration is available through this output. Use
the Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility to calibrate your HDMI
monitor (see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for
Video”).
SDI A and SDI B Provide two simultaneous outputs of the
same HD-SDI or SD-SDI video, with up to 16 channels of
embedded audio. For each output, connect an SDI video/audio
cable to a video monitor, VTR, or other SDI device. You can
also perform surround sound monitoring through the SDI
output by connecting to a third-party device, such as an SDI
audio de-embedder.
Component video (Y, Pb, Pr) Allows you to output HD or
SD video to an analog component device. Connect component
Y, Pb, Pr video cables to a video monitor, VTR, or other
component device.
¦
Note The component output supports YUV and RGB
devices.
Outputs
286
Y/C (S-Video) Provides an output for SD video to an analog
S-Video device. Connect an S-Video cable to a video monitor,
VTR, or other S-Video device.
Composite video (CVBS) Allows you to output SD video to
an analog NTSC or PAL device. Connect a composite video
cable to a video monitor, VTR, or other NTSC or PAL device.
AES/EBU digital audio Allows you to output stereo digital
audio. Connect a coaxial BNC audio cable to a VTR, audio
mixer, speakers, or other audio device.
¦
Note
Not available on MXO2 LE.
Analog audio (balanced) Allows you to output
balanced stereo analog audio. Connect XLR
cables to a VTR, audio mixer, speakers, or other
audio device.
Analog audio (unbalanced) Provide outputs
for unbalanced analog audio. Matrox MXO2 offers outputs for
channels one to six, or three stereo pairs suitable for 5.1
surround sound monitoring. Connect RCA cables to a VTR,
audio mixer, speakers, or other audio device.
Appendix B, Matrox MXO2 Connectors
287
Output connector descriptions (MXO2 Mini)
This section describes the Matrox MXO2 Mini outputs. For other MXO2
products, see “Output connector descriptions” on page 285.
¦
Note Analog A/V cables connected to Matrox MXO2 Mini must be limited to
less than three meters to comply with EEC and EMC directives.
HDMI Provides an output for HD/SD HDMI video, and up to
eight channels of embedded audio, to a digital HDMI device.
HDCP is not supported on this output. This output supports 1:1
pixel mapping for accurate monitoring on your HDMI display
of NTSC, PAL, 1280×720, and 1920 ×1080 video. Connect a
standard HDMI video/audio cable to an HDMI monitor, VTR,
or other digital HDMI device. You can also connect directly to a
home theatre system for surround sound monitoring.
¦
Note The HDMI output supports YUV and RGB
devices.
HDMI monitor calibration is available through this output. Use
the Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility to calibrate your HDMI
monitor (see Chapter 7, “Calibrating Your HDMI Monitor for
Video”).
Component video (Y, Pb, Pr) Allows you to output HD or
SD video to an analog component device. Connect component
Y, Pb, Pr video cables to a video monitor, VTR, or other
component device.
¦
Note The component output supports YUV and RGB
devices. When you connect an analog component device
to MXO2 Mini, you won’t be able to connect an
S-Video or composite device at the same time.
S-Video Output connectors Pb and Pr allow you to connect
the MXO2 S-Video adapter cable for outputting SD video to an
analog S-Video device. Connect an S-Video cable, via the
MXO2 S-Video adapter cable, to a video monitor, VTR, or
other S-Video device. For instructions on how to connect
S-Video devices to MXO2 Mini, see “Connecting S-Video
devices to MXO2 Mini” on page 44.
Outputs
288
Composite video (Y) Allows you to output SD video to an
analog NTSC or PAL device. Connect a composite video cable
to a video monitor, VTR, or other NTSC or PAL device.
Analog audio (unbalanced) Provide outputs for unbalanced
analog audio channels one and two, or one stereo pair. Connect
RCA cables to a VTR, audio mixer, speakers, or other audio
device.
Appendix B, Matrox MXO2 Connectors
C
Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and
Capture Formats
This appendix provides
information on the video input
and capture formats that are
supported on MXO2.
290
Supported input formats
The following table shows the video input formats that are supported on the
MXO2 video inputs for capturing or recording video. For descriptions of the
MXO2 inputs, see “Inputs” on page 274.
Matrox MXO2 input
Video input
format
HDMI
SDI1
Component
S-Video
Composite
NTSC
—
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Z
Z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PAL
—
720p @ 50 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
Z
Z
Z
Z
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
—
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 24 fps
—
1080PsF @ 25 fps
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 24 fps
1080p @ 25 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
1
SDI is not supported on Matrox MXO2 Mini.
Appendix C, Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture Formats
291
Supported capture formats for Adobe
Premiere Pro
The following table lists the supported capture formats when using Adobe
Premiere Pro to capture clips to Matrox .avi and .m2v files, based on your
selected video input format. For a list of the video input formats supported on the
various MXO2 inputs for capturing clips, see “Supported input formats” on
page 290.
Captured file format
Video input format
Matrox AVI
Matrox M2V
NTSC
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p @
29.97 fps
NTSC
PAL
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or
1080i/p @ 25 fps
PAL
720p @ 50 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or
1080i/p @ 25 fps
PAL
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p @
29.97 fps
NTSC
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
PAL
1080i @29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
1080p/PsF @ 23.98 fps
486p @23.98 fps or
1080p @ 23.98 fps
—
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps
1080p @ 24 fps
—
1080p/PsF @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or
1080p @ 25 fps
PAL
1080p/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or
1080p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
1080p @ 30 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
—
Supported capture formats for Adobe Premiere Pro
292
Supported capture formats for Avid editing
applications
The following table lists the supported capture formats on Matrox MXO2
products, based on your project’s video format and selected input source in Avid
editing applications.
Matrox MXO2 input
Project video format
(capture format)1
30i NTSC
23.976p NTSC
24p NTSC
25i PAL
24p PAL
2
3
4
5
SDI 2
Component
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p 4/PsF @ 29.97 fps
3
4
NTSC , 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p /PsF @ 29.97 fps
—
—
5
—
4
PAL , 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p /PsF @ 25 fps
—
—
5
—
4
S-Video Composite
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
—
—
PAL
PAL
—
—
25p PAL
PAL , 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p /PsF @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL
720p/23.976
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p4/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
NTSC
720p/25
PAL5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p4/PsF @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL
—
—
720p/29.97
1
HDMI
—
—
5
—
4
720p/50
PAL , 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p /PsF @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL
720p/59.94
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p4/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
NTSC
1080i/50 (25 fps)
PAL5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL
1080i/59.94 (29.97 fps)
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
NTSC
—
—
—
—
1080p/23.976
1080p @ 23.98 fps
1080p/24
1080p @ 24 fps
1080p4/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps
5
—
4
1080p/25
PAL , 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080p /PsF @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL
1080p/29.97
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080p4/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
NTSC
Video is always captured to the project’s video format.
SDI is not supported on Matrox MXO2 Mini.
NTSC is not supported on the HDMI input.
1080p is not supported on the component input.
PAL is not supported on the HDMI input.
Appendix C, Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture Formats
293
Supported capture formats for Matrox A/V
Tools
The following table lists the supported capture formats on Matrox MXO2
products, based on your editing video format and selected input source in Matrox
A/V Tools.
Matrox MXO2 input
Editing video format
(capture format)1
NTSC
PAL
SDI2
HDMI
Component S-Video Composite
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p 4/PsF @ 29.97 fps
5
4
PAL , 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p /PsF @ 25 fps
1080p4/PsF @23.98 fps
NTSC
NTSC
PAL
PAL
—
—
486p @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps
486p @ 29.97 fps
—
—
—
—
—
576p @ 25 fps
—
—
—
—
—
720p @ 23.98 fps
—
—
—
—
—
720p @ 25 fps
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
720p @ 29.97 fps
—
—
720p @ 50 fps
PAL5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p4/PsF @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p4/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
NTSC
1440 ×1080i @ 25 fps
—
—
—
—
—
1440× 1080i @ 29.97 fps
—
—
—
—
—
1440× 1080p @ 23.98 fps
—
—
—
—
—
1440× 1080p @ 25 fps
—
—
—
—
—
1440× 1080p @ 29.97 fps
—
—
—
—
—
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL , 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
NTSC
1080p @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 24 fps
1080p @ 24 fps
2
3
4
5
1080p4/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps
—
—
—
—
—
1080p @ 25 fps
PAL5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080p4/PsF @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL
1080p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC3, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080p4/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
NTSC
—
—
1080p @ 30 fps
1
5
1080p @ 30 fps
—
Video is always captured to the editing video format.
SDI is not supported on Matrox MXO2 Mini.
NTSC is not supported on the HDMI input.
1080p is not supported on the component input.
PAL is not supported on the HDMI input.
Supported capture formats for Matrox A/V Tools
294
Supported capture formats for Matrox MAX
H.264 Capture
The following table lists the supported capture formats when using the Matrox
MAX H.264 Capture application to capture clips to Matrox .264, .mp4, and .avi
files, based on your selected video input format. For a list of the video input
formats supported on the various MXO2 inputs for capturing clips, see
“Supported input formats” on page 290.
Captured file format
Video input format Matrox 264 (Blu-ray)
Matrox MP4
Matrox AVI
NTSC
720p @ 59.94 fps or
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps,
Any_1p @ 14.98 fps, or
Any_p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or
1080i/p @ 29.97 fps
PAL
720p @ 50 fps or
1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps,
Any_p @ 12.5 fps, or
Any_p @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or
1080i/p @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps or
1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps,
Any_p @ 12.5 fps, or
Any_p @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or
1080i/p @ 25 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps,
Any_p @ 14.98 fps, or
Any_p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or
1080i/p @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or
1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps,
Any_p @ 12.5 fps, or
Any_p @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i
@ 25 fps
1080i @29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps,
Any_p @ 14.98 fps, or
Any_p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080p/PsF @ 23.98 fps
720p @ 23.98 fps or
1080p @ 23.98 fps
Any_p @ 11.99 fps or
Any_p @ 23.98 fps
486p @23.98 fps or
1080p @ 23.98 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps
720p @ 24 fps or
1080p @ 24 fps
Any_p @ 12 fps or
Any_p @ 24 fps
1080p @ 24 fps
1080p/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps,
Any_p @ 12.5 fps, or
Any_p @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or
1080p @ 25 fps
1080p/PsF @ 29.97 fps
—
Any_p @ 14.98 fps or
Any_p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or
1080p @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
—
Any_p @ 15 fps or
Any_p @ 30 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
1
Any_ represents a custom frame size that you can enter for your Matrox .mp4 file as explained in
“Specifying your capture format settings” on page 256.
Appendix C, Matrox MXO2 Supported Input and Capture Formats
D
Matrox MXO2 Supported Output
Formats
This appendix provides
information on the video output
formats that are supported on
MXO2.
296
Supported video output formats for playback
This section lists the formats that are supported on the main and secondary
MXO2 video outputs during playback, depending on the application used. For
descriptions of the MXO2 outputs, see “Outputs” on page 281.
Playback using Adobe Premiere Pro
The following table shows the formats that are supported on the main and
secondary MXO2 video outputs during playback using Adobe Premiere Pro,
based on your sequence’s video format (for sequence formats natively supported
by MXO2 as well as custom formats).
¦
Note For sequence formats where the width, multiplied by the pixel aspect
ratio, and the height correspond to a natively supported format, the available
output formats will be the same as those listed for the native format. For example,
a DVCPRO HD 960×720p @ 50 fps sequence has a pixel aspect ratio of 1.333
(960 ×1.333 = width 1280), and therefore supports the same output formats as
listed for the native 720p @ 50 fps (1280 ×720p) format.
Matrox MXO2 output
Sequence video
format
NTSC
Main output1
Secondary output2
NTSC
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p 3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC or 720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
PAL
PAL
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
PAL or 720p @ 50 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
486p @ 23.98 fps
NTSC or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
PAL or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or
1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
Appendix D, Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
297
Matrox MXO2 output
Sequence video
format
Main output1
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
486p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
PAL
576p @ 50 fps4,5
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 720p @ 50 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or
1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
PAL
576p @ 50 fps4,5
720p @ 25 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 50 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 23.98 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
576p @ 25 fps
Secondary output2
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 720p @ 50 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
720p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i/p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
Supported video output formats for playback
298
Matrox MXO2 output
Sequence video
format
Main output1
PAL
720p @ 50 fps
576p @ 50 fps4,5
1440× 1080i @ 25 fps
1440× 1080i @ 29.97 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080i @ 25 fps
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
PAL
PAL
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL or 1080i @ 25 fps
NTSC
NTSC
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
1440× 1080p @ 23.98 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps
NTSC
720p @ 59.94 fps
Secondary output2
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC or 480p @ 59.94 fps 5
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/Psf @ 23.98 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
PAL
576p @ 50 fps4,5
1440× 1080p @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
1440× 1080p @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
PAL
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL or 576 @ 50 fps5
720p @ 50 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC or 480p @ 59.94 fps 5
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
PAL or 1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
Appendix D, Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
299
Matrox MXO2 output
Sequence video
format
1080i @ 29.97 fps
Main output1
Secondary output2
NTSC
NTSC or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
1080p @ 23.98 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or 1080p3/[email protected] 23.98 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or
1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
1080p @ 24 fps
1080PsF @ 24 fps4,6
1080p @ 24 fps3,4
PAL
576p @ 25 fps4,5
1080p @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
1080p @ 30 fps
1080p @ 30 fps3,4
Custom formats with a
width greater than 1920
and an aspect ratio of
16:9 or greater (such as
many RED formats)
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 30 fps3
Same output formats as for 1080i/p with the corresponding frame rate.
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
PAL
480p @ 59.94 fps
All other custom formats 7
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps3,6
4,5
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
576p @ 50 fps4,5
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @29.97 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
Supported video output formats for playback
300
Matrox MXO2 output
Sequence video
format
Main output1
Secondary output2
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps
3,4
1080p @ 24 fps3,4
All other custom formats
(cont’d)7
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
1080PsF @ 29.97 fp
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
1080p @ 30 fps3,4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or
1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps3,6
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 30 fps3
Main output on MXO2 Mini is always analog.
Secondary output on MXO2 Mini is always HDMI.
1080p is supported on the HDMI and SDI outputs only.
Not available on MXO2 Mini.
480p @ 59.94 fps and 576p @ 50 fps are supported on the HDMI output only.
1080PsF @ 24 fps is supported on the SDI output only.
For the best results, you should select a video output format with a frame rate that matches or is compatible with
your sequence’s frame rate.
Appendix D, Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
301
Playback using Avid editing applications
The following table shows the formats that are supported on the main and
secondary MXO2 video outputs during playback using Avid editing applications,
based on your project’s video format.
¡ Important If the main and secondary output formats don’t match and the
video quality for playback is not set to Full Quality, the secondary output will be
blanked on MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE. On MXO2 Mini, however,
either the main analog or secondary HDMI output will be blanked depending on
whether you selected analog or HDMI as the Priority Output (never blanked)
setting.
Matrox MXO2 output
Project video format
30i NTSC,
23.976p NTSC, or
24p NTSC
Main output1
Secondary output2
NTSC
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC or 720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
PAL
25i PAL, 24p PAL,
or 25p PAL
720p @ 50 fps
PAL or 720p @ 50 fps
PAL or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps6
1080i/50 (25 fps)
1080i/59.94 (29.97 fps)
PAL or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps6, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
PAL
720p/25 or 720p/50
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
720p/23.9765,
720p/29.97, or
720p/59.94
NTSC or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
576p @ 50 fps6
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps6, or 720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps6, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080i @ 25 fps
PAL
PAL or 1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
NTSC
NTSC or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
Supported video output formats for playback
302
Matrox MXO2 output
Project video format
Main output1
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps6
1080p/23.9765
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
1080p/245
1080PsF @ 24 fps4,7
[email protected] 24 fps 3,4
PAL
576p @ 25 fps6
1080p/25
720p @ 50 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps6
1080p/29.97
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Secondary output2
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps6, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or 1080p3/[email protected] 23.98 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps6, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or
1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps 3,7
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps 6, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps6, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps6, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
Main output on MXO2 Mini is always analog.
Secondary output on MXO2 Mini is always HDMI.
1080p is supported on the HDMI and SDI outputs only.
Not available on MXO2 Mini.
To downconvert a 720p/23.976, 1080p/23.976, or 1080p24 sequence to SD to record a digital cut, you must change
your project’s format (project type) to SD (see “Exporting your sequence to tape” on page 163).
480p @ 59.94 fps and 576p @ 50 fps are supported on the HDMI output only.
1080PsF @ 24 fps is supported on the SDI output only.
Appendix D, Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
303
Playback using Matrox A/V Tools and Matrox
WYSIWYG
The following table shows the formats that are supported on the main and
secondary MXO2 video outputs during playback using Matrox A/V Tools and
the Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins, based on your selected editing video format
Matrox MXO2 output
Editing video format
Main output
1
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p 3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
NTSC
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC or 720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
PAL or DV-PAL
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
PAL or 720p @ 50 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps
4,5
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or
1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
PAL
576p @ 50 fps4,5
576p @ 25 fps
PAL or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
486p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
PAL
1080PsF @ 25 fps
486p @ 23.98 fps
Secondary output2
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 720p @ 50 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
Supported video output formats for playback
304
Matrox MXO2 output
Editing video format
Main output1
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
720p @ 23.98 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or
1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
PAL
576p @ 50 fps4,5
720p @ 50 fps
1080p @ 25 fps
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
PAL
576p @ 50 fps4,5
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080i @ 25 fps
NTSC
1440× 1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i/p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
1440× 1080i @ 25 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, 1080i/p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 720p @ 50 fps
3,4
NTSC
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
720p @ 25 fps
Secondary output2
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, or 720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
PAL
PAL
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL or 1080i @ 25 fps
NTSC
NTSC
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
Appendix D, Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
305
Matrox MXO2 output
Editing video format
Main output1
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
1440× 1080p @ 23.98 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
Secondary output2
NTSC or 480p @ 59.94 fps 5
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/Psf @ 23.98 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
PAL
576p @ 50 fps4,5
1440× 1080p @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
1440× 1080p @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC or 480p @ 59.94 fps 5
720p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
PAL
PAL or 1080i @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
PAL, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080i @ 25 fps
NTSC
NTSC or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080i @ 29.97 fps
NTSC
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps 3,4
1080p @ 24 fps
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
1080p @ 23.98 fps
PAL or 576 @ 50 fps5
1080PsF @ 24 fps4,6
1080p @ 24 fps3,4
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or 1080p3/[email protected] 23.98 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, 1080i @ 29.97 fps, or
1080p3/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps3,6
Supported video output formats for playback
306
Matrox MXO2 output
Editing video format
Main output1
PAL
576p @ 25 fps4,5
1080p @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps3,4
NTSC
480p @ 59.94 fps4,5
1080p @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps 3,4
1080p @ 30 fps
1
2
3
4
5
6
1080p @ 30 fps3,4
Secondary output2
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
720p @ 50 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
PAL, 576p @ 50 fps5, 720p @ 50 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 25 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps 5, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
NTSC, 480p @ 59.94 fps5, 720p @ 59.94 fps, or 1080p3/PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 30 fps3
Main output on MXO2 Mini is always analog.
Secondary output on MXO2 Mini is always HDMI.
1080p is supported on the HDMI and SDI outputs only.
Not available on MXO2 Mini.
480p @ 59.94 fps and 576p @ 50 fps are supported on the HDMI output only.
1080PsF @ 24 fps is supported on the SDI output only.
Appendix D, Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
307
Supported video output formats for monitoring
This section lists the formats that are supported on the MXO2 video outputs for
monitoring your video while capturing, recording, or streaming using various
applications. For descriptions of the MXO2 outputs, see “Outputs” on page 281.
Adobe Premiere Pro
The following table shows the formats that are supported on the MXO2 video
outputs for monitoring your captured video, based on your selected capture
format in Adobe Premiere Pro.
Matrox MXO2 output
Capture format
1
HDMI
SDI
Component
NTSC2
Composite
NTSC
2
PAL
486p @ 23.98 fps
S-Video
PAL
480p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps
—
—
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
—
—
1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
—
—
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
—
—
1080p @ 23.98 fps
1080p/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
—
—
1080p @ 24 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1080p @ 25 fps
1080p/PsF @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps
1080p/PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
—
1
SDI is not supported on Matrox MXO2 Mini.
2
NTSC and PAL are the only supported capture formats when capturing to a Matrox .m2v file.
3
1080PsF @ 24 fps is supported on the SDI output only.
Supported video output formats for monitoring
308
Avid editing applications
The following table shows the formats that are supported on the MXO2 video
outputs for monitoring your captured video, based on your project’s video format
in Avid editing applications.
Matrox MXO2 output
Project video format
(capture format)1
HDMI
SDI2
Component
S-Video
Composite
720p @ 59.94 fps
—
—
720p/25 or 720p/50
720p @ 50 fps
—
—
1080i/50 (25 fps)
1080i @ 25 fps
—
—
30i NTSC or
23.976p NTSC
NTSC
25i PAL or 25p PAL
PAL
720p/23.976 or
720p/59.94
1080i/59.94 (29.97 fps)
1080i @ 29.97 fps
—
—
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
—
—
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps3
—
—
—
1080p/25 fps
1080p/PsF @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
—
—
1080p @ 29.97 fps
1080p/PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p/23.976
1080p/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080p/24 fps
1
Video is always captured to the project’s video format.
2
SDI is not supported on Matrox MXO2 Mini.
3
1080PsF @ 24 fps is supported on the SDI output only.
Appendix D, Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
309
Matrox A/V Tools
The following table shows the formats that are supported on the MXO2 video
outputs for monitoring your captured video, based on your editing video format
in Matrox A/V Tools.
Matrox MXO2 output
Editing video format
(capture format)1
SDI2
HDMI
Component
NTSC
Composite
NTSC
PAL
486p @ 23.98 fps
S-Video
PAL
480p @ 59.94 fps
NTSC
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps
—
—
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
—
—
1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
—
—
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
—
—
1080p @ 23.98 fps
1080p/PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
—
—
1080p @ 24 fps
1080p/PsF @ 24 fps3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1080p @ 25 fps
1080p/PsF @ 25 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps
1080p/PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
—
1
Video is always captured to the editing video format.
2
SDI is not supported on Matrox MXO2 Mini.
3
1080PsF @ 24 fps is supported on the SDI output only.
Supported video output formats for monitoring
310
Matrox MAX H.264 Capture and Telestream
Wirecast
The following table shows the formats that are supported on the MXO2 video
outputs for monitoring the source material that you’re capturing using the Matrox
MAX H.264 Capture application, or streaming/recording using Telestream
Wirecast, based on your selected video input format. For a list of the video input
formats supported on the various MXO2 inputs, see “Supported input formats”
on page 290.
Matrox MXO2 output
Video input format
HDMI
SDI
1
Component
NTSC
NTSC
PAL
PAL
720p @ 50 fps
720p @ 50 fps
—
—
720p @ 59.94 fps
720p @ 59.94 fps
—
—
1080i @ 25 fps
1080i @ 25 fps
—
—
1080i @ 29.97 fps
1080i @ 29.97 fps
—
—
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
1080PsF @ 23.98 fps
—
—
1080PsF @ 24 fps
1
S-Video Composite
—
—
1080PsF @ 25 fps
—
1080PsF @ 24 fps
1080PsF @ 25 fps
—
—
—
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
1080PsF @ 29.97 fps
—
—
1080p @ 23.98 fps
1080p @ 23.98 fps
—
—
—
1080p @ 24 fps
1080p @ 24 fps
—
—
—
1080p @ 25 fps
1080p @ 25 fps
—
—
—
1080p @ 29.97 fps
1080p @ 29.97 fps
—
—
—
1080p @ 30 fps
1080p @ 30 fps
—
—
—
SDI is not supported on Matrox MXO2 Mini.
Appendix D, Matrox MXO2 Supported Output Formats
E
Matrox MXO2 Specifications
This appendix provides
specifications for all Matrox
MXO2 products, and Matrox
PCIe host adapters.
312
Matrox MXO2 specifications
General
• Video formats
NTSC, PAL, NTSC-EIAJ, 1080i/p/PsF, 720p, 576p, 480p
• Regulatory compliance
$
FCC Class A, CE Mark Class A, ACMA C-Tick Mark, VCCI
$
RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC
• Dimensions
$
Length
330 mm (13”)
$
Width
241 mm (9.5”)
$
Height
51 mm (2”)
• External AC/DC adapter
$
100-240 VAC 50-60 Hz
$
Input: IEC320-C14 inlet
$
Output: +12V DC, 3A max
$
Dimensions: L 104 mm × W 46 mm × H 36 mm (4.1” × 1.8” × 1.4”)
• Total power consumption
15 watts
Connections
• Genlock reference input
$
HD analog tri-level sync or SD analog bi-level black burst
$
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
• RS-422
D-sub connector (9 pins)
Video
• HDMI
$
$
HD input and output
•
HDMI Y,Cb,Cr 4:2:2 (10-bit) / RGB (8-bit)
•
Eight channels of embedded audio
•
Standard Type A HDMI connector (19 pins)
SD output
•
HDMI Y,Cb,Cr 4:2:2 (10-bit) / RGB (8-bit)
•
Eight channels of embedded audio
•
Standard Type A HDMI connector (19 pins)
• SDI
$
HDTV input
•
HD-SDI with eight channels of embedded SDI audio
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
313
$
$
$
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 299M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
Equalized input for maximum cable length support
HDTV output
•
HD-SDI with 16 channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 299M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω)
SDTV input
•
SD-SDI with eight channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 259M-C, SMPTE 272M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
Equalized input for maximum cable length support
SDTV output
•
SD-SDI with 16 channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 259M-C, SMPTE 272M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω)
• S-Video and composite video input
$
$
SDTV input
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
BNC connector for composite (75 Ω), terminated
•
4-pin mini-DIN S-Video connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
12-bit ADC
•
2x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
•
Automatic gain control
SDTV output
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
BNC connector for composite (75 Ω)
•
4-pin mini-DIN S-Video connector (75 Ω)
•
12-bit DAC
•
8x oversampling
Matrox MXO2 specifications
314
• Analog component video input
$
$
$
$
HDTV input
•
EIA-770.3 compliant
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit ADC
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
HDTV output
•
EIA-770.3 compliant
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit DAC
•
2x oversampling
SDTV input
•
Betacam, Betacam SP (NTSC and NTSC-EIAJ)
•
SMPTE/EBU N10 (PAL)
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit ADC
•
4x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filter
SDTV output
•
Betacam, Betacam SP (NTSC and NTSC-EIAJ)
•
SMPTE/EBU N10 (PAL)
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit DAC
•
8x oversampling
• Analog video performance
$
$
HDTV analog component video (passthrough)
•
Frequency response Y: +/- 1.0 dB max to 28 MHz
•
Frequency response Pb, Pr: +/- 1.0 dB max to 12 MHz
•
Component channel delay: < 8 ns
•
Component S/N (Y, Pb, Pr): > 50 dB, unified weighted
SDTV S-Video and composite video (passthrough)
•
Amplitude error: < 4%
•
Frequency response: +/- 0.5 dB max to 5 MHz
•
2T pulse response: 1.0% max
•
Diff. Gain: < 2%, Diff. Phase: < 1 degree
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
315
•
$
S/N: > 58 dB, unified weighted
SDTV analog component video (passthrough)
•
Frequency response Y: +/- 0.5 dB max to 5 MHz
•
Frequency response Pb, Pr: +/- 1.0 dB max to 2 MHz
•
Component channel delay: < 8 ns
•
Component S/N (Y, Pb, Pr): > 54 dB, unified weighted
Audio
• Unbalanced analog audio inputs
$
1x stereo pair
$
RCA connectors
$
Input impedance: Hi-Z
$
Line level with 18 db headroom (max level)
• Unbalanced analog audio outputs
$
3x stereo pair
$
RCA connectors
$
Output impedance: 100 Ω
$
Line level with 18 db headroom (max level)
• Balanced analog inputs
$
1x stereo pair
$
2x XLR female connectors
$
Nominal levels: +4 dBu (+4 dBm)
$
Input impedance: Hi-Z
$
Headroom (max level): 18 db
• Balanced analog outputs
$
2x stereo pair
$
4x XLR male connectors
$
Nominal levels: +4 dBu (+4 dBm)
$
Output impedance: 50 Ω
$
Headroom (max level): 18 db
• Unbalanced digital (AES/EBU) input
$
1x stereo pair
$
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
$
Maximum input level: 5 V p-p
• Unbalanced digital (AES/EBU) output
$
1x stereo pair
Matrox MXO2 specifications
316
$
BNC connector
$
Output impedance: 75 Ω
$
Nominal output level: 1V p-p
• Balanced and unbalanced analog audio performance
$
Sampling frequency: 48 kHz (using 64x oversampling)
$
Quantization: 24 bits
$
S/N: > 85 db
$
THDN at 1 kHz, nominal level: < 0.05%
Environmental specifications
• Minimum/maximum ambient operating temperatures: 0 to 40º C
• Minimum/maximum storage temperature: –40 to 75º C
• Maximum altitude for operation: 3,000 meters
• Maximum altitude for transport: 12,000 meters
• Operating humidity: 20 to 80% relative humidity (non-condensing)
• Storage humidity: 5 to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
Matrox MXO2 Rack specifications
General
• Video formats
NTSC, PAL, NTSC-EIAJ, 1080i/p/PsF, 720p, 576p, 480p
• Regulatory compliance
$
FCC Class A, CE Mark Class A, ACMA C-Tick Mark, VCCI
$
RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC
• Dimensions (without rackmount brackets)
$
Length
$
Width
208 mm (8.2”)
437 mm (17.2”)
$
Height
86 mm (3.4”) (two rack units)
• Dimensions (with rackmount brackets)
$
Length
483 mm (19”)
$
Width
208 mm (8.2”)
$
Height
89 mm (3.5”) (two rack units)
• AC power
$
100-240 VAC 50-60 Hz
$
Input: IEC320-C14 inlet
$
Output: +12V DC, 3A max
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
317
• Total power consumption
15 watts
Connections
• Genlock reference input
$
HD analog tri-level sync or SD analog bi-level black burst
$
BNC connector (75 Ω)
• Genlock reference output
$
HD analog tri-level sync or SD analog bi-level black burst
$
Loop through
$
BNC connector (75 Ω)
• RS-422
D-sub connector (9 pins)
Video
• HDMI
$
$
HD input and output
•
HDMI Y,Cb,Cr 4:2:2 (10-bit) / RGB (8-bit)
•
Eight channels of embedded audio
•
Standard Type A HDMI connector (19 pins)
SD output
•
HDMI Y,Cb,Cr 4:2:2 (10-bit) / RGB (8-bit)
•
Eight channels of embedded audio
•
Standard Type A HDMI connector (19 pins)
• SDI
$
$
HDTV input
•
HD-SDI with eight channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 299M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
Equalized input for maximum cable length support
HDTV output
•
HD-SDI with 16 channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 299M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω)
Matrox MXO2 Rack specifications
318
$
$
SDTV input
•
SD-SDI with eight channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 259M-C, SMPTE 272M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
Equalized input for maximum cable length support
SDTV output
•
SD-SDI with 16 channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 259M-C, SMPTE 272M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω)
• S-Video and composite video input
$
$
SDTV input
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
BNC connector for composite (75 Ω), terminated
•
4-pin mini-DIN S-Video connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
12-bit ADC
•
2x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
•
Automatic gain control
SDTV output
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
BNC connector for composite (75 Ω)
•
4-pin mini-DIN S-Video connector (75 Ω)
•
12-bit DAC
•
8x oversampling
• Analog component video input
$
$
HDTV input
•
EIA-770.3 compliant
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit ADC
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
HDTV output
•
EIA-770.3 compliant
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
319
$
$
•
12-bit DAC
•
2x oversampling
SDTV input
•
Betacam, Betacam SP (NTSC and NTSC-EIAJ)
•
SMPTE/EBU N10 (PAL)
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit ADC
•
4x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filter
SDTV output
•
Betacam, Betacam SP (NTSC and NTSC-EIAJ)
•
SMPTE/EBU N10 (PAL)
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit DAC
•
8x oversampling
• Analog video performance
$
$
$
HDTV analog component video (passthrough)
•
Frequency response Y: +/- 1.0 dB max to 28 MHz
•
Frequency response Pb, Pr: +/- 1.0 dB max to 12 MHz
•
Component channel delay: < 8 ns
•
Component S/N (Y, Pb, Pr): > 50 dB, unified weighted
SDTV S-Video and composite video (passthrough)
•
Amplitude error: < 4%
•
Frequency response: +/- 0.5 dB max to 5 MHz
•
2T pulse response: 1.0% max
•
Diff. Gain: < 2%, Diff. Phase: < 1 degree
•
S/N: > 58 dB, unified weighted
SDTV analog component video (passthrough)
•
Frequency response Y: +/- 0.5 dB max to 5 MHz
•
Frequency response Pb, Pr: +/- 1.0 dB max to 2 MHz
•
Component channel delay: < 8 ns
•
Component S/N (Y, Pb, Pr): > 54 dB, unified weighted
Matrox MXO2 Rack specifications
320
Audio
• Balanced analog inputs
$
2x stereo pair
$
4x XLR female connectors
$
Nominal levels: +4 dBu (+4 dBm)
$
Input impedance: Hi-Z
$
Headroom (max level): 18 db
• Balanced analog outputs
$
4x stereo pair
$
8x XLR male connectors
$
Nominal levels: +4 dBu (+4 dBm)
$
Output impedance: 50 Ω
$
Headroom (max level): 18 db
• Unbalanced digital (AES/EBU) input
$
2x stereo pair
$
2x BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
$
Maximum input level: 5 V p-p
• Unbalanced digital (AES/EBU) output
$
2x stereo pair
$
2x BNC connector
$
Output impedance: 75 Ω
$
Nominal output level: 1V p-p
• Balanced analog audio performance
$
Sampling frequency: 48 kHz (using 64x oversampling)
$
Quantization: 24 bits
$
S/N: > 85 db
$
THDN at 1 kHz, nominal level: < 0.05%
Environmental specifications
• Minimum/maximum ambient operating temperatures: 0 to 40º C
• Minimum/maximum storage temperature: –40 to 75º C
• Maximum altitude for operation: 3,000 meters
• Maximum altitude for transport: 12,000 meters
• Operating humidity: 20 to 80% relative humidity (non-condensing)
• Storage humidity: 5 to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
321
Matrox MXO2 LE specifications
General
• Video formats
NTSC, PAL, NTSC-EIAJ, 1080i/p/PsF, 720p, 576p, 480p
• Regulatory compliance
$
FCC Class A, CE Mark Class A, ACMA C-Tick Mark, VCCI
$
RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC
• Dimensions
$
Length
237 mm (9.3)”
$
Width
241 mm (9.5”)
$
Height
51 mm (2”)
• External AC/DC adapter
$
100-240 VAC 50-60 Hz
$
Input: IEC320-C14 inlet
$
Output: +12V DC, 3A max
$
Dimensions: L 104 mm × W 46 mm × H 36 mm (4.1” × 1.8” × 1.4”)
• Total power consumption
15 watts
Connections
• Genlock reference input
$
HD analog tri-level sync or SD analog bi-level black burst
$
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
• RS-422
D-sub connector (9 pins)
Video
• HDMI
$
$
HD input and output
•
HDMI Y,Cb,Cr 4:2:2 (10-bit) / RGB (8-bit)
•
Eight channels of embedded audio
•
Standard Type A HDMI connector (19 pins)
SD output
•
HDMI Y,Cb,Cr 4:2:2 (10-bit) / RGB (8-bit)
•
Eight channels of embedded audio
•
Standard Type A HDMI connector (19 pins)
• SDI
$
HDTV input
•
HD-SDI with eight channels of embedded SDI audio
Matrox MXO2 LE specifications
322
$
$
$
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 299M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
Equalized input for maximum cable length support
HDTV output
•
HD-SDI with 16 channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 299M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω)
SDTV input
•
SD-SDI with eight channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 259M-C, SMPTE 272M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
Equalized input for maximum cable length support
SDTV output
•
SD-SDI with 16 channels of embedded SDI audio
•
24-bit, 48 kHz
•
Compliant with SMPTE 259M-C, SMPTE 272M
•
BNC connector (75 Ω)
• S-Video and composite video input
$
$
SDTV input
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
BNC connector for composite (75 Ω), terminated
•
4-pin mini-DIN S-Video connector (75 Ω), terminated
•
12-bit ADC
•
2x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
•
Automatic gain control
SDTV output
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
BNC connector for composite (75 Ω)
•
4-pin mini-DIN S-Video connector (75 Ω)
•
12-bit DAC
•
8x oversampling
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
323
• Analog component video input
$
$
$
$
HDTV input
•
EIA-770.3 compliant
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit ADC
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
HDTV output
•
EIA-770.3 compliant
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit DAC
•
2x oversampling
SDTV input
•
Betacam, Betacam SP (NTSC and NTSC-EIAJ)
•
SMPTE/EBU N10 (PAL)
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit ADC
•
4x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filter
SDTV output
•
Betacam, Betacam SP (NTSC and NTSC-EIAJ)
•
SMPTE/EBU N10 (PAL)
•
BNC connectors (75 Ω)
•
12-bit DAC
•
8x oversampling
• Analog video performance
$
$
HDTV analog component video (passthrough)
•
Frequency response Y: +/- 1.0 dB max to 28 MHz
•
Frequency response Pb, Pr: +/- 1.0 dB max to 12 MHz
•
Component channel delay: < 8 ns
•
Component S/N (Y, Pb, Pr): > 50 dB, unified weighted
SDTV S-Video and composite video (passthrough)
•
Amplitude error: < 4%
•
Frequency response: +/- 0.5 dB max to 5 MHz
•
2T pulse response: 1.0% max
•
Diff. Gain: < 2%, Diff. Phase: < 1 degree
Matrox MXO2 LE specifications
324
•
$
S/N: > 58 dB, unified weighted
SDTV analog component video (passthrough)
•
Frequency response Y: +/- 0.5 dB max to 5 MHz
•
Frequency response Pb, Pr: +/- 1.0 dB max to 2 MHz
•
Component channel delay: < 8 ns
•
Component S/N (Y, Pb, Pr): > 54 dB, unified weighted
Audio
• Unbalanced analog audio inputs
$
1x stereo pair
$
RCA connectors
$
Input impedance: Hi-Z
$
Line level with 18 db headroom (max level)
• Unbalanced analog audio outputs
$
1x stereo pair
$
RCA connectors
$
Output impedance: 100 Ω
$
Line level with 18 db headroom (max level)
• Balanced analog inputs
$
1x stereo pair
$
2x XLR female connectors
$
Nominal levels: +4 dBu (+4 dBm)
$
Input impedance: Hi-Z
$
Headroom (max level): 18 db
• Balanced analog outputs
$
1x stereo pair
$
2x XLR male connectors
$
Nominal levels: +4 dBu (+4 dBm)
$
Output impedance: 50 Ω
$
Headroom (max level): 18 db
• Balanced and unbalanced analog audio performance
$
Sampling frequency: 48 kHz (using 64x oversampling)
$
Quantization: 24 bits
$
S/N: > 85 db
$
THDN at 1 kHz, nominal level: < 0.05%
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
325
Environmental specifications
• Minimum/maximum ambient operating temperatures: 0 to 40º C
• Minimum/maximum storage temperature: –40 to 75º C
• Maximum altitude for operation: 3,000 meters
• Maximum altitude for transport: 12,000 meters
• Operating humidity: 20 to 80% relative humidity (non-condensing)
• Storage humidity: 5 to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
Matrox MXO2 Mini specifications
General
• Video formats
NTSC, PAL, NTSC-EIAJ, 1080i/p/PsF, 720p, 576p, 480p
• Regulatory compliance
$
FCC Class A, CE Mark Class A, ACMA C-Tick Mark, VCCI
$
RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC
• Dimensions
$
Length
166 mm (6.5”)
$
Width
110 mm (4.3”)
$
Height
40 mm (1.6”)
• Operating voltages and power consumption
$
Included AC/DC adapter: 100-240 V AC 50-60 Hz (5 V DC, 3 A max)
$
MXO2 Mini unit: 5-25 V DC, 2.5 mm barrel-type connector
•
9 watts power consumption
Connections
Video
• HDMI video
$
$
HD input and output
•
HDMI Y,Cb,Cr 4:2:2 (10-bit) / RGB (8-bit)
•
Eight channels of embedded audio
•
Standard Type A HDMI connector (19 pins)
SD output
•
HDMI Y,Cb,Cr 4:2:2 (10-bit) / RGB (8-bit)
•
Eight channels of embedded audio
•
Standard Type A HDMI connector (19 pins)
Matrox MXO2 Mini specifications
326
• Composite video (not available if using analog component input/output)
$
$
SDTV input
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
RCA connector
•
10-bit ADC
•
4x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
•
Automatic gain control
SDTV output
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
RCA connector
•
12-bit DAC
•
16x oversampling
• S-Video (not available when using analog component input/output)
$
$
SDTV input
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
RCA connectors
•
10-bit ADC
•
4x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
•
Automatic gain control
SDTV output
•
PAL, NTSC, NTSC-EIAJ
•
RCA connectors
•
12-bit DAC
•
16x oversampling
• Analog component video (not available when using composite, or S-Video
input/output)
$
$
HDTV input
•
EIA-770.3 compliant
•
RCA connectors
•
10-bit ADC
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
HDTV output
•
EIA-770.3 compliant
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
327
$
$
•
RCA connectors
•
12-bit DAC
•
4x oversampling
SDTV input
•
Betacam, Betacam SP (NTSC and NTSC-EIAJ)
•
SMPTE/EBU N10 (PAL)
•
RCA connectors
•
10-bit ADC
•
2x oversampling
•
Anti-aliasing filter
SDTV output
•
Betacam, Betacam SP (NTSC and NTSC-EIAJ)
•
SMPTE/EBU N10 (PAL)
•
RCA connectors
•
12-bit DAC
•
16x oversampling
• Analog video performance
$
$
$
HDTV analog component video
•
Frequency response Y: +/- 1.0 dB max to 28 MHz
•
Frequency response Pb, Pr: +/- 1.0 dB max to 12 MHz
•
Component channel delay: < 8 ns
•
Component S/N (Y, Pb, Pr): > 50 dB, unified weighted
SDTV S-Video and composite video
•
Amplitude error: < 4%
•
Frequency response: +/- 0.75 dB max to 5 MHz
•
Diff. Gain: < 2%, Diff. Phase: < 1 degree
•
S/N: > 54 dB, unified weighted
SDTV analog component video
•
Frequency response Y: +/- 0.75 dB max to 5 MHz
•
Frequency response Pb, Pr: +/- 1.0 dB max to 2 MHz
•
Component channel delay: < 8 ns
•
Component S/N (Y, Pb, Pr): > 54 dB, unified weighted
Matrox MXO2 Mini specifications
328
Audio
• Unbalanced analog audio inputs
$
1x stereo pair
$
RCA connectors
$
Input impedance: > 10 k Ω
$
Line level with 18 db headroom (max level: +8 dBv)
• Unbalanced analog audio outputs
$
1x stereo pair
$
RCA connectors
$
Output impedance: < 200 Ω
$
Line level with 18 db headroom (max level: +8 dBv)
• Unbalanced analog audio performance
$
Sampling frequency: 48 kHz (using 128x oversampling)
$
Quantization: 24 bits
$
S/N: > 90 db
$
THDN at 1 kHz, nominal level: < 0.02%
$
Frequency response: +/- 0.5 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
$
Channel separation: > 100 db
Environmental specifications
• Minimum/maximum ambient operating temperatures: 0 to 40º C
• Minimum/maximum storage temperature: –40 to 75º C
• Maximum altitude for operation: 3,000 meters
• Maximum altitude for transport: 12,000 meters
• Operating humidity: 20 to 80% relative humidity (non-condensing)
• Storage humidity: 5 to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
329
Matrox PCIe host adapter specifications
Matrox PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter
(for laptops)
$
Standard ExpressCard/34
$
Dimensions: L 96 mm × W 33 mm × H 13 mm (3.8” × 1.3” × 0.5”)
Matrox PCIe host adapter (for desktops)
$
Standard low-profile PCIe (x1) card
$
PCB dimensions
•
66 mm × 69 mm (2.6” × 2.7”)
•
overall thickness including components: 19 mm (0.75”)
Matrox PCIe host adapter specifications
330
Your notes
Appendix E, Matrox MXO2 Specifications
F
Matrox Customer Support
This appendix explains how
you can register your Matrox
product and obtain customer
support.
332
How to get Matrox customer support
If you have a problem that you’re unable to solve by referring to the
documentation for your Matrox product, please contact your Matrox
representative. He or she should be able to help you quickly correct any
installation or system configuration problem.
If your representative is unable to solve your problem, contact Matrox for further
information and assistance.
Registration
You can register your Matrox product in the Matrox Support section of our
website at www.matrox.com/video/support.
Only registered users are entitled to customer support, software updates, special
promotional offers, and access to our user forum.
Keep up to date with our website
In addition to registering your Matrox product, our website offers you
up-to-the-minute information about Matrox products and software updates. Be
sure to place our site in your favorites or bookmarks:
www.matrox.com/video/support.
Contacting us
Matrox is proud to offer worldwide customer support. Please use the contact
information for your Matrox product and area as provided on our website at
www.matrox.com/video/support.
Appendix F, Matrox Customer Support
Index
Numerics
10-bit editing workflow
See Matrox 10-bit editing workflow
10-bit Uncompressed codec
See Matrox 10-bit Uncompressed codec
264 files
capturing 250, 256
exporting directly from Premiere Pro 239
exporting from Adobe Media Encoder 235
3D viewing mode
setting for HDMI output 59, 63, 147, 151, 176,
180
3ds Max WYSIWYG plug-in
See Autodesk 3ds Max WYSIWYG plug-in
8-bit Uncompressed codec
See Matrox 8-bit Uncompressed codec
A
A/V Tools
See Matrox A/V Tools
AAC audio
capturing with Matrox MAX H.264 files 256, 259
exporting with Matrox MAX H.264 files 235, 238
Adobe After Effects WYSIWYG plug-in
about 200
required steps 201
See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
Adobe Encore
capturing material for DVD authoring 70
exporting sequence for DVD authoring 87
playback settings 56
transcoding to Matrox MAX H.264 for Blu-ray 241
Adobe Flash Media Live Encoder
using with MXO2 204
Adobe Media Encoder
exporting Matrox AVI files 84
exporting Matrox MAX H.264 files 234
Adobe Photoshop WYSIWYG plug-in
about 200
required steps 201
See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
Adobe Prelude
playback settings 56
Adobe Premiere Pro
adding voice-over to sequence 87
applying Matrox video effects 101
applying Matrox video transitions 101
audio output settings 65
available Matrox effects 100
capture settings 70
closed captioning settings 67
creating Matrox chroma key effects 130
overview 129
creating Matrox color correction
primary 104
secondary 119
creating Matrox luma key effect 137
overview 136
creating Matrox wipe transitions 140
creating new project 54
displaying warnings in Events panel 54
exporting sequence to Matrox AVI file 84
exporting sequence to Matrox MAX H.264 file 235,
239
exporting sequence to tape 94
genlock settings 64, 77
loading sequence preset 54
playback settings 55
setting up Matrox device control 90
setting up scratch disks 54
using Matrox 10-bit editing workflow 55
video output settings 77
MXO2 Mini 61
MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE 56
video preview settings 69
Advanced pulldown
description of 271
See also Standard pulldown
After Effects WYSIWYG plug-in
See Adobe After Effects WYSIWYG plug-in
Analog audio volume
adjusting 66, 155, 183, 223, 255
Anamorphic video
capturing 73, 158, 186, 258
outputting 58, 62, 146, 150, 175, 179
334
Aspect ratio
conversion setting for video capture 72, 158, 186,
258
conversion setting for video output 58, 62, 145,
150, 175, 179
selecting for source video 71, 158, 185, 252
selecting for video capture 72
Audio applications
setting MXO2 as default audio playback device 10
Audio capture settings
in Adobe Premiere Pro 73
in Avid editing applications 156
in Matrox A/V Tools 188
in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture 258
monitoring audio levels 76, 159, 190
selecting channels 74, 189, 259
Audio levels
monitoring for capture 76, 159, 190
Audio output settings
in Adobe Premiere Pro 65
in Avid editing applications 154
in Matrox A/V Tools 183
in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture 254
in Telestream Wirecast 222
Audio Punch-In mode
selecting 161
Audio Punch-In tool
using for voice-over 160, 161
Audio tool
testing input levels for voice-over 162
Auto balance
performing using color correction 114
Auto key
performing using the chroma key graph 133
performing using the selective key graph 127
Autodesk 3ds Max WYSIWYG plug-in
about 200
required steps 201
See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
Autodesk Combustion WYSIWYG plug-in
about 200
required steps 202
See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
Automatic Gain Control
selecting 72, 159, 186, 253
Index
AVI files
capturing using Adobe Premiere Pro 70
capturing using Matrox A/V Tools 184, 191
capturing using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture 250,
257
exporting using Adobe Premiere Pro 84
naming in Matrox A/V Tools 191
recording using Matrox ISO recording tool 214,
218
rendering using Matrox VFW codecs 226, 229
Avid editing applications
adding voice-over to sequence 160
audio output settings 154
capture settings 156
creating new project on MXO2 144
exporting sequence to tape 163
genlock settings 152
video output settings
MXO2 Mini 148
MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE 144
B
Battery
connecting to MXO2 14
connecting to MXO2 LE 32
requirements and guidelines 3
Bit depth
selecting for SDI audio output 66, 183
selecting for video output 60, 64
Blu-ray Disc
capturing files for 250, 256
exporting files for 234, 235
transcoding files for 241
C
Calibration, monitor
See HDMI monitor calibration
Capture format
selecting for audio capture 74, 188, 258
selecting for video capture 72, 185, 256
supported on MXO2
in Adobe Premiere Pro 291
in Avid editing applications 292
in Matrox A/V Tools 293
in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture 294
335
Capturing using Adobe Premiere Pro
monitoring audio levels for 76
specifying Matrox settings for 70
Capturing using Avid editing applications
monitoring audio levels for 159
specifying Matrox settings for 156
Capturing using Matrox A/V Tools 191
from tape without device control 192
live video 191
monitoring audio levels for 190
specifying audio settings for 188
specifying video settings for 184
Capturing using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
about 250
how to capture clips 251
saving and deleting custom presets 260
specifying capture format settings for 256
specifying input settings for 252
specifying output settings for 254
starting the capture 260
Center cut video
capturing 73, 158, 186, 258
outputting 58, 62, 146, 150, 175, 179
Center zoom video
capturing 73, 158, 186, 258
outputting 58, 63, 146, 150, 175, 179
Chroma clamper effect
using 142
Chroma filtering and chroma interpolation
for rendering to VFW files 229
Chroma key effect
creating 130
overview 129
using the chroma key graph 133
Chroma key graph
using 133
Chroma key shadow effect
creating 130
overview 129
Clip information
updating in Matrox A/V Tools 192
Closed captioning
embedding in MP4 file during export 240
embedding in video output 67
overlaying on video output 68
Codec
Matrox 10-bit Uncompressed 72, 85, 185, 257
Matrox 8-bit Uncompressed 72, 85, 185, 257
Matrox DV/DVCAM 85
Matrox DVCPRO 85
Matrox DVCPRO HD 85
Matrox DVCPRO50 85
Matrox MAX H.264 234, 244
Matrox MPEG-2 IBP 72, 82
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame 72, 80, 85, 186, 257
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD 72, 80, 186
Matrox VFW codecs 229
Color balance graph
using 111
Color correction
adjusting tonal range 110
color matching clips 115
performing an auto balance 114
primary 104
secondary 119
using the selective key graph 124
using RGB curves 108
using Split View in the Program Monitor 107
using the color balance graph 111
using the luma mapping graph 117
using the Split View option 106
Color matching clips
using color balance graph 115
Color pass effect
creating with secondary color correction 128
Color space conversion options
for rendering to VFW files 228
Combustion WYSIWYG plug-in
See Autodesk Combustion WYSIWYG plug-in
Compressor
selecting for VFW render 229
Computer system
connecting to your MXO2 16
connecting to your MXO2 LE 34
connecting to your MXO2 Mini 42
connecting to your MXO2 Rack 25
requirements 2
Connections
AC power
for MXO2 14
for MXO2 LE 32
Index
336
for MXO2 Mini 40
for MXO2 Rack 24
available on Matrox MXO2 14
available on Matrox MXO2 LE 32
available on Matrox MXO2 Mini 40
available on Matrox MXO2 Rack 22
battery
for MXO2 14
for MXO2 LE 32
MXO2 LE to computer 34
MXO2 Mini to computer 42
MXO2 Rack to computer 25
MXO2 to computer 16
RS-422
for MXO2 18
for MXO2 LE 36
for MXO2 Rack 27
typical
for MXO2 19
for MXO2 LE 37
for MXO2 Mini 45
for MXO2 Rack 28
Customer support 332
D
Device control
RS-422 connection
to MXO2 18
to MXO2 LE 36
to MXO2 Rack 27
RS-422 in Adobe Premiere Pro
capturing material 70
exporting to tape 94
obtaining frame-accurate export to tape 97
requirements for using 93
setting up 90
RS-422 in Avid editing applications
capturing material 156
exporting to tape 163
Digtal Cut tool
setting output for 163
Drivers
installing for MXO2 hardware 8
updating for display card 10
Drop frame time code
displaying in Matrox A/V Tools 171
Index
DVL files
saving and loading 193
E
Editing video format
selecting in Matrox A/V Tools 171
Effect presets 101
Error notification
in Events panel 54
with X.info 267
Events panel
displaying warnings in 54
Exporting to disk
Matrox AVI files 84
Matrox MAX H.264 files 234
MPEG-2 for DVD authoring 87
See also Rendering using VFW programs
Exporting to tape
using Adobe Premiere Pro 94
with Matrox device control 94
using Avid editing applications 163
ExpressCard
See PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter
Expression Encoder
See Microsoft Expression Encoder
eyeon Fusion WYSIWYG plug-in
about 200
required steps 202
See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
F
Firmware
updating for MXO2 9
Flash Media Live Encoder
See Adobe Flash Media Live Encoder
Fusion WYSIWYG plug-in
See eyeon Fusion WYSIWYG plug-in
G
General settings
in Matrox A/V Tools 172
Genlock settings
in Adobe Premiere Pro 64, 77
in Avid editing applicationsr 152
in Matrox A/V Tools 181
337
Genlock source
selecting 64, 152, 181
Genlock video format
selecting 65, 153, 182
GFX files
installing for Matrox wipes 9
uninstalling 11
H
H.264 files
capturing 250
exporting 234
Hardware information
displaying with X.info 266
Hardware, MXO2
before you install 6
installing 6
safety precautions 6
specifications 311
HDMI monitor calibration
calibrating your HDMI monitor 48
enabling and disabling the Matrox HDMI calibration settings 50
loading Matrox HDMI calibration settings 50
overview 48
Hibernation mode
using with MXO2 11
Horizontal delay
adjusting 65, 153, 182
I
Input aspect ratio
selecting 71, 158, 185, 252
Input format
selecting 71, 158, 185, 205, 210, 213, 215, 252
Input source
selecting for audio capture 74, 158, 188, 253
selecting for audio streaming 205, 210, 214
selecting for Matrox ISO audio recording 216
selecting for Matrox ISO video recording 215
selecting for video capture 71, 158, 185, 252
selecting for video streaming 205, 210, 213
Inputs on MXO2 Mini
analog RCA audio 280
available 277
component (Y, Pb, Pr) 280
composite (Y) 280
HDMI 280
S-Video (Pb, Pr) 280
Inputs on MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE
AES/EBU audio 279
analog RCA audio 279
analog XLR audio 279
available on MXO2 274
available on MXO2 LE 276
available on MXO2 Rack 275
component (Y, Pb, Pr) 279
composite (CVBS) 279
HDMI 278
REF 278
SDI 278
S-Video (Y/C) 279
Internet site, Matrox 332
ISO recording
See Matrox ISO recording
Isolating colors in a clip
using secondary color correction 128
K
Key colors
modifying using the chroma key graph 133
Keyboard shortcuts
for Matrox A/V Tools 197
L
Letterbox video
capturing 73, 158, 186, 258
outputting 58, 62, 146, 150, 175, 179
License agreement i
VFW software codecs v
LightWave 3D WYSIWYG plug-in
See NewTek LightWave 3D WYSIWYG plug-in
Live media streaming
using Adobe Flash Media Live Encoder 204
using Livestream Procaster 208
using Microsoft Expression 204
using Telestream Wirecast 212
Livestream Procaster
using with MXO2 208
Luma key effect
creating 137
overview 136
Index
338
using the luma key graph 138
Luma key graph
using 138
Luma mapping graph
using 117
Luminance range settings
for rendering to VFW files 228
M
M2V files
capturing using Adobe Premiere Pro 70, 79
Mask
applying to Matrox effects 102
applying using Select Mask 103
Matrox
contacting us 332
WWW site 332
Matrox 10-bit editing workflow
in Adobe Premiere Pro 55
Matrox 10-bit Uncompressed codec
selecting for capture in A/V Tools 185
selecting for capture in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
257
selecting for capture in Premiere Pro 72
selecting for export in Premiere Pro 85
Matrox 8-bit Uncompressed codec
selecting for capture in A/V Tools 185
selecting for capture in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
257
selecting for capture in Premiere Pro 72
selecting for export in Premiere Pro 85
Matrox A/V Tools
about 166
audio capture settings 188
audio output settings 183
CAM button 167
capture settings 184
capturing clips 191
capturing from tape without device control 192
capturing live video 191
changing In/Out icons 192
clip ID and clip names 191
clip list 193
adding clips 193
copying clips 194
deleting clips 194
Index
detaching and resizing 195
moving clips 194
playing back clips 193
saving and loading 193
defining options 170
Disk button 167
editing clips 192
general settings 172
genlock settings 181
grabbing a single-frame image 195
keyboard shortcuts 197
pop-up menu 168
selecting pulldown method for output 179
time code
displaying 170
transport controls 168
video capture settings 184
video output settings
for MXO2 Mini 178
MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE 174
Matrox DV/DVCAM codec
selecting for export in Premiere Pro 85
selecting for VFW render 229
Matrox DVCPRO codec
selecting for export in Premiere Pro 85
selecting for VFW render 229
Matrox DVCPRO HD codec
configuring for VFW render 230
selecting for export in Premiere Pro 85
selecting for VFW render 229
Matrox DVCPRO50 codec
selecting for export in Premiere Pro 85
selecting for VFW render 229
Matrox effect patterns
installing 9
removing 11
Matrox HDMI Calibration Utility
using 48
Matrox ISO recording 214
AVI files 214, 218
file naming conventions 218
input states and video formats 221
log file (Record.Log) 221
output settings for monitoring 222
session 219
starting and stopping 219
339
status indicator 220
time code 219
WAV files 214, 217, 218
maximum duration 220
Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
about 250
how to capture clips 251
saving and deleting custom presets 260
specifying capture format settings for 256
specifying input settings for 252
specifying output settings for 254
starting the capture 260
Matrox MAX H.264 codec 234
for transcoding in Adobe Encore 241
specifying settings for 244
Matrox MAX H.264 files
capturing 251
exporting directly from Premiere Pro 239
exporting from Adobe Media Encoder 234
Matrox MPEG-2 IBP codec
configuring in Adobe Premiere Pro 82
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame + Alpha codec
configuring for VFW render 231
selecting for VFW render 229
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codec
configuring for VFW render 231
configuring in Premiere Pro 80
selecting for capture in A/V Tools 186
selecting for capture in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture
257
selecting for capture in Premiere Pro 72
selecting for export in Premiere Pro 85
selecting for VFW render 229
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD + Alpha codec
configuring for VFW render 231
selecting for VFW render 229
Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD codec
configuring for VFW render 231
configuring in Premiere Pro 80
selecting for capture in A/V Tools 186
selecting for capture in Premiere Pro 72
selecting for VFW render 229
Matrox Mtx.utils
installing 8
removing 11
Matrox Player
setting as audio and video device 55
Matrox Uncompressed HD + Alpha codec
configuring for VFW render 230
selecting for VFW render 230
Matrox Uncompressed HD codec
configuring for VFW render 230
selecting for VFW render 230
Matrox Uncompressed SD + Alpha codec
configuring for VFW render 230
selecting for VFW render 230
Matrox Uncompressed SD codec
configuring for VFW render 230
selecting for VFW render 230
Matrox VFW software codecs
installing 9
removing 11
Matrox video effects
filtering in Effects panel 100
how to apply 101
Matrox video transitions
filtering in Effects panel 100
how to apply 101
Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel
using 200
Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
about 200
installing 9
re-installing 9
removing 9
required steps 201
Matrox X.info
using 264
Media Composer
See Avid editing applications
Microsoft Expression Encoder
using with MXO2 204
Mobile devices
capturing files for 250, 257
exporting files for 234, 235
Monitor calibration
See HDMI monitor calibration
Monitoring your system
with X.info 264
Index
340
MP4 files
capturing 250, 257
capturing with MPEG-2 I-frame AVI 258
exporting directly from Premiere Pro 239
exporting from Adobe Media Encoder 235
exporting with closed captioning 240
MPEG-2 IBP codec
See Matrox MPEG-2 IBP codec
MPEG-2 I-frame codec
See Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame codec
MPEG-2 I-frame HD codec
See Matrox MPEG-2 I-frame HD codec
MTX files
loading Matrox HDMI calibration settings 50
saving Matrox HDMI calibration settings 49
N
NewsCutter
See Avid editing applications
NewTek LightWave 3D WYSIWYG plug-in
about 200
required steps 202
See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
Non-drop frame time code
displaying in Matrox A/V Tools 171
NTSC setup level
selecting for analog video 59, 62, 146, 150, 176,
179, 222, 254
O
Outputs on MXO2 Mini
analog RCA audio 288
available 284
component (Y, Pb, Pr) 287
composite (Y) 288
HDMI 287
S-Video (Pb, Pr) 287
Outputs on MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE
AES/EBU audio 286
analog RCA audio 286
analog XLR audio 286
available on MXO2 281
available on MXO2 LE 283
available on MXO2 Rack 282
component (Y, Pb, Pr) 285
composite (CVBS) 286
Index
HDMI 285
SDI 285
S-Video (Y/C) 286
P
PCIe host adapter
connecting to MXO2 17
connecting to MXO2 LE 35
connecting to MXO2 Mini 43
connecting to MXO2 Rack 26
installing 7
specifications 329
PCIe host ExpressCard/34 adapter
connecting to MXO2 17
connecting to MXO2 LE 35
connecting to MXO2 Mini 43
connecting to MXO2 Rack 26
installing 7
removing 8
specifications 329
Photoshop WYSIWYG plug-in
See Adobe Photoshop WYSIWYG plug-in
Pillarbox video
capturing 73, 158, 186, 258
outputting 58, 62, 146, 150, 175, 179
Playback settings
defining for Adobe applications 55
defining for Avid editing applications 144
Power
connecting to MXO2 14
connecting to MXO2 LE 32
connecting to MXO2 Mini 40
connecting to MXO2 Rack 24
functionality in MXO2 14
functionality in MXO2 LE 32
See also Battery
Power adapter plugs
connecting for MXO2 Mini 40
Preconfigured Matrox video effects
applying 101
Premiere Pro
See Adobe Premiere Pro
Proc amps
adjusting using Matrox color correction 120
Procaster
See Livestream Procaster
341
Pulldown
description of advanced 271
description of standard 270
Pulldown method
selecting for output 58, 62, 145, 150, 175, 179
R
Registering your Matrox product 332
Rendering using Matrox VFW codecs
before you start 227
selecting color space conversion options 228
selecting compressor 229
Returning procedure iv
RGB
setting for component output 59, 63, 146, 151,
176, 179, 223, 255
setting for HDMI output 59, 63, 147, 151, 176,
179, 223, 255
RGB curves
using 108
RS-422 connection
to MXO2 18
to MXO2 LE 36
to MXO2 Rack 27
See also Device control
RS-422 device control
in Adobe Premiere Pro
obtaining frame-accurate export to tape 97
requirements for using 93
setting up 90
in Avid editing applications
using for capture 156
using for export to tape 163
S
SC/H Phase
adjusting 60, 147, 177, 223, 255
Scratch disks
specifying 54
Scrubbing audio
specifying preroll/postroll frames 173
Scrubbing mode
selecting 172
Secondary color correction
creating a color pass effect 128
Select Mask
using 103
Selective key graph
using 124
Sequence preset
loading for Adobe Premiere Pro 54
Service, returns iv
Setup level
selecting for NTSC analog video 59, 62, 146, 150,
176, 179, 222, 254
Sleep mode
using with MXO2 11
Software installation
Matrox effect patterns 9
Matrox Mtx.utils 8
Matrox VFW software codecs 9
Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins 9
Sound card
using to output audio from Avid editing applications
155
Specifications
host ExpressCard/34 adapter 329
Matrox MXO2 312
Matrox MXO2 LE 321
Matrox MXO2 Mini 325
Matrox MXO2 Rack 316
PCIe host adapter 329
Split View
using 106
working with in the Program Monitor 107
Standard pulldown
description of 270
See also Advanced pulldown
Style conventions, used in this manual 3
Super black
allowing for output video 60, 63, 148, 151, 177,
180
Super white
allowing for output video 60, 63, 148, 151, 177,
180
Symphony
See Avid editing applications
System information
displaying with X.info 264
Index
342
System requirements 2
T
Technical support 332
Telestream Wirecast
Matrox ISO recording 214
media streaming 212
using with MXO2 212
Temperature
monitoring for MXO2 hardware 267
TGA files
creating using Matrox A/V Tools 195
Time code
displaying in Matrox A/V Tools 170, 171
Transcoding
to Matrox MAX H.264 for Blu-ray 241
V
Vertical delay
adjusting 65, 153, 182
Video capture settings
in Adobe Premiere Pro 70
in Avid editing applications 156
in Matrox A/V Tools 185
in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture 256
Video for Windows programs 226
rendering Matrox AVI file 229
Video for Windows software codecs
installing 9
removing 11
Video formats
expressed in this manual 4
See also Video input formats
See also Video output formats
Video input formats
supported on MXO2 290
See also Capture format
Video output formats
supported on MXO2 during capture
in Adobe Premiere Pro 307
in Avid editing applications 308
in Matrox A/V Tools 309
in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture 310
supported on MXO2 during playback
in Adobe Premiere Pro 296
in Avid editing applications 301
Index
in Matrox A/V Tools and Matrox WYSIWYG
303
supported on MXO2 using Telestream Wirecast
310
Video output settings
in Adobe Premiere Pro
for MXO2 Mini 61
for MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE 56
in Avid editing applications
for MXO2 Mini 148
for MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE 144
in Matrox A/V Tools
for MXO2 Mini 178
for MXO2, MXO2 Rack, and MXO2 LE 174
in Matrox MAX H.264 Capture 254
in Telestream Wirecast 222
Video preview settings
in Adobe Premiere Pro 69
Video processing format 173
Voice-over
adding to sequence
in Adobe Premiere Pro 87
in Avid editing applications 160
connection and setup
in Adobe Premiere Pro 87
in Avid editing applications 160
recording
in Adobe Premiere Pro 88
in Avid editing applications 161
VU meters 76, 190
W
Warnings
displayed for hardware issues by X.info 267
displaying in Adobe Premiere Pro’s Events panel 54
re-enabling using X.info 265
Warranty i
WAV files
capturing using Adobe Premiere Pro 73
capturing using Matrox A/V Tools 188
capturing using Matrox MAX H.264 Capture 256,
257, 259
exporting with Matrox MAX H.264 files 235, 238,
243
recording using Matrox ISO recording tool 214,
217, 218
343
Web
capturing files for 250, 257
exporting files for 234, 235
Wipe transitions
creating 140
Wirecast
See Telestream Wirecast
WWW site, Matrox 332
WYSIWYG Control Panel
See Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel
WYSIWYG plug-ins
See Matrox WYSIWYG plug-ins
X
X.info
error notification 267
hardware information 266
monitoring temperatures 267
system information 264
using 264
XMP files
created for M2V clips 79
Y
YUV
setting for component output 59, 63, 146, 151,
176, 179, 223, 255
setting for HDMI output 59, 63, 147, 151, 176,
179, 223, 255
Index
344
Your notes
Index
Compliance Statements
USA
FCC Compliance Statement
Remark for the Matrox hardware products supported by this guide
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of
this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
WARNING
Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for the compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. The
use of shielded cables for connection of the equipment and other peripherals is required to meet FCC requirements.
Canada
(English) Industry Canada Compliance Statement
CAN-ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3 (A)
Remark for the Matrox hardware products supported by this guide
These digital devices do not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emission from digital devices set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of Industry Canada.
(Français) Conformité avec les exigences de l’Industrie Canada
CAN-ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3 (A)
Remarque sur les produits matériels Matrox couverts par ce guide
Ces appareils numériques n’émettent aucun bruit radioélectrique dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par Industrie Canada.
Europe
(English) European user’s information – Declaration of Conformity
Remark for the Matrox hardware products supported by this guide
These devices comply with EC Directive 2006/95/EC for a Class A digital device. They have been tested and found to comply with EN55022/CISPR22 and
EN55024/CISPR24. In a domestic environment these products may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. To meet
EC requirements, shielded cables must be used to connect the equipment and other peripherals. Analog A/V cables connected to Matrox MXO2 Mini must be limited to
less than three meters to comply with EEC and EMC directives. These products have been tested in a typical Class A compliant host system. It is assumed that these
products will also achieve compliance in any Class A compliant system.
(Français) Informations aux utilisateurs Européens – Déclaration de conformité
Remarque sur les produits matériels Matrox couverts par ce guide
Ces unités sont conformes à la directive communautaire 2006/95/EC pour les unités numériques de classe A. Les tests effectués ont prouvé qu’elles sont conformes aux
normes EN55022/CISPR22 et EN55024/CISPR24. Le fonctionnement de ces produits dans un environnement résidentiel peut causer des interférences radio, dans ce cas
l’utilisateur peut être amené à prendre les mesures appropriées. Pour respecter les impératifs communautaires, les câbles de connexion entre l’équipement et ses
périphériques doivent être blindés. Afin de se conformer aux exigences des directives de la CEE et de l’EMC, les câbles analogiques audio/vidéo reliés à Matrox MXO2
Mini ne doivent pas dépasser trois mètres. Ces produits ont été testés dans un système hôte typique compatible classe A. On suppose qu’ils présenteront la même
compatibilité dans tout système compatible classe A.
(Deutsch) Information für europäische Anwender – Konformitätserklärung
Anmerkung für die Matrox Hardware-Produktunterstützung durch dieses Handbuch
Diese Geräte entsprechen EG Direktive 2006/95/EC für ein digitales Gerät Klasse A. Sie wurden getestet und entsprechen demnach EN55022/CISPR22 und
EN55024/CISPR24. In einer Wohnumgebung können diese Produkte Funkinterferenzen erzeugen, und der Benutzer kann genötigt sein, entsprechende Maßnahmen zu
ergreifen. Um EG-Anforderungen zu entsprechen, müssen zum Anschließen des ausrüstung und anderer Peripheriegeräte abgeschirmte Kabel verwendet werden.
Analoge A/V Kabel, die an Matrox MXO2 Mini angeschlossen werden, müssen eine Länge von weniger als drei Metern aufweisen um den EWG-und EMV-Richtlinien
zu entsprechen. Diese Produkt wurden in einem typischen, der Klasse A entsprechenden, Host-System getestet. Es wird davon ausgegangen, daß diese Produkte auch in
jedem Klasse A entsprechenden System entsprechend funktionieren.
(Italiano) Informazioni per gli utenti europei – Dichiarazione di conformità
Nota per i prodotti hardware Matrox supportati da questa guida
Questi dispositivi sono conformi alla direttiva CEE 2006/95/EC relativamente ai dispositivi digitali di Classe A. Sono stati provati e sono risultati conformi alle norme
EN55022/CISPR22 e EN55024/CISPR24. In un ambiente domestico, questi prodotti possono causare radiointerferenze, nel qual caso all’utente potrebbe venire richiesto
di prendere le misure adeguate. Per soddisfare i requisiti CEE, l’apparecchiatura e le altre periferiche vanno collegati con cavi schermati. I cavi analogici A/V collegati a
Matrox MXO2 Mini devono essere limitati a meno di tre metri per essere conformi alle direttive di contabilità elettromagnetica e del EEC. Questi prodotti sono stati
provati in un tipico sistema host conforme alla Classe A. Inoltre, si dà per scontato che questi prodotti acquisiranno la conformità in qualsiasi sistema conforme alla
Classe A.
(Español) Información para usuarios europeos – Declaración de conformidad
Observación referente a los productos de hardware de Matrox apoyados por este manual
Estos dispositivos cumplen con la directiva de la CE 2006/95/EC para dispositivos digitales de Clase A. Dichos dispositivos han sido sometidos a prueba y se ha
comprobado que cumplen con las normas EN55022/CISPR22 y EN55024/CISPR24. En entornos residenciales, estos productos pueden causar interferencias en las
comunicaciones por radio; en tal caso el usuario deberá adoptar las medidas adecuadas. Para satisfacer las disposiciones de la CE, deberán utilizarse cables apantallados
para conectar el equipo y demás periféricos. Los cables análogos de A/V conectados con Matrox MXO2 Mini se deben limitar a menos de tres metros para conformidad
con las directivas del EEC y del EMC. Estos productos han sido sometidos a prueba en un típico sistema anfitrión que responde a los requisitos de la Clase A. Se supone
que estos productos cumplirán también con las normas en cualquier sistema que responda a los requisitos de la Clase A.
www.matrox.com/video
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement